3-1 Mechanical HandBook 17-18 PDF

Dept.
of MECH Student Hand Book
III-B.Tech
STUDENT HANDBOOK
A.Y.2017-18 / I SEM
Department of MECH
MARRI LAXMAN REDDY INSTITUTIONS
MLR Institute of Technology
Dundigal (V), Quthbullapur (M), R.R Dist,
Hyderabad – 500043, A.P
www.mlrinstitutions.ac.in
MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043

Dept. of MECH Student Hand Book
VISION
STATEMENT
VISION STATEMENT OF MLRIT
To create and nurture competent Engineers and managers who would be enterprise
leaders in all parts of the world with aims of reaching the skies and touching the stars and yet
feet firmly planted on the ground – good human beings steeped in ethical and moral values.
MISSION
STATEMENT
MISSION STATEMENT OF MLRIT
MLR Institute of Technology is committed to providing a positive, professional and
conducive learning environment where all students are inspired to achieve their potential and
strive for excellence in a global society as dignified professionals with the cooperation of all
stakeholders.
GOALS
OF MLRIT
GOALS OF MLRIT
Goals of Engineering education at undergraduate / graduate level:

 Equip students with industry – accepted career and life skills
 To create a knowledge warehouse for student
 To disseminate information on skills and competencies that are in use and in demand by
the industry
 To create learning environment where the campus culture acts as a catalyst to student
fraternity to understand their core competencies, enhance their competencies and
improve their career prospects.
 To provide base for lifelong learning and professional development in support of evolving
career objectives, which include being informed, effective, and responsible participants
within the engineering profession and in society.
 To prepare students for graduate study in Engineering and Technology. To prepare
graduates to engineering practice by learning from professional engineering assignments.

Our Pioneers…
MARRI LAXMAN REDDY – CHAIRMAN
Sri Marri Laxman Reddy, the founder Chairman of MLR Institutions has been in
the field of education for the last 23 years with the aim of spreading quality
education among children at the school & college levels. MLR Institute of
Technology is the culmination of his dreams. He is also founder chairman of
Marri Laxman Reddy Institute of Technology & Management, MLR Institute of
Pharmacy, St. Martin’s Engineering College and St. Martins Schools at
Balanagar, Chintal and Malkajgiri. He is a veteran athlete of international repute.
MARRI RAJASEKHAR REDDY – SECRETARY

Sri Marri Rajashekar Reddy, the Secretary of MLR Institutions has the distinction of establishing the
Institute of Aeronautical Engineering, MLR Institute of Technology,
MLR Institute of Pharmacy, Vardhaman Engineering College, Vidyanjali
Grammar School at L.B.Nagar and Institute of Aircraft Maintenance
Engineering, approved by DGCA. He is also Treasurer of Indo-US
Collaboration for Engineering Education of A.P. Chapter. Mr. M.
Rajasekhar Reddy, a person with remarkable abilities and great acumen
and a dynamic leader. He is known to be the dynamic mentor of MLR
Institute of Technology who is always on the sprit to take the institute to
newer levels in every aspect of an \"Ideal Institution" and strives hard to
make every dream a reality. He likes his father Mr. M. Laxman Reddy,
who has a credit of establishing Institute of Aeronautical Engineering
adding a new flavor to St. Martins group of Institutions and Vidyanjali
Grammar School. His ability to turn adversities into opportunities is unquestionable. The Secretary has a
vision of establishing MLR Institute of Technologyas a brand. He strives hard to initiate various industry
oriented programs for the benefit of the students and he envisions his students to be present at the top most
position in the industry.
Dr. P. BHASKARA REDDY – DIRECTOR

Dr. P. Bhaskara Reddy, B.E.(ECE), M.Tech., Ph.D., F.I.S.E.E., MCSI,
MISTE, MIETE,MEMCE. the Director of MLR Institute of Technology, is a
young and dynamic Professor of ECE, has 27 years of Industry,Teaching,
Research and Administrative experience in Reputed Engineering Colleges. In
24 years of experience served various positions from Asst.Professor to
Principal.
Research&Guidance: Published 1 Book (International Edition) "Information
Technology in Technical Education – Economic Development by "LAMBERT
Academic Publishing" Publishied 9 Laboratry Manuals, 84 Research papers at National and International
Level on Education, Electronics Communication, I.T, Computer Networks, E-Commerce etc. Guided 5
Reserach Scholars for their Doctorates, about 50 M.Tech., M.C.A and B.Tech projects.
Symposiums Conducted: 11 National Level Technical Symposiums on various topics in Electronics &
Communications, Computers etc.
Awards Received:
1) Bharath Jyothi Award in 2003 from IIFS, New Delhi, 2) Rastraprathiba Award in 2004 from ICSEP,
New Delhi, 3) Knowledge Award from Alumniof SVHCE for the year 2001.


(Affiliated to JNTU & Approved by AICTE)
Dundigal, Quthbullapur Mandal, R.R. Dist.- 500 043.
Ph: 08418 – 204066, 204088, 9866755166
MECH STUDENT HANDBOOK

III B Tech – I Semester
Academic Year: 2017-2018
Document No: MLRIT/MECH/SHB/2017-18 Date of Issue: July-2017

TABLE OF CONTENT
PAGE.
S.NO CONTENT
NO.
1 1.GENERAL INFORMATION 1-6
About the College
1.1 Beautiful Campus
1.2 Faculty
1.3 Infrastructures
1.4 Laboratories
1.5 TOEFL Centre
1.6 English Language Laboratory:
1.7 R&D Cell
1.8 Library
1.9 National Programme on Technology Enhanced Learning (NPTEL)
1.10 Co-Curricular Activities
1.11 Professional Bodies
1.12 Extra-Curricular Activities
1.13 Students Counseling & Career Services Dept (SCCS – Dept)
1.14 Finishing School
1.15 In House Projects
1.16 MOU’s
1.17 Student Achievement
1.18 Contact Information
2 2.0 PLACEMENT & HIGHER STUDIES 7-10
2.1 Industry Grade Skills Required For Employment
2.2 Important Criteria of Employment
2.3 Higher Studies
2.4 Various Scholarships Available in India
2.5 Various International Scholarships Available in India
3 3.0 STUDENT CAREER ORIENTED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION 11-11
COURSES
3.1 Help Desk
4 4.0 PERFORMANCE MONITORING AND GUIDANCE 12-13
4.1 Student Feedback
4.2 Class Teacher
4.3 Class Representatives And Their Roles
4.4 Performance Counseling
4.5 Remedial Classes / Tutorial / Revisions
4.6 Backlog Management
4.7 Correspondence With Parents
5 5.0 RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR STUDENTS 14-19
5.1 Administrative
5.2 Academic
5.3 Dress Code
5.4 Discipline & Punctuality
5.5 Lab Classes
5.6 Fee
5.7 Transport
5.8 Library Rules
5.9 General
5.10 Ragging
6 6.0 ACADEMIC REGULATIONS R13 FOR B.TECH. (REGULAR) 20-24
6.1 Award of B.Tech. Degree Courses of Study
6.2 Maximum duration for course completion
6.3 Credits
6.4 Distribution And Weight Age of Marks
6.5 Attendance Requirements
6.6 Minimum Academic Requirements
7 7.0 COURSE CALENDER FOR THE YEAR 25-25
8 8.0 II YEAR I SEM COURSE STRUCTURE 26--26
9 9.0 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY (DOM)–A10321 27-70
9.1 Course Description
9.2 Prerequisites
9.3 Marks Distributions
9.4 Evaluation Scheme
9.5 Course Outcomes
9.6 How Program Outcomes are Assessed
9.7 JNTUH Syllabus
9.8 Course Plan
9.9 Mapping Course Objectives Leading to The Achievement of
Program Outcomes
9.10 Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to The Achievement of
Program Outcomes
Unit 1to 5
9.11 Objective Questions
9.12 Tutorial Questions
9.13 Assignment Questions
10 10.0 MACHINE TOOLS (MT)–A10322 71-114
10.2 Prerequisites
10.5 Course Outcomes
10.7 JNTUH Syllabus
10.8 Course Plan
Program Outcomes
Program Outcomes
Unit 1to 5
11 11.0 THERMAL ENGINEERING– II (TE-II) – A10323 115-159
11.2 Prerequisites
11.7 JNTUH Syllabus
11.8 Course Plan
Program Outcomes
Program Outcomes
Unit 1to 5
12 12.0 DESIGN OF MACHINE MEMBERS-II(DMM-II)– A10324 160-235
12.2 Prerequisites
12.7 Syllabus
12.8 Course Plan
Program Outcomes
Program Outcomes
Unit 1to 5
13 13.0 BASICS OF THERMODYNAMICS - A10326 236-283
13.2 Prerequisites
13.7 Syllabus
13.8 Course Plan
Program Outcomes
Program Outcomes
Unit 1to 5
14 14.0 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING MATERIALS - 284-320
A10327
14.2 Prerequisites
14.7 JNTUH Syllabus
14.8 Course Plan
Program Outcomes
Program Outcomes
Unit 1to 5
15 15.0 THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB - A10328 321-327
16 16.0 MACHINE TOOLS LAB - A10329 328-335
17 17.0 DYNAMICS LAB - A10330 336-343
Dept. of MECH STUDENT HANDBOOK

(AUTONOMOUS)
(Affiliated to JNTU & Approved by AICTE)
Dundigal, Quthbullapur Mandal, R.R. Dist.- 500 043.
Ph: 08418 – 204066, 204088, 9866755166
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
About the College
1.1 BEAUTIFUL CAMPUS:
Set in Sylvan surroundings away from the hustle & bustle of city life yet only
4 km away from Mahindra Satyam Technology Park on Balanagar – Narsapur
state highway, the Institute is extremely conducive to academic, co-curricular
and extra-curricular activities. It has large and well ventilated buildings with
modern equipment in place and “State of the art”, sports facilities.
HIGHLIGHTS:
1.2 FACULTY:
The College is proud to have the best faculty, a blend of experienced and
academics with eminent academicians team IIT’s, NIT’s and other reputed
organizations teaching at the Institute that makes MLRIT as one of the best
Institute pursue B.Tech, M.Tech, MCA and MBA as one of the under JNTU
Hyderabad. The faculty is constantly encouraged to upgrade their
qualifications and a number of them have enrolled for Ph.D. Most of the
faculty members have been empowered with High Impact teaching under
Wipro Mission 10X program.
1.3 INFRASTRUCTURES:
The Institute is housed in a RCC Building with a built up area of 2.50 Lakh
Sq. Ft in 10 Acres and established an Air Conditioned Auditorium with
Seminar Halls and a Central Library. A good canteen caters hygienic food and
a fleet of buses running from all important points to bring the students to the
college. Accessibility of HDFC Bank ATM within the Campus is an recent
addition to enable students and faculty to withdraw cash anytime.
1.4 LABORATORIES:
The Institute has State of the art laboratories with 500 plus Pentium IV
Branded Systems equipped with latest hardware and software with online
testing facility catering to the needs of CSE, IT. The Institute also has well
equipped Electronic Labs, Aeronautical Engineering Labs and Workshops for
ECE and Aeronautical Engineering Students. The college has recently
established Microsoft, IBM for CSE/IT cadence lab for VLSI design and
CATIA Aeronautical Design Lab.
1.5 TOEFL CENTRE:

The Institute is an Authorized TOEFL iBT Centre, which will conduct tests all
through the year as per the IBT schedule.
MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 1

1.6 ENGLISH LANGUAGE LABORATORY:

The Institute has established Ultramodern Computerized English language
Laboratory with 60 plus Computer Systems loaded with latest Software to
enhance the Soft skills of Students to make the Students Industry ready.
1.7 R&D Cell:

The Institute has an R&D Cell under the Chairmanship of ?. The R&D cell
undertakes externally funded R&D projects from agencies like AICTE, DST,
UGC and other similar state, private and society / trust bodies. It also
undertakes research publications and interactions of faculty members with
outside world.
1.8 LIBRARY:
The Institute Library has over 14598 books and 78 National and International
journals that are required to all branches of Engineering. The Institute has the
unique distinction of becoming Member of DELNET that connects more than
700 libraries in Asia Pacific Region. The Library has 35 Computers with 10
MB PS, Internet Facility that makes our knowledge Savvy Students to be
technically competent on par with Industry professionals.
1.9 NATIONAL PROGRAMME ON TECHNOLOGY ENHANCED

LEARNING (NPTEL)
The main objective of NPTEL program is to enhance the quality of
engineering education in the country by developing curriculum based video
and web courses. This is being carried out by seven IITs and IISc Bangalore as
a collaborative project. In the first phase of the project, supplementary content
for 129 web courses in engineering / science and humanities have been
developed. Each course contains materials that can be covered in depth in 60
or more lecture hours. In addition, 110 courses have been developed in video
format, with each course comprising of approximately 60 or more one-hour
lectures. In the next phase other premier institutions are also likely to
participate in content creation.
1.10 CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:

The Institution organizes Local Industrial Visits to Organizations like
DOORDARSHAN, BSNL, and to Student Conferences like HYSEA,
Student Conference at INFOSYS, Gachibowli Campus, and Government
Sponsored Summits like INDO SOFT IT Summit at HITEX City Convention
Centre to Interface with the Industry for Career Planning and to make them
Industry Ready. The Institute focuses on Techno Management Events like
Technonium and ZAVTRA to enhance the Technical Skills and Soft Skills to
make them Employable.
1.11 PROFESSIONAL BODIES:

MLR Institute of Technology has the unique distinction of becoming
Institutional Member in Professional bodies such as Confederation of Indian
Industry (CII), Aeronautical Society of India (AeSI), Computer Society of
India (CSI), Institute of Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

(IETE), Indian Society of Technical Education (ISTE), ELIAP and

Hyderabad Management Association (HMA),Society of Automotive
Engineers (SAEINDIA).
1.12 EXTRA-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:

The Institute helps the B.Tech, M.Tech and MBA Students to imbibe
Culture, Knowledge and Sportsman Spirit during their Study Period.
The Institution has a Basketball Court, Volley ball Court, Beach Volley ball
Court, Cricket Stadium with 400 meter excellent track for Athletic Meet and
Indoor Stadium for Shuttle Badminton and Gymnasium. MLRIT has been
regularly conducting JNTU Zonal Games Football, Cricket, and State level
Volleyball Tournaments. The Institute has been awarded as the best
organizer for conducting JNTU Zone A Intercollegiate Tournaments by
JNTUH. MLRIT is affiliated to Hyderabad Cricket Association (HCA) to
play league Cricket Matches. The college has conducted 5K RUN in 2008-09
and south zone Cricket Tournament in 2009-10. The college has been
conducting JNTU-H Cricket Tournament in 2009-10.
The Institute also organizes events like Traditional Day, Annual Day,
Fashion Shows, Rock shows and other Cultural Events. MLR Institutions
has been conducting Traditional Day every year. The purpose of Celebrating
traditional day is basically to imbibe a spirit of Oneness, where the First year
Students who have joined the Institute shed their Inhibitions, play and dine
together with their seniors and recollect the old traditions & glory of the Past.
Apart from that the traditional day is being celebrated with a purpose of
removing fear and as a measure of Anti-Ragging activity.
The college has a National Service Scheme (NSS) unit, which conducts a
number of programmes viz blood donation camp, tree plantation, community
services in the adjoining villages, flood relief, etc. The college has sent a
team of volunteers for flood relief service on 14th October 2009 to
MahaboobNagar.
1.13 STUDENTS COUNSELING & CAREER SERVICES DEPT

(SCCS – DEPT):
MLRIT is only institution among 600 + professional colleges in AP, that
takes into consideration each student individual aspiration and ambition into
audit, and extend support on exclusive basis to each student for successful
future into Employment/ Entrepreneur/ Research & Development / Higher
Education before graduating from our campus.
1.14 FINISHING SCHOOL:

MLR Institute of Technology is the only Institute which offers Special
Training Programme partnering Institute for Electronic Governance, Govt of
A.P. and Infosys. The students from the Institute are selected every year and
given special Training programme to make them Industry Grade and
opportunity is given to them to place themselves in Multi National
Companies.

1.15 IN HOUSE PROJECTS:

The students are taking part in International Project competitions hosted by
major MNCs, like IBM, Microsoft and Infosys. The Great Mind Challenge
hosted by IBM, Microsoft Imagine Cup and project work as part of
foundation programme conducted under the aegis of Infosys are some of the
important projects presently being undertaken by the students of MLRIT.
Further, the students are encouraged to do In House Projects under the
supervision of expect faculty members. In addition, students are encouraged
to give innovative ideas and do projects under the aegis of Microsoft
academic innovative alliance.
1.16 MOUs:
The Institute has MOUs for student and faculty enhancement programmes
with Multi National Companies like
 IBM
IBM has established “Center of Excellence” in MLRIT
 Sun Micro system Systems

Student Development Programmes and Certificates
 Oracle
Faculty and Student Development Programme
 Tata Technologies
Tata technologies has established "Product Lifecycle Management
Competency Center" in MLRIT and providing faculty and student
development activities with the help of industry oriented software
 WIPRO: Mission – 10X Programme

Faculty impact teaching programme
 CA Labs
Student and Faculty enablement Programme
 InfoTech
To enhance the quality of educational experience for student community
 Mahindra Satyam
Industry Oriented course ware and Technology
 Institute of Electronic Governance

Faculty Enablement Programme on “Soft Skills, Technical Skills,
Reasoning and Aptitude and Basic Computer Skills”.
 Indo – US Collaboration for Engineering Education

Faculty Development Programme sponsored by Infosys
 Microsoft IT Academy
 Student and Faculty enablement programme.
 Microsoft-Academic Innovative Alliance.
 Infosys
Foundation Programme for students
 IIIT, Gachibowli, Hyderabad

Certification in Information Technology (CIT) for students
 SAM Technologies
In house projects in Robotics and Embedded System
1.17 Student Achievements:
 Ms. R. PALANIAMMAL of Aeronautical Engineering department has

secured a University Rank and Gold Medal for the batch 2005-2009
 A PRAVEEN KUMAR secured 105th rank in GATE.
 Rishit D Shah became the Microsoft Student Partner and Microsoft

Student Campus Ambassador. He is a Microsoft Certified Professional.
 N. Sai Praneeth & Easwar Reddy also has been selected as a Microsoft
student ambassador.
 M.Prashanth Reddy and M. Ramya of CSE Department have been

selected as the Student Ambassador for IBM.
 The CSE department students Nikhil Bharadwaj, Shashank and

Sulibhavi Santhosh developed a Google Application connecting all the
institute activities. Lolitha and Gangasudha of IT, Praneeth, Rajender,
Akshay Raj, Harish and Pankaj of CSE, Achuth and Gautam of Aero are
maintaining the application.
 M. Pavan Kumar of CSE Department has been selected as brand

Ambassadir if Sun Academic Initiative.
 253 students and 5 faculty members have got IBM DB2 Certification as
part of TGMC’09
 The Institute has achieved 100% results in Aeronautical Engineering,

99% in CSE, 94% in ECE, 91% in MCA and 83% in MBA Department
for outgoing batches.
 The students of MLRIT have won Volleyball Tournament and were

Runner’s in Table Tennis Singles and Doubles JNTU Zone ‘A’ Inter
Collegiate Tournament.
 G. Manikanta Gupta, ECE 1st year won “National memory

championship” in abstract images, organized by World Memory
Council.
1.18 Contact Information

Prof. Dr. P. Bhaskara
Principal 9866678599
Reddy
Dean (CS) Prof. K. L. Chugh 9866666601
Department Head CSE Dr.N.Chandasekhar 9959535832
Department Head ECE Dr. A.V.Paramkusam 9160404638
Department Head IT Dr. KVSN Rama Rao 9848292046
Department Head AERO Dr.M.S.N.Guptha 9160404640
Department Head MECH Dr.S.Madhu 9160404635
Department Head MBA Ms. Suneetha 9160404639
Department Head H&S Dr.V.Radhika Devi 9848472797
Administration Mr.G.Prabhakar 9866675818

2. PLACEMENT & HIGHER STUDIES
MLR Institute of Technology has a unique distinction of placing their First Batch
of B.Tech Students in their pre final year of Study and MBA Students in Multi
National Companies. The Institute has so far interacted with more than 69
Companies and 233 Selections from B.Tech/MCA and MBA Programmes have
taken Place.
In this direction Apart from the Placements the Institute has arranged Summer
Internship Programmes with Companies like Computer Amociates, Mind Tree
M/s Info tech Enterprises Ltd, Mahindra Finance, Max New York Life Insurance,
Nokia Ltd , Mahindra Finance, Bajaj Capital Ltd, Reliance Money and Tata AIG
for Engineering and MBA Students to develop Mentor Relationships and to get to
know about the Work Culture and gain Competencies to make them Industry
Ready during their Study period.
The Institute has arranged Campus Recruitment drives with MNC’s like TATA
Advanced systems, IBM, Medha Servo drives, NR Radio & Switches Pvt. Ltd.,
Osi Technologies ltd., Genpact, Reliance Money, Nagarjuna Cements Ltd & Oasis
Software Informatics.
The Institute organized an Industrial Tour to 3rd & 4th Year Aeronautical
Engineering students to Satish Dawan Space Center (SHAR) Sriharikota on 16-
12-2009. The 4th Year students visited Air force Academy, Dundigal, for an
Industrial Visit on 22-12-2009.
The CSE & ECE students visited Infosys Infosys on 18-07-2009 for the SPARK
Programme which is an orientation programme on Information Technology Space.
2.1 INDUSTRY GRADE SKILLS REQUIRED FOR EMPLOYMENT

Behavioral and Communication Skills are recognized as important elements in
professional development of an Engineer including English for specific purposes.
Employers give considerable value to these diverse set of skills at the time of
interviews.
In addition to course curriculum, every student will gain the following skills
during the study period:
 Analytical and Problem solving skills
 Subject – specific knowledge
 Research and improved decision making abilities
 Oral communication skills

 Managerial skills
 Understanding of other cultures
 Confidence and competence to work in International environment
As students are the future leaders, the Responsibility, Accountability and

exhibiting the leadership skills should start from the first year of engineering.
Every student is advised to read / practice from the following books;
 Verbal and Nonverbal by RS Agarwal
 Baron GRE
 Wren and Martin English Grammar Book
2.2 IMPORTANT CRITERIA OF EMPLOYMENT
In addition to the industry grade skills required for employment, the most
important criteria for employment is that the student should get a minimum of
60% in academics with no backlogs to make them eligible for campus
recruitments. In the recent past, many companies stipulated a cut of 68% for
attending the interview / writing the test. Every student should Endeavour to
achieve a minimum of 68% with no backlogs to make them suitable for
picking up by good companies.
Job Portals:
1. www.freshersworld.com
2. www.monster.com
3. www.naukri.com
2.3 HIGHER STUDIES

M.Tech
The Graduate Aptitude Test in Engineering (GATE) is an all-India examination
administered and conducted in eight zones across the country by the GATE
Committee comprising faculty from Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore and
seven Indian Institutes of Technology on behalf of the National Coordinating
Board - GATE, Department of Education, Ministry of Human Resources
Development (MHRD), and Government of India.
Objective
To identify meritorious and motivated candidates for admission to Post Graduate
programmes in Engineering, Technology, Architecture and Pharmacy at the
National level. To serve as benchmark for normalization of the Undergraduate
Engineering Education in the country. This provides an opportunity for advanced
engineering education in India. An M.E or M.Tech degree is a desirable

qualification for our young engineers seeking a rewarding professional career.

Engineering students, while in the final year of their degree course, spend
considerable time in seeking an opening for studies in foreign universities. The
students are advised to pursue M.Tech in IIT’s/NIT’s/University Colleges.
MBA
Earning a Master’s of Business Administration (MBA) degree can provide you
with management skills and business expertise that open new career opportunities
to you. An MBA program will also launch you into the much higher pay range
that upper level managers and executives enjoy. Furthermore, in the high-level
positions, an MBA degree will allow you to hold and your work will often be
more interesting and rewarding. The students are advised to pursue M.BA in
IIM’s/XLRI/Reputed Business Schools.
HIGHER STUDIES ABROAD

TOEFL is mandatory for seeking admission in any academic course at any level-
undergraduate, graduate or post graduate, in USA and Canada. Similarly UK
Universities ask for IELTS for seeking admission to graduate and past graduate
courses.
GRE The Graduate Record Examination (GRE) is administered by the

Educational Testing Services (ETS) for admission into all graduate academic
programs (except management) in universities across USA and Canada and some
selected universities across the world including India. The exam is a Computer
Adaptive Test and is administered at any of the Sylvan testing centers in the
country after prior registration.
The GMAT is a Computer Adaptive Test administered online by Educational

Testing Services (ETS) through Sylvan testing centers located in all the major
cities in India. Those who wish to enroll for courses in Business Management in
American universities have to take the GMAT test and submit their scores to the
department.
2.4 VARIOUS SCHOLARSHIPS AVAILABLE IN INDIA
Bharat Petroleum Scholarship For Higher Studies | Balarama Digest Scholarship |

Central Institute of Indian Languages | Fair & Lovely Foundation - Project
Saraswati Scholarships | Government Of India Office of the Director General of
Civil Aviation Scholarship | Homi Bhabha Centre For Science Education Tata
Institute of Fundamental Research Research Scholarships | HSBC Scholarships |
Indian Council Of Agricultural Research Award Of National Talent Scholarship
In Agriculture | Indian Institute Of Geomagnetism Research Scholars | Invention
Awards For School Children | Indian Oil Corporation Ltd (IOCL) - Scholarships |
Jawaharlal Nehru Memorial Fund Jawaharlal Nehru Scholarships For Doctoral
Studies | Junior Research Scholarships For Cancer Biology Tata Memorial Centre
& Tata Memorial Hospital | Jaigopal Garodia Vivekananda Trust Scholarships |
Lalit Kala Akademi - Scholarship | Mahindra All India Talent Scholarships For

Diploma courses In Polytechnics | National Brain Research Centre Scholarships |

NTPC Scholarships | National Institute Of Science Communication And
Information Resources(NISCAIR) | National Olympiad Programme | National
Level Science Talent Search Examination - 2005 | Narotam Sekhsaria
Scholarship Programme | National Brain Research Centre Scholarships, Post
Doctoral Fellowships | National Aptitude Test | NIIT National IT Aptitude Test |
Oil And Natural Gas Corporation Ltd (ONGC) Scholarships To SC/ST Students |
Office Of The Director General of Civil Aviation Scholarships Stipend to the
SC/ST Candidates | Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan - Scholarships | Scholarships To
Young Artistes | Saf-Madanjeet Singh Scholarship | Sports Authority Of India -
Sports Scholarships | SAF-Madanjeet Singh Scholarship | Spic Macay
Scholarships | The Children's Foundation - Scholarships | The L&T Build-India
Scholarship | The Hindu-Hitachi Scholarships | The Paul Foundation
Scholarships | Technology Information Forecasting and Assessment
Council(TIFAC) Women Scientist Scholarship Scheme | The Young Talent IT
Scholarship The Dr.GB Scholarships Foundation |
2.5 VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL SCHOLARSHIPS AVAILABLE IN INDIA

A * STAR India Youth Scholarship | A.M.M. Arunachalam-Lakshmi Achi
Scholarship For Overseas Study | British Chevening Scholarships | Bharat
Petroleum - Scholarships for Higher Studies | Cambridge Nehru Scholarships |
Commonwealth Scholarship and Fellowship | Czech Government Scholarship |
Chevening Technology Enterprise Scholarship Programme | Chinese Government
Scholarship | Greek Government Scholarships | Israel Government Scholarship |
Iranian Government Scholarship | Offer of Italian Government Scholarship |
Japanese Government Scholarships | K.C.Mahindra Scholarships For Post-
Graduate Studies Abroad | Lady Meherbai D.Tata Scholarships | Mexican
Government Scholarship | Norwegian Government Scholarships | National
Overseas Scholarships/Passage Grant for ST Candidates | Portuguese Government
Scholarships | Sophia Merit Scholarships Inc | Slovak Government Scholarship |
SIA Youth Scholarships | The Rhodes Scholarships India | The Ramakrishna
Mission Institute Of Culture Award of Debesh-Kamal Scholarships For Studies
Abroad | The In laks Foundation - Scholarships |
Website for Higher Studies:

www.higherstudyabroad.org
www.highereducationinindia.com

3. STUDENT CAREER ORIENTED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION

COURSES
As per the career plan for students of MLR Institute of Technology with a view to
bridge the gap between Industry and Academia, it has been planned to equip every
student with at least three International / National certification by the time he / she
completes the course of study. The details of the certification courses are given below:
Branch Year Name of the Certification Course
2nd Year Certificate Information Technology

IBM Certified DB2 Database
3rd Year
Computer Science and Associate, Infosys Campus Connect
Engineering / IT / MCA IBM Certified Rational Application
4th Year
Developer
4th Year SUN Certified Java Programmer
Institute of Electronics and
2nd Year
Telecommunication Engineering
Electronics and Communication
3rd Year Motorola @ CAMPUS
Engineering
IBM Certified DB2 Database
4th Year
Associate
2nd Year Certificate in AutoCAD
Aeronautical Engineering 3rd Year Certificate in High Per Mesh
4th Year Certificate in CATIA
2nd Year Certificate in AutoCAD
Mechanical Engineering 3rd Year Certificate in High Per Mesh
4th Year Certificate in CATIA
3.1 Help Desk

The college has set up a Help Desk for Career Guidance and overseas education.
The aim of the Help Desk is to provide a flat form for the students to choose the Right
Destination. The students can reach the Help Desk in person or through mail at email
id helpdesk@mlrinstitutions.ac.in

4. PERFORMANCE MONITORING AND GUIDANCE
4.1 STUDENT FEEDBACK

In case the students find it difficult to cope up / understand a particular subject,
they are
advised to discuss it with
a. The Concerned Teacher
b. The Class Teacher
c. The Department Head
d. The Principal
Students can use the suggestion boxes for communicating feedback. Students
should mention their names so that they can be informed of the progress / more
details / clarifications can be obtained.
4.2 CLASS TEACHER

Every class is assigned a Class Teacher (a faculty member). Students can
directly discuss their college related or personal problems related to studies with
them. The Class Teachers are accessible to the students and they can talk to the
Class Teacher or whenever they are free from class / lab work. Class Teacher
will meet with the class representative on daily basis to discuss their day-to-day
difficulties if any.
4.3 CLASS REPRESENTATIVES AND THEIR ROLES

Two students from each class are selected as the Class Representatives from the
department basing on their academic performance and discipline. Department
Head makes the selections.
Responsibilities of the Class Representatives:
 Collection of MIS format from Class Teacher daily.

 Communicating the departmental / college directives & information to
the students.
 Collecting the feedback of difficulties faced by the students and
communicating Suggestions for improvements.

 Coordinating academic events and co-curricular activities.

 Encourage students to interact for better studies, sharing books and
notes.
 Compilation and submission of MIS form to class teacher at the end of
the period.
4.4 PERFORMANCE COUNSELING
Mentors will evaluate the student individually for the following:
a. Less marks in internal exams
b. Continuous absence (3 days) and shortage of attendance
c. Not understanding the subject
d. Students from Telugu medium
e. Assistance for back log subjects etc.
f. Communication with parents
g. Provide help to back log students
4.5 REMEDIAL CLASSES / TUTORIAL / REVISIONS

Remedial Classes are conducted for students who are weak and who do not
perform well in their internal examinations / class tests or for the students who
want extra help. Slots in the time table have been reserved for Tutorial where in
the students are helped to solve the question in the class itself.
4.6 BACKLOG MANAGEMENT
The Mentors maintain a complete record of Examination results of each student
and they counsel and guide them in preparing for backlogs. Students are provided
with material and important questions are discussed.
4.7 CORRESPONDENCE WITH PARENTS
Parents will be informed about the performance of their ward from time to time
in the semester. However parents are requested to be in touch with the Student
mentor / Department Head on a regular basis.

5.RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR STUDENTS
5.1 ADMINISTRATIVE
1. Students, admitted into this College, are deemed to have agreed to the rules
and regulations of the college, as laid down by the College Authorities from
time to time, and the rules lay down in this leaflet, issued at the time of
admission.
2. Students should inform any changes in the addresses/Phone No. of their
parents / guardians to the college office.
3. The college shall communicate to the parents \ guardians of the students
from time to time regarding the regularity and performance in the
examinations of their wards. The case of serious indiscipline on the part of
the students (s) may also be communicated to parent (s) \ guardian (s).
5.2. ACADEMIC
1. Students should attend the classes in - time. Late- comers shall not be
permitted to enter the class room and they are likely to loose the
attendance.
2. Students are expected to be regular to the classes. The students Shall not
absent themselves for classes without prior approval. Prior permission
shall be taken from concerned counselor and submitted to the Head of the
Department.
3. In case of ill-health, the student should submit the medical certificate
along with prescription, etc., from a registered medical doctor. The student
should get the medical certificate within two days from the date of reporting
to the college after iII health and also produce a letter from Father/
Mother regarding ill-health. Permission on medical grounds shall not be
granted for one or two days.
4. The students should come to the laboratories with the prescribed uniform.
5. If a student disturbs the class or makes mischief, he / she will be marked
absent and may be expelled from the class.
6. Students shall spend their leisure time in the library/computer center.
7. Students are expected to put up the minimum aggregate percentage of
attendance (75%) as laid down by the JNT University. Students, falling
short of 75% of attendance shall not be promoted to the next Semester \
Class.
8. Parents \ guardians of the students can contact the college authorities either
in person or by post regarding discipline, regularity in attending classes,
performance in the examinations, etc., of their wards.
5.3 DRESS CODE

1. Students are expected to attend the college properly dressed. They should
wear the prescribed uniform while attending laboratory classes.

2. Students are expected to carry the identity cards, issued by the college, in
the campus. They are required to show the identity cards at the library,
computer center, office, etc. Students without Identity Cards are not allowed
in to the laboratory classes.
5.4 DISCIPLINE & PUNCTUALITY

3. No student shall enter or leave the class room without the permission of the
teacher.
4. Calling students out of their class rooms while the lecture is in progress is
prohibited.
5. Students are required to help in keeping the rooms, buildings, and premises
clean and tidy. Writing or sticking up of posters and notices on the walls is
strictly prohibited.
6. Smoking, Consumption of alcohol, intoxicating drinks or drugs is strictly
prohibited in and around the college premises. Those indulging in such
activities will be put severely or expelled.
7. Students are expected to behave well with the staff, other students and the
general public. Any misbehavior, coming to the notice of the college
authorities, will be severely dealt with.
8. The conduct of the students should be exemplary not only within the
premises of the college but also outside. This will help in maintaining the
image and status of the college.
9. Students are required to observe silence at all times in the college campus.
They shall not talk in loud tone or call each other by shouting.
10. Students are prohibited from loitering in the verandahs / campus during
class hours, and sitting on the steps, stair-cases or parapet walls.
11. Students are not permitted to resort to strikes and demonstrations within the
campus. Participation in such activity entails their dismissal from the
college. Any problem they face may be represented to the Counselor / Head
of the Department / Principal.
12. Students are prohibited carrying Cell Phones and organizing any meeting or
entertainment in the college campus without the permission of the college
authorities.
13. The entry of outsiders without permission is prohibited. Any student found
responsible for bringing outsiders into the campus for settling personal
disputes with other students, shall be expelled from the college.
14. The college is entitled to take any disciplinary action, which is deemed
necessary in the case of any indiscipline on the part of the students. The
same will be reflected on the Conduct Certificate issued at the time of
leaving the college.
15. No Student Unions, except Professional Associations, are permitted in the

college.
16. If the students cause any damage to the college property knowingly or
unknowingly individually or in a group they have to pay 5 times to cost of
property damaged them. All the students are collectively responsible for the
proper maintenance college property i.e. building, furniture, lab equipment,
garden, playgrounds, etc., recovery, calculated on semester to semester
basis, will be collected along with examination fee for the semester.
17. Students should keep their vehicles only at the parking place allotted for the
purpose. Vehicle riding in the campus is strictly prohibited.
18. Sitting on the parapet wall and Riding beyond the parking limits, the fine
will be imposed to Rs.100.00
19. Breakage or loss of equipment /property as decided by the appropriate
authority The Principal/Director may, on the recommendation of the Head
of the Department, or otherwise, inflict the following punishments in the
interests of the student discipline and the Institution: fined, curtailment
attendance, denial of promotion to next semester, suspension, expulsion or
such other action as deemed necessary for the maintenance of discipline in
the campus.
5.5. LAB CLASSES

All students must attend lab classes without fail. Those absent shall follow this
procedure laid down in the prescribed format explaining valid reasons and
obtain permission to attend the future classes.
5.6 FEE
1. All students admitted into this college, will be required to pay the prescribed
tuition fee and other specified fees. Failure of the same will result in the
cancellation of admission. No portion of fees will be refunded under any
circumstances. If any student wishes to change the college or discontinue the
course at any point for any reason, he \ she shall not be permitted to do so
unless he \ she pays balance amount of four years fees which he \ she would
have to pay, if he \she continued till the completion of the course. His \ Her
original certificates including I.e., etc., will be issued only after all the dues as
stated above, are cleared by the students. All senior students must pay the
college fee every year on or before the 15th of July irrespective of the
reopening of the college. If they fail the fine will be imposed as per norms of
the management.
2. Miscellaneous fee paid for expenditure related to training programs i.e.,
technical or soft skills etc., is not refundable.
3. Other than the above, if any fees are levied by the University the student has to
be pay the same.

5.7. TRANSPORT
All students who are availing the college bus facility must carry the bus-pass
and must produce when demanded, failing which they will not allowed to travel
in the bus. All students must travel in the allotted bus and routes. They should
not change but occupy only their allotted seats throughout. Unauthorized
students caught in the bus for not having the bus pass, should pay even if they
traveled for one day also. First and second year are not allowed to bring two-
wheelers.
5.8. LIBRARY RULES

1. Library Books will be issued for 15 days time and renewal depends upon the
demand of the book.
2. Silence should be strictly maintained in the library.
3. Students are responsible for the library borrower card issued to them. Loss of
the library card should be reported in writing to the circulation section
immediately. Duplicate library borrower card will be issued on payment of
Rs.150/- after a week time from the date of application for duplicate cards.
4. The Library borrower card is not transferable.
5. Library books must be returned on or before the due date. Any student
failed to do so, 1st week –Rs.1/-per day/per book, 2nd week – Rs.2/-per
day/per book and 3rd week –Rs.3/-per day/per book penalty will be
imposed From 4th week-Rs.5/-per day/per book penalty will be imposed.
6. Students shall not make any sort of conversation in any part of the library,
causing inconvenience to others.
7. Students shall not bring their belongings inside the library and should keep
them outside the library.
8. Students leaving from the library should be checked at the exit.
9. Tearing of pages/stealing of books will invite suspension from using of the
library facilities and further disciplinary action will be taken against such
students, as per college norms.
10. The borrower shall replace the New book within 7 days, otherwise, he/she
has to pay 3 times of the book cost, along with fine. In case of lose of book.
5.9. GENERAL
1. All the students admitted in this college have to give an undertaking to abide
by the rules and regulations of this college in prescribed format given by the
college.
2. All the students should attend the college after vacations (Dasara / Sankranthi
/ Christmas / Semester term / summer) on the re-opening day without fail.
3. Students must deposit all the relevant original certificates and documents
at the time of the admission Office and they will not be returned until
completion of the course.

4. Admission of any student can be cancelled by the Management at any point

during the course for reasons which are not in consonance with the rules and
regulations and which are detrain the reputation of the college.
5. All the Students are here by informed that college authorities will not take
any responsibility for loss or theft of your valuable items and money kept
in your bags or somewhere else. Hence I request all the students are not to
keep your valuables in class room or anywhere without your presence.
6. Fee For Issue Of Duplicates
a) Duplicate Hall ticket Rs. 100.00
b) Duplicate Identity Card Rs. 100.00
c) Duplicate College Bus Pass Rs. 50.00
d) Duplicate Study Certificate for same purpose Rs. 50.00
e) Xerox copies of OD’s Rs. 50.00
All Breakage etc., penalties will be displayed on the Notice Board, and must
be paid by the student and no student will be allowed to write examination or
internal test or laboratory test, if penalties are not paid by the due date
specified in the notice or circular.
5.10. RAGGING
Ragging in any form inside or outside the college campus is banned/Prohibited
vide Ragging Act 26 of AP. legislative Assembly 1997. Those who indulge in
this uncivilized activity are liable for severe disciplinary actions besides being
liable for prosecution.
SALIENT FEATURES
Ragging means doing an act which causes or is likely to cause insult 'or annoyance or
fear or apprehension or threat or intimidation or outrage of modesty or injury to a
student.
S.No. Nature of Ragging Punishment

Teasing, Embarrassing and Imprisonment up to 6 Month
1
Humiliating or Fine Up to Rs 1000/- or Both.
Assaulting or using criminal Force or Imprisonment up to 1 Year or
2
criminal intimidation Fine up to Rs 2000/- or Both.
Wrongfully restraining or Confining Imprisonment up to 2 Years or
3
or causing hurt Fine up to Rs 5000/- or Both.
Causing grievous hurt kidnapping Or Imprisonment up to 5 Years or
4
raping or committing unnatural offence Fine up to Rs 10000/- or Both
Imprisonment up to 10 Years or
5 Causing death or abating Suicide
fine up to Rs. 50000/- or Both
Note:
1. A student convicted of any of the above offences, will be, dismissed from the
college.

2. A student imprisoned for more than six months for any of the above offences
'will not be admitted in any other College.
3. A student against whom there is prima facie evidence of ragging in any form
will be suspended from the college immediately.
Prohibition of Ragging
1.Ragging is prohibited as per act 26 of AP. Legislative assembly, 1997.
2.Ragging entails heavy fines and/or imprisonment.
3.Ragging invokes suspension and dismissal from the college.
4.Outsiders are prohibited from entering the college premises without permission.
5.All students must carry their identity cards and show them when Demanded.
6.The principal and staff will visit and inspect the rooms at any time.
7.Suspended students are debarred from entering the campus except when required to
attend enquiry and to submit an explanation .
6. ACADEMIC REGULATIONS R13 FOR B.TECH.

(REGULAR)
(Effective for the students admitted into I year from the Academic Year 2013-
14 onwards)
6.1. AWARD OF B.TECH. DEGREE

A Student will be declared eligible for the award of the B.Tech. Degree if he
fulfills the following academic regulations:
i) Pursued a course of study for not less than four academic years and not
more than eight academic years.
ii) Register for 200 credits and secure 200 credits.
iii)The candidate shall register for 224 credits and secure 216 credits with
compulsory
subjects as listed in Table-1.
Table 1: Compulsory Subjects
Serial Number Subject Particulars

1 All practical subjects
2 Industry oriented mini project
3 Comprehensive Viva-Voce
4 Seminar
5 Project work
6.2. Students, who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the
degree within eight academic years from the year of their admission, shall forfeit
their seat in B.Tech Course.

6.3. COURSES OF STUDY

The following courses of study are offered at present as speciliaztions for the
B.Tech courses.
B ranch Code Branch

01 Civil Engineering
02 Electrical and Electronics Engineering
03 Mechanical Engineering
04 Electronics and Communication Engineering
05 Computer Science Engineering
08 Chemical Engineering
10 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
12 Information Technology
14 Mechanical Engineering (Mechatronics)
17 Electronics and Telematics Engineering
18 Metallurgy and Material Engineering
19 Electronics and Computer Engineering
20 Mechanical Engineering (Productions)
21 Aeronautical Engineering
22 Instrumentation and Control Engineering
23 Biotechnology
24 Automobile Engineering
25 Mining Engineering
26 Mining Machinery
27 Petroleum Engineering
28 Civil and Environmental Engineering
29 Mechanical Engineering (Nano Technology)
30 Agricultural Engineering
31 Computer Science & Technology
6.4. CREDITS
I Year Semester
Periods / Week Credits Periods / Week Credits
Theory 03+1/03 06 04 04
02 04 --- ---
Practical 03 04 03 02
03 02
Drawing 02+03 06
06 04
Mini Project --- ---- --- 02
Comprehensive Viva
--- -- --- 02
Voce
Seminar --- --- 6 02
Project --- --- 15 10

6.5 DISTRIBUTION AND WEIGHT AGE OF MARKS
i. The performance of a student in each semester / I year shall be evaluated

subject – wise with a maximum of 100 marks for theory and 75 marks
for practical subject. In addition, Industry oriented mini-project, seminar
and project work shall be evaluated for 50,50 and 200 marks
respectively.
ii. For theory subjects the distribution shall be 25 marks for Internal
Evaluation and 75 marks for the End-Examination.
iii. For theory subjects, during the semester there shall be 2 midterm
examinations. Each midterm examination consists of one objective
paper, one essay paper and one assignment. The objective paper and the
minutes (20 minutes for objective and 60 minutes for essay paper). The
Objective paper is set with 20 bits of multiple choice, fill in the blanks
and matching type of questions for a total of 10 marks. The essay paper
shall contain 4 full questions (one from each unit) out of which, the
student has to answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks. While the first
mid-term examination shall be conducted on 1 to 2.5 units of the
syllabus, the second mid-term examination shall be conducted on 2.5 to
5 units. Five (5) marks are allocated for Assignments (as specified by
the subject teacher concerned). The first Assignment should be
submitted before the conduct of the first mid-examination, and the
second Assignment should be submitted before the conduct of the
second mid-examination. The total marks secured by the student in each
mid-term examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average of
the two mid-term examinations shall be taken as the final marks secured
by each candidate. However, in the I year, there shall be 3 midterm
examination, each for 25 marks, along with 3 assignments in a similar
pattern as above (1st mid shall be from Unit- I, 2nd mid shall be 2 & 3
Units and 3rd mid shall be 4 & 5 Units) and the average marks of the
examinations secured (each evaluated for a total of 25 marks) in each
subject shall be considered to be final marks for the internals/sessionals.
If any candidate is absent from any subject of a mid-term examination,
an on-line test will be conducted for him by the University.
The details of the Question Paper pattern without deviating from the
R13 regulations as notified in the website is as follows:
o The End semesters Examination will be conducted for 75 marks
which consists of two parts viz i) Part – A for 25 marks, ii)
Part-B for 50 marks.
o Part-A is compulsory question which consists of ten sub-
questions. The first five sub questions are from each unit and
carries 2 marks each. The next five sub-questions are one from
each unit and carriers 3 marks each.
o Part-B consists of five questions (numbered from 2 to 6)
carrying 10 marks each. Each of these questions is from one

unit and may contain sub-questions. For each question there

will be an “either’ “or” choice (that means there will be two
questions from each unit and the student should answer any
one question)
iv. For practical subjects there shall be a continuous evaluation during the
semester for 25 session marks and 50 end examination marks. Out of the
25 marks for internal, day-to-day work in the laboratory shall be
evaluated for 15 marks and internal examination for practical shall be
evaluated for 10 marks conducted by the concerned laboratory teacher.
The end examination shall be conducted with external examiner and
laboratory teacher. The external examiner shall be appointed from the
cluster of colleges as decided by the University examination branch.
v. For the subject having design and / or drawing, (such as Engineering
Graphics, Engineering Drawing, Machine Drawing) and estimation, the
distribution shall be 25 marks for internal evaluation (15 marks for day-
to-day work and 10 marks for internal tests) and 75 marks for end
examination. There shall be two internal tests in a Semester and the
better of the two shall be considered for the award of marks for internal
tests. However in the I year class, there shall be three tests and the
average of best two will be taken into consideration.
vi. There shall be an industry-oriented mini-project, in collaboration with
an industry of their specialization, to be taken up during the vacation
after III year II semester examination. However, the mini project and its
report shall be evaluated with the project shall be submitted in report
form and should be presented before the committee, which shall be
evaluated for 50 marks. The committee consists of an external examiner,
head of the department, the supervisor of mini project and a senior
faculty member of the department. There shall be no internal marks for
industry oriented mini project.
vii. There shall be a seminar presentation in IV year II semester. For the
seminar, the student shall collect the information on a specialized topic
and prepare a technical report, showing his understanding over the topic,
and submit to the department, which shall be evaluated by the
Departmental committee consisting of Head of the department, seminar
supervisor and a senior faculty member. The seminar report shall be
evaluated for 50 marks. There shall be no external examination for
seminar.
viii. There shall be a comprehensive Viva-Voce in IV year II semester. The
Comprehensive Viva-Voce will be conducted by a Committee
consisting of (i) Head of the Department (ii) two Senior Faculty
members of the Department. The comprehensive Viva-Voce is aimed to
assess the students’ understanding in various subjects he/she studied
during the B.Tech course of study. The comprehensive Viva-Voce is
evaluated for 100 marks by the Committee. There are no internal marks
for the comprehensive viva-voce.

ix. Out of a total of 200 marks for the project work, 50 marks shall be for
Internal Evaluation and 150 marks for the End Semester Examination.
The End semester Examination (viva-voce) shall be conducted by the
same committee appointed for industry oriented mini project. In addition
the project supervisor shall also be included in the committee. The
topics for industry oriented mini project, seminar and project work shall
be conducted at the end of the IV year. The Internal Evaluation shall be
on the basis of two seminars given by each student on the topic of his
project.
x. Laboratory marks and the session marks awarded by the college are not
final. They are subject to scrutiny and scaling by the University
wherever necessary. In such cases, the session and laboratory marks
awarded by the College will be referred to a Committee. The Committee
will arrive at a scaling factor and the marks will be scaled as per the
scaling factor. The recommendations of the Committee are final and
binding. The laboratory records and internal test papers shall be
preserved in the respective institutions as per the University norms and
shall be produced to the Committees of the University as and when the
same is asked for.
6.5 ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS:
i. A student shall be eligible to appear for University examinations if he

acquires a minimum of 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the subjects.
ii. Shortage of Attendance below 65% in aggregate shall in NO case be
condoned.
iii. Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and
above and below 75%) in each semester or I year may be granted by the
College Academic Committee.
iv. A student will not be promoted to the next semester unless he satisfies the
attendance requirement of the present semester / I year, as applicable. They
may seek re-admission for that semester / I year when offered next.
v. Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / I
year are not eligible to take their end examination of that class and their
registration shall stand cancelled.
vi. A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation of shortage of
attendance.
6.6 MINIMUM ACADEMIC REQUIREMENTS:

The following academic requirements have to be satisfied in addition to the
attendance requirements mentioned in item no.6
i. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the minimum academic
requirements and earned the credits allotted to each theory or practical
design or drawing subject or project if he secures not less than 35% of
marks in the end examination and a minimum of 40% of marks in the sum
total of the internal evaluation and end examination taken together.
ii. A student shall be promoted from II to III year only if he fulfills the
academic requirement of 37 credits from one regular and one

supplementary examinations of I year, and one regular examination of II

year I semester irrespective of whether the candidate takes the examination
or not.
iii. A student shall be promoted from third year to fourth year only if he fulfills
the academic requirements of total 62 credits from the following
examinations, whether the candidate takes the examinations or not.
a) Two regular and two supplementary examinations of I year.
b) Two regular and one supplementary examinations of I semester.
c) One regular and one supplementary examinations of II year II semester.
d) One regular examination of III year I Semester.
iv. A student shall register and put up minimum attendance in all 200 credits
and earn the 200 credits. Marks obtained in all 200 credits shall be
considered for the calculation of percentage of marks.
v. Students who fail to earn 200 credits as indicated in the course structure
within eight academic years from the year of their admission shall forfeit
their seat in B.Tech course and their admission shall stand cancelled.

7.0 COURSE CALENDAR FOR THE YEAR
Description Period Duration

I Sem
Semester registrations 17.07.2017
1st Spell of Instructions 17.07.2017 to 09.09.2017 8 weeks
I mid term examinations 11.09.2017 to 16.09.2017 1 week
2nd Spell of Instructions 18.09.2017 to 23.09.2017 1 week
Dussehra Holidays 25.09.2017 to 30.09.2017 1 week
Continuation of 2nd Spell of
02.10.2017 to 11.11.2017 6 weeks
Instructions
II mid term exams 13.11.2017 to 18.11.2017 1 week
Preparations & Practical
20.11.2017 to 25.11.2017 1 week
Examinations
II, III B.Tech I Sem Regular
Examinations
I B.Tech I Sem Supply(MLR 15 & 27.11.2017 to 09.12.2017 2 weeks
16)
I B.Tech II Sem Supply(MLR 15)
Winter vacation 10.12.2017 to 16.12.2017 1 week
II Sem class work commencement 18.12.2017
II Sem
Semester registrations 18.12.2017
1st Spell of Instructions 18.12.2017 to 30.12.2017 2 weeks
I Sem Advanced supply exams 01.01.2018 to 06.01.2018 1 week
Continuation of 1st Spell of
08.01.2018 to 17.02.2018 6 weeks
Instructions
I mid term examinations 19.02.2018 to 24.02.2018 1 week
2nd Spell of Instructions 26.02.2018 to 14.04.2018 7 weeks
II mid term exams 16.04.2018 to 21.04.2018 1 week
Preparations & Practical
23.04.2018 to 28.04.2018 1 week
Examinations
II, III B.Tech II Sem Regular
30.04.2018 to 12.05.2018 2 weeks
Examinations
Summer vacation & Supply.
13.05.2018 to 07.07.2018 8 weeks
Examinations
Next Sem class work
09.07.2018
commencement for A.Y.: 18-19

8. III YEAR MECH COURSE STRUCTURE
III B.Tech.- I SEMESTER

Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Course Week Maximum Marks
Course Title Credits
Code Area Internal External
L T P Total
(CIE) (SEE)
A10321 Dynamics of Machinery PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A10322 Machine Tools PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
A10323 Thermal Engineering - II PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Design of Machine
A10324 PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Members - II
OPEN ELECTIVE – I OE 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Thermal Engineering
A10328 PC - 1 3 3 25 50 75
Lab
A10329 Machine Tools Lab PC - - 3 2 25 50 75
A10330 Dynamics Lab PC - - 3 2 25 50 75
Total 15 6 9 22 200 525 725
Mandatory Course (Non-Credit)
Technical Seminar-III
A10371 (Micro Project /EPICS MC - - 2 - 25 50 75
/Certification)
Note: All End Examinations (Theory and Practical) are of three hours duration.
L-Theory T – Tutorial P- Practical

9.0 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY (A10321)

9.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION:
Course Code A10321

Course Title DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY
Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits
Course Structure
3 1 - 3
Course Coordinator Mr. G. Ananda Rao, Associate Professor
Mr. M.V.Babu, Assistant Professor
Team of Instructors
Mrs. S.Navya Sree, Assistant Professor
COURSE OVERVIEW:
This course expands on the mechanical engineering student’s background in dynamic synthesis and
analysis by providing significant skills and experience in creating and modeling mechanisms. This
course is intended to deal with the forces and their effects, while acting upon the machine parts in
motion. The knowledge of this subject is very essential for an engineer in designing the various
parts of a machine. Study of applications of gyroscopes is very helpful to learn the precession and
its effect on automobiles. The study of dynamics of machinery is an applied field of mechanical
engineering that is concerned with understanding the relationship between the geometry and the
motions of the parts of a machine and the forces that produce this motion. This course helps to
learn how to analyze the motions of mechanisms, design mechanisms to have given motions, and
analyze forces in machines. Application of vibrations to the analysis and design of machines and
mechanical components.
9.2 PREREQUISITES:
Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

Engineering Mechanics, Kinematics
UG 3 4
of Machinery
9.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTIONS:
University End Total

Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks
Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests):
There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm
examination consists of one objective paper, one subjective
paper and four assignments. The objective
paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10 marks,
with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for objective
and 60 minutes for subjective paper). 75 100
Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice
questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper
contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of
which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each question
carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination shall be
conducted for 2.5 units of syllabus and second

midterm examination shall be conducted for another 2.5 units.

5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First two assignments
should be submitted before the
conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments
should be submitted before the conduct of the second mid. The
total marks secured by the student in each midterm
examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average of the
two midterm examinations shall be taken as the final marks
secured by each candidate.
Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing
S.No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment Method (s)

Able to analyze the performance factors in the Assignments
a study of elementary treatment of metal Midterm and University exams
cutting.
Analyze various types of operations Assignments
b performed on conventional machining Midterm and University exams
operations
c performed on lathe, shaing, slotting, planer, Midterm and University exams
drilling, milling machining..
d performed on grinding, lapping, super Midterm and University exams
fininshing etc.
Understand and analyze applications and Assignments
e
operations of broachining ccc Midterm and University exams
9.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:
S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20
2 I Assignment 5
3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20
4 II Assignment 5
MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2
MID’s
5 External Examination 3 hours 75
Total 75

9.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES Vs COURSE OUTCOMES WITH BLOOMS TAXONOMY

Blooms
S. No Course Objectives Course Outcomes
Level
The student will be able to

To impart the basic concepts of
understand the different forces
1 dynamics and to determine the forces BL 1
acting on machines.
acting on machines considering
friction.
The student will be able to
To impart the basic concepts of understand the effect of the
2 gyroscopes to understand the stability gyroscopic and centrifugal BL 2
of two wheelers and four wheelers. couples for the design of the
bearings.
To facilitate the students to formulate The student will be able to
the concept of synthesis and analysis of calculate forces and analyze for
3 BL 3
different machines. the design of machine
components.
The student will be able to design
To facilitate the students to design the and analyze the machines
4 machines based on force analysis, proper considering friction, vibrations BL 4
balancing & controlling vibrations. and balancing properly.
To facilitate the students to the The student will be able to decide

analyze various machine and plan to create a machine that
components such as flywheels, competes with the other BL 6
5 dynamometers, brakes, clutches
manufacturers.
and governors.
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)
BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply
BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create

9.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:
Blooms Level
Proficiency
Program Outcomes Level
assessed by
Applying and
An ability to apply knowledge of computing, Solving GATE Evaluating
A mathematical foundations and engineering theory in the H and text book
modeling design. problems
Applying and
Solving GATE
An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well Analyzing
B H and text book
as to analyze the concept.
problems
An ability to design , implement, process the
component to meet desired needs, within realistic Assigning
C constraints such as economic, environmental, social, S Exercises Applying
political, health and safety, manufacturability, and
sustainability (Creative Skills)
An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary Micro and Mini Applying and
D H
teams (team work) Projects Analyzing
An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate and Applying and
use the appropriate computing and engineering Micro and Mini Analyzing
E H
requirements for obtaining its solution (engineering Projects
problem solving skills)
An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, Assigning Understanding
F security and social issues and responsibilities N Exercises
(professional integrity)
An ability to communicate effectively both in writing ---
G N ---
and orally (speaking / writing skills)
The broad education necessary to analyze the local and Assigning
global impact of computing and engineering solutions Exercises Applying
H S
on individuals, organizations, and society (engineering and solving and
impact assessment skills) GATE problems Evaluating
Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in
Discussions Remembering
I continuing professional development and life-long H
and
learning (continuing education awareness)
Applying
A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social ---
J N ---
awareness)
An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools Assigning Applying and
K necessary for computing and engineering practice S Exercises Analyzing
(practical engineering analysis skills)
Understanding
An ability to apply design and development principles
Discussions and Applying
L in the construction of mechanical engineering systems H
solving problems And Creating
of varying complexity
An ability to recognize the importance of professional
development by pursuing postgraduate studies or face
Discussions and
M competitive examinations that offer challenging and H
solving problems
rewarding careers in computing (successful career and Applying
immediate employment).
N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

9.7 SYLLABUS
UNIT - I
PRECESSION: Gyroscopes, effect of precession motion on the stability of moving vehicles
such as motor car, motor cycle, aero planes and ships. FRICTION: Inclined plane, friction of
screw and nuts, pivot and collar, uniform pressure, uniform wear, friction circle and friction axis:
lubricated surfaces, boundary friction and film lubrication.
UNIT - II
CLUTCHES: Friction clutches, Single Disc or plate clutch, Multiple Disc Clutch, Cone Clutch,
Centrifugal Clutch. BRAKES AND DYNAMOMETERS: Simple block brakes, internal
expanding brake, band brake of vehicle. Dynamometers, absorption and transmission types.
General description and methods of operations.
UNIT - III
TURNING MOMENT DIAGRAM AND FLY WHEELS: Turning moment, Inertia Torque
connecting rod angular velocity and acceleration, crank effort and torque diagrams, Fluctuation
of energy, Fly wheels and their design. GOVERNERS: Watt, Porter and Proell governors. Spring
loaded governors – Hartnell and hartung with auxiliary springs. Sensitiveness, isochronisms and
hunting.
UNIT - IV
BALANCING: Balancing of rotating masses Single and multiple, single and different planes.
BALANCING OF RECIPROCATING MASSES: Primary, Secondary, and higher balancing of
reciprocating masses.Analytical and graphical methods. Locomotive balancing - Hammer blow,
Swaying couple, variation of tractive efforts.
UNIT – V
VIBRATION: Free Vibration of mass attached to vertical spring, oscillation of pendulums,
centers of oscillation and suspension, Transverse loads, vibrations of beams with concentrated
and distributed loads, Dunkerly’s methods, Raleigh’s method, whirling of shafts, critical speeds,
torsional vibrations.
TEXT BOOKS
1. S. S. Ratan (2012), Theory of Machines, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw- Hill education (P) Ltd,
New Delhi, India.
2. Thomas Bevan (2012), Theory of machines, 3rd edition, CBS Publishers, New Delhi, India.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. J. S. Rao, R. V. Dukkipati (2010), Mechanism and Machine Theory, New Age Publishers,
New Delhi, India.
2. Shiegly (2011), Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.
3. Khurmi, R.S. (2011), Theory of machines, S.Chand publishers, New Delhi, India

9.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning Outcomes.
Unit Lecture Topics to be covered Session Objectives

No. No. (By the end of session student will be able
to)
PRECESSION : Introduction 1. Understand the concept of Gyroscopes
1 L1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/1 2. Discuss the precession motion
1. Understand the concept of Gyroscopic
Gyroscopic couple derivation, Types of Gyroscopes couple
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/2
2 L2 2. discuss the types of Gyroscopes
1.Calculate the effect of gyro couple on
Gyroscopic effect on spinning bodies problems spinning bodies
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/2 2.Analyze the effect of gyro couple on
3 L3 spinning bodies
1. Understand the effect of gyro couple on
Gyroscopic effect on Aeroplanes Aeroplanes and find the reaction forces
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/1 2. Analyze the effect of gyro couple on the
4 L4 Aeroplanes taking a turn
Basic Problems on Gyroscopic Couple Aeroplanes and find the reaction forces
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/3 2. Analyze the effect of gyro couple on the
5 L5 Aeroplanes taking a turn
1. Understand the Gyroscopic effect on
Gyroscopic effect on stabilization of ships stabilization of ships
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/3 2. Analyze the effect of gyro couple during
6 L6 Steering, Pitching and Rolling of ships
1. Understand the Gyroscopic effect on
Gyroscopic couple effect on Automobiles, Automobiles
stabilization of automobiles ( four wheeler ) 2. Calculate the effect of gyro couple on
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/4 Automobiles (four wheeler) and find the
7 L7 reaction forces
Automobiles (two wheeler) and find the
Gyroscopic effect on stabilization of two wheeler. reaction forces
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/5 2. Analyze the effect of gyro couple and
centrifugal couple on the stabilization of 2
8 L8 wheeler taking a turn
1.Determine the effect of gyro couple on
ships
Problems on Gyroscopic effect on ships
2. Apply the concept of gyroscopic couple
in the stabilization of ships during steering,
9 L9 pitching and rolling.
1. Calculate the precessional angular
velocity of the automobiles taking a turn.
Problems on Gyroscopic effect on automobiles
2. Apply the concept of gyroscopic couple
in the stabilization of automobiles when
10 L10 steering towards right and left.
1. Identify the difference between static
STATIC & DYNAMIC FORCE ANALYSIS OF and dynamic forces on various mechanisms
MECHANISMS: Introduction. Conditions for and draw free body diagrams.
Equilibrium, Free Body Diagram 2. Apply equilibrium conditions in
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/7 calculating torque on the input links of
11 I L11 various mechanisms.
1. Understand various forces acting on two,
Two, Three Force members’ analysis, problems. three force members.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/7 2. Apply equilibrium conditions in solving
12 L12 two, three force members.
Four Force members analysis, problems. 1.Draw free body diagrams of four force
13 L13 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/7 members

2. Apply equilibrium conditions in

calculating torque on the input links of four
force members.
1. Understand the various static forces
Static Analysis of Slider Crank Mechanism acting on slider crank mechanism.
(Analytical & Graphical method) problems 2. Choose between analytical and graphical
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/7 methods to find the static forces acting on
14 L14 the slider crank mechanism.
1. Understand the various static forces
Static Analysis of Four Bar Mechanism (Analytical acting on four bar mechanism.
& Graphical methods ) problems 2. Choose between analytical and
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/8 graphical methods to find the static forces
15 L15 acting on four bar mechanism.
1. Understand the various dynamic forces
acting on slider crank mechanism.
Dynamic analysis of Slider Crank Mechanism 2. Choose between analytical and
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/9 graphical methods to find the dynamic
forces acting on the slider crank
16 L16 mechanism.
1. Understand the various dynamic forces
acting on four bar mechanism.
Dynamic Analysis of Four bar mechanism
2. Choose between analytical and
graphical methods to find the dynamic
17 L17 forces acting on the four bar mechanism.
1.Calculate the unknown forces and torque
by performing static analysis of 4 bar
Problems on static analysis of 4 bar mechanisms mechanisms
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/11 2.Analyze the mechanism and select the
appropriate method in finding the
18 L18 unknown forces.
1.Calculate the unknown forces and torque
by performing dynamic analysis of 4 bar
Problems on dynamic analysis of 4 bar mechanisms mechanisms
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/10 2.Analyze the mechanism and select the
appropriate method in finding the
19 L19 unknown forces.
1.Understand the concept of friction and
FRICTION: Inclined plane apply it to body on various planes.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/1 2.Compute the frictional force on the body
20 L20 resting on horizontal and inclined planes.
1.Discuss about different types of screws
friction of screw and nuts 2.Apply the friction principle on screw
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/11 jack and find the force required to raise
21 L21 and lower the load on the inclined plane.
1.Differentiate between pivot and collars
pivot and collar, uniform pressure, uniform wear 2. Find when will the torque value be more
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/11 comparing uniform pressure and uniform
22 L22 wear theory both in pivot and collars.
1. Calculate the torque transmitted by the
frictional surface of the bearing.
Problems on uniform pressure, uniform wear
2. Identify the theory which can used in
solving the problems depending upon the
23 II L23 type of bearings.
1. Differentiate between the friction circle
friction circle and friction axis and friction axis.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/12 2. Explain the reason for the change in the
24 L24 friction axis.
Lubricated surfaces, boundary friction and film 1. Differentiate various types friction
lubrication surfaces.
25 L25 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/13 2. Compare wet friction and dry friction.
26 L26 Problems on friction circle and friction axis 1.Calculate the coefficient of friction of

http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/12 the lubricant and the power transmitted by

the shaft.
2. Analyze the factors which effect the
change in friction axis.
1.Understand the principles of clutches,
CLUTCHES, BRAKES and brakes and dynamometers.
DYNAMOMETERS: Introduction 2.Differentiate between clutches and
27 L27 brakes.
1. Differentiate between single and multi
Clutches: Single plate and multi plate clutches plate clutches.
derivation, Problems 2. Determine the torque transmitted by the
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/15 clutches using uniform pressure and
28 L28 uniform wear theories.
1.Understand the importance and
Cone clutch derivations, Problems applications of Cone clutch
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/15 2. Determine the axial spring force
29 L29 necessary to engage the clutch.
1. Understand the concept of floating shoes
Centrifugal clutch. in Centrifugal clutch.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/15 2. Determine the dimensions of the
30 L30 Centrifugal clutch.
1. Determine the torque and power
transmitted by the clutches.
Problems on clutches. 2. Select one of the theories from uniform
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/16 pressure and uniform wear theory in
calculating the power transmitted by the
31 L31 clutches.
1. Distinguish between brakes and
BRAKES AND DYNAMOMETERS: Introduction dynamometers.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/17 2. Discuss the different types of brakes and
32 L32 dynamometers.
1. Understand the working of the Simple
Simple Block Brakes Block Brakes.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/17 2. Analyze the effect of frictional force in
33 L33 Self-locking and Self-energizing brakes.
1. Derive the expression for braking torque
in Internal expanding shoe brakes.
Internal expanding shoe brakes.
2. Discuss the importance of leading and
trailing shoes in Internal expanding shoe
34 L34 brakes.
1. Discuss the applications of Band brakes,
Band brakes, Band & block brakes of the vehicle Band & block brakes in the automobiles.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/18 2. Determine the braking torque in
35 L35 various types of brakes.
1. Differentiate between Absorption &
Dynamometers: Absorption & Transmission types Transmission Dynamometers.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/18 2. Determine the torque transmitted by the
36 L36 engine using various dynamometers.
1. Calculate the distance covered by the
Problems on brakes and dynamometers. car before coming to rest.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/19 2. Determine the brake power transmitted
37 L37 by the engine.
1. Understand the working principle of
TURNING MOMENT DIAGRAM AND FLY
the flywheels.
WHEELS: Introduction, turning moment –
2. Draw the turning moment diagram of a
connecting rod angular velocity and acceleration,
single cylinder double acting steam
38 L38 engine.
1. Explain precisely the uses of turning
Crank effort and torque diagrams moment diagram of reciprocating engines.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/21 2. Discuss the turning moment diagram
39 L39 for multi cylinder engines.

1. Derive the expression for energy stored

in the flywheel.
Fluctuation of energy
2. Calculate the fluctuation of energy in
the flywheels when the energy variations
40 L40 in the flywheel are given.
1. Discuss the function of flywheel and
Flywheels and their design how does it differ from that of a governor.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/22 2. Discuss the various factors affecting
41 L41 the design of the flywheel.
1. Determine the turning moment of the
crank shaft by drawing the turning
Problems on flywheels.
moment diagram.
2. Determine the dimensions of the
42 L42 flywheel.
1. Discuss the function of governor and
GOVERNORS: Introduction, Watt Governor how does it differ from that of a flywheel.
43 L43 2. Classify the governors.
1. Explain how porter governor is modified
from Watt governor.
Porter and Proell Governors 2. Determine the relation between height
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/23 of the governor and the angular speed of
the balls by using Method of resolution of
44 L44 forces and Instantaneous methods.
1. Differentiate spring loaded governors
Spring loaded governors – Hartnell and hartung with from dead weight governors.
auxiliary springs 2. Derive the expression for the stiffness of
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/24 the springs in Hartnell and Hartung
45 L45 governors.
1. Explain when the governor is said to be
Sensitiveness, Isochronism & hunting.
Sensitiveness, Isochronism & hunting
2. Discuss the factors effecting the
Sensitiveness, Isochronism & hunting in
46 L46 governors.
1. Explain and derive the expressions for
Effort & Power of the governors effort and power of various governors.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/25 2. Determine the power of porter and
47 L47 proell governors.
1. Determine the speed range of the
governors in the lowest and highest
Problems on governers sleeve positions neglecting the obliquity
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/26 of governors.
2. Calculate the stiffness of the spring and
48 L48 the equilibrium speed of the governors.
BALANCING OF ROTATING & 1.Discuss why balancing of masses is
RECIPROCATING MASSES : Balancing of necessary
rotating masses 2. Distinguish between the balancing of
49 L49 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/27 rotating and reciprocating masses.
1. Discuss the primary and secondary
Primary, Secondary, and higher balancing of
balancing of reciprocating masses.
reciprocating masses- Analytical and graphical
2. Determine how the reciprocating masses
methods
are balanced using Analytical and
50 L50 graphical methods.
1.Understand the balancing of V’ and
Unbalanced forces and Couples, Examination of
multi-cylinder in-line engines and radial
‘V’ and multi-cylinder in-line engines and radial
engines.
engines for primary and secondary balancing
2. Estimate whether the V-engines can be
51 L51 completely balanced or not.
1. Derive the expressions for an
Locomotive balancing-Hammer blow, Swaying uncoupled two cylinder locomotive
couple and Variation of Tractive efforts engines.
52 L52 2. Discuss the concepts of Hammer blow,

Swaying couple and Variation of Tractive

efforts in Locomotive balancing.
1.Determine the balancing masses in
reciprocating engines.
Problems on balancing of reciprocating masses.
2.Predict the appropriate method for
calculating the balancing masses in
53 L53 reciprocating engines.
1. Determine the balancing masses in
rotating engines.
Problems on balancing of rotating masses. 2. Predict the appropriate method for
calculating the balancing masses in
54 L54 rotating engines.
1. Understand how vibrations occur due to
VIBRATIONS :Free Vibrations of mass attached to improper balancing.
vertical spring Oscillation of Pendulums
55 L55 2. Discuss the types in vibratory motion.
1. Derive the expression for natural
Oscillation of Pendulums ,Transverse loads frequency of Free Transverse vibrations.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/29 2. Determine the frequency of transverse
56 L56 vibrations.
1. Determine the frequency of free
vibrations.
Problems on free vibrations
2. Analyze the effect of Young’s modulus
of material in determining the frequency
57 L57 of free vibrations.
1. Determine the frequency of forced
vibrations.
Problems on forced vibrations
2. Analyze the effect of resonance in
determining the frequency of free
58 L58 vibrations.
1. Derive the expression for natural
frequency of free longitudinal vibrations.
Vibrations of beams with concentrated and
2. Predict the appropriate method among
distributed loads, Dunkerley’s method, Rayleigh’s
Equilibrium, Energy and Rayleigh’s
method.
methods in determining the natural
59 L59 frequency.
1. Determine the natural frequency in free
Problems on Dunkerley’s method, Rayleigh’s
and forced vibrations.
method.
2. Determine the frequency of torsional
60 L60 vibrations of a geared system.
1. Understand the concepts Whirling of
Whirling of shafts, critical speeds shafts, critical speeds.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/30 2. Determine the critical speeds of the
61 L61 given shafts.
1.Describe the method of finding the
natural frequency of torsional vibrations for
Torsional Vibrations - One Two & Three rotor
a two and three rotor systems.
systems
2.Justify that the effect of torsional
vibrations is more in three rotor system
62 L62 than in a two rotor system.
1. Determine thewhirling speed of the
shafts by assuming the shaft to be freely
Problems on whirling shafts supported.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/32 2. Analyze the effect of bending stress in
determining the critical speed of the
63 L63 shafts.
1. Determine the frequency of torsional
vibrations.
Problems on Torsional Vibrations
2. Analyze the appropriate method in
determining the frequency of torsional
64 L64 vibrations.

T1. S. S. Ratan , Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw- Hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.
T2. Theory of mechanisms and machines/ Jagdish Lal/ Metropolitan Book Company.
R1. J. S. Rao, R. V. Dugggipati , Mechanism and Machine Theory, New Age Publishers, New
Delhi, India.
R2. Shigley , Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.
R3. Thomas Bevan, Theory of machines, CBS Publishers, New Delhi, India.
R4. R.K.Bansal, Theory of machines, Lakshmi publications, New Delhi, India.
R5. Sadhu Singh, Theory of Machines, Pearson 3rd edition.
R6. Ashok G Ambedkar, Mechanisms and Machines Theory, PHI/Eastern Economy Edition.
9.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Course
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Objectives
I S H S S H S S S H H S
II S H H S S S S S S H H S
III H H H S H S S H S
IV S H H S H H S S S H S
V S H H S S S S H H S
S= Supportive H=Highly Relative
9.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Course
Outcomes
a S S S S S S S S S
b S H H S H H S H S S
c S H S S H S S S H S S
d H H S S H S S H S H S S
e H H H H S S S S S S S

9.11 MAPPING OF BLOOMS VS COURSE OUTCOMES

6. Creating /
Synthesis :
Builds a
structure or
5. Evaluating /
4. Analyzing / pattern from
Evaluation:
Analysis : diverse
Make
Separates elements. Put
judgments
material or parts together to
about the value
3. Applying / concepts into form a whole,
of ideas or
Application: component parts with emphasis
Blooms Taxonomy  2. Understanding materials.
Use a concept so that its on creating a
/ Comprehension
in a new organizational new meaning or
: Key Words:
1. situation or structure may be structure.
Comprehending Agree,
Remembering / unprompted use understood.
the meaning, Appraise,
Knowledge: of an Distinguishes Key Words:
translation, Assess, Award,
Recall or abstraction. between facts Adapt, Build,
interpolation, and Choose,
retrieve Applies what and inferences. Change,
interpretation of Compare,
previous learned was learned in Choose,
instructions and Conclude,
information. the classroom Key Words: Combine,
problems. State a Criteria,
into novel Analyze, Compile,
problem in one's Criticize,
Key Words: situations in the Assume, Compose,
Course Outcomes own words. Decide,
Choose, Define, work place. Categorize, Construct,
Deduct,
Find, Classify, Create,
Key Words: Defend,
How, Label, Key Words: Compare, Delete, Design,
Classify, Determine,
List, Match, Apply, Build, Conclusion, Develop,
Compare, Disprove,
Name, Omit, Choose, Contrast, Discuss,
Contrast, Estimate,
Recall, Relate, Construct, Discover, Elaborate,
Demonstrate, Evaluate,
Select, Show, Develop, Dissect, Estimate,
Explain, Extend, Explain,
Spell, Tell, Experiment, Distinguish, Formulate,
Illustrate, Infer, Importance,
What, When, with, Identify, Divide, Happen,
Interpret, Outline, Influence,
Where, Which, Interview, Examine, Imagine,
Relate, Rephrase, Interpret,
Who, Why Make use of, Function, Improve,
Show, Judge, Justify,
Model, Inference, Invent, Make
Summarize, Mark, Measure,
Organize, Plan, Inspect, List, up,
Translate Opinion,
Select, Solve, Motive, Maximize,
Perceive,
Utilize Relationships, Minimize,
Prioritize,
Simplify, Modify,
Prove, Rate,
Survey, Take, Original,
Recommend,
part, in, Test Originate, Plan,
Rule on, Select,
For, Theme Predict,
Support, value
Propose,
Solution, Solve,
Suppose, Test,
Theory
a) The student will be
able to understand the
different forces acting √ √ √
on machines.
b) The student will be
able to understand the
effect of the
gyroscopic and
centrifugal couples for
√ √ √
the design of the
bearings.
c) The student will be
able to calculate forces
and analyze for the
design of machine √ √
components.

d) The student will be

able to design and
analyze the machines
considering
vibrations
friction,
and
√ √
balancing properly.
e) The student will be

able to decide and plan
to create a machine
that competes with the
√ √
other manufacturers.
9.12 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:
UNIT-I
1. A disc is spinning with an angular velocity ω rad/s about the axis of spin. The couple applied
to the disc causing precession will be [ d ]
where I = Mass moment of inertia of the disc, and

ωp = Angular velocity of precession of the axis of spin.
2. A disc spinning on its axis at 20 rad/s will undergo precession when a torque 100 N-m is
applied about an axis normal to it at an angular speed, if mass moment of inertia of the disc is
the 1 kg-m2 [ b ]
(a) 2 rad/s
(b) 5 rad/s
(c) 10 rad/s
(d) 20 rad/s
3. The engine of an aeroplane rotates in clockwise direction when seen from the tail end and the
aeroplane takes a turn to the left. The effect of the gyroscopic couple on the aeroplane will be
[ a ]
(a) to raise the nose and dip the tail (b) to dip the nose and raise the tail
(c) to raise the nose and tail (d) to dip the nose and tail
4. The air screw of an aeroplane is rotating clockwise when looking from the front. If it makes a
left turn, the gyroscopic effect will [ b ]
(a) tend to depress the nose and raise the tail b) tend to raise the nose and depress the tail
(c) tilt the aeroplane (d) none of the above
5. The rotor of a ship rotates in clockwise direction when viewed from the stern and the ship
takes a left turn. The effect of the gyroscopic couple acting on it will be [ c ]
(a) to raise the bow and stern (b) to lower the bow and stern
(c) to raise the bow and lower the stern (d) to lower the bow and raise the stern
6. When the pitching of a ship is upward, the effect of gyroscopic couple acting on it will be
[ b ]
(a) to move the ship towards port side (b) to move the ship towards star-board
(c) to raise the bow and lower the stern (d) to raise the stern and lower the bow

7. In an automobile, if the vehicle makes a left turn, the gyroscopic torque [ a ]

(a) increases the forces on the outer wheels (b) decreases the forces on the outer wheels
(c) does not affect the forces on the outer wheels (d) none of the above
8. A motor car moving at a certain speed takes a left turn in a curved path. If the engine rotates in
the same direction as that of wheels, then due to the centrifugal forces [ b ]
(a) the reaction on the inner wheels increases and on the outer wheels decreases
(b) the reaction on the outer wheels increases and on the inner wheels decreases
(c) the reaction on the front wheels increases and on the rear wheels decreases
(d) the reaction on the rear wheels increases and on the front wheels decreases
9. When the crank is at the inner dead centre, in a horizontal reciprocating steam engine, then the
velocity of the piston will be [ a ]
(a) zero (b) minimum (c) maximum (d) None
10. The acceleration of the piston in a reciprocating steam engine is given by [d ]
Where ω = Angular velocity of the crank,

r = Radius of the crank,
θ = Angle turned by the crank from inner dead centre, and
n = Ratio of length of connecting rod to crank radius.
11. A rigid body, under the action of external forces, can be replaced by two masses placed at a
fixed distance apart. The two masses form an equivalent dynamical system, if [ d ]
(a) The sum of two masses is equal to the total mass of the body
(b) The centre of gravity of the two masses coincides with that of the body
(c) The sum of mass moment of inertia of the masses about their centre of gravity is equal to the
mass moment of inertia of the body
(d) all of the above
12. The essential condition of placing the two masses, so that the system becomes dynamically
equivalent is [ a ]
(a) l1 .l2 = kG2 (b) l1 .l2 = kG2 (c) l1 = kG (d) l2 = kG

Where l1 and l2 = Distance of two masses from the centre of gravity of the body, and
kG = Radius of gyration of the body.
13. In an engine, the work done by inertia forces in a cycle is [ a ]

(a) positive (b) zero (c) negative (d) none of these
14. The resultant forces acting on a body together with reversed effective forces are in
equilibrium, is given by [a ]
a) D Alemberts Principle b) Newtons Law c) Thermodynamics Law d) None
15. the up and down moment of a Naval Ship is known as [b]

a) Steering b) Pitching c) Rolling d)None
16. The fore end of a Naval Ship is termed as [b]

a) Stern b) Bow c) Port d) Star board
17. The moment of a naval ship with respect to longitudinal axis is known as [c]
a) Steering b) Pitching c) Rolling d) None
18. The effect of gyroscopic couple in case of rolling of naval ship [c ]

a) Maximum b) Minimum c) No effect d) None
19. Banking of a road surface means [a]

a) Inner rail down on outer rail up b) Inner rail up on outer rail down
c) Both rails on same level d) None
20. The pitching of a naval ship is assumed to be [c]

a) Linear Motion b) Rotary Motion c) S H M d) None
UNIT II
1. The distance between the centers of the adjacent rivets in the same row is called
[ a]
A) pitch B) margin C) row pitch D) diagonal pitch
2. According to I.B.R , safety factor of rivet joint should not be less than ___ .[ d ]
(A)3 B) 2 C)5 D) 4
3. The angle of inclination of the plane, at which the body begins to move down the plane, is
called [a ]
(a) angle of friction (b) angle of repose (c) angle of projection d) None
4. In a screw jack, the effort required to lift the load W is given by [b]
(a) P = W tan (α – φ) (b) P = W tan (α + φ)
(c) P = W cos (α – φ) (d) P = W cos (α + φ)
where α = Helix angle, and
φ = Angle of friction.
5. The efficiency of a screw jack is given by [b]
6. The radius of a friction circle for a shaft of radius r rotating inside a bearing is [ a ]
(a) r sin φ (b) r cos φ (c) r tan φ (d) r cot φ
7. The efficiency of a screw jack is maximum, when [b]
8. The maximum efficiency of a screw jack is [ a]
9. The frictional torque transmitted in a flat pivot bearing, considering uniform pressure, is
[ b ]

where μ = Coefficient of friction,

W = Load over the bearing, and
R = Radius of the bearing surface.
10. The frictional torque transmitted in a conical pivot bearing, considering uniform wear, is
[a ]
where R = Radius of the shaft, and

α = Semi-angle of the cone.
11. The frictional torque transmitted by a disc or plate clutch is same as that of [ b ]
(a) flat pivot bearing (b) flat collar bearing
(c) conical pivot bearing (d) trapezoidal pivot bearing
12. The frictional torque transmitted by a cone clutch is same as that of [ d ]

(a) flat pivot bearing (b) flat collar bearing
(c) conical pivot bearing (d) trapezoidal pivot bearing
13. The brakes commonly used in railway trains is [ a]

a) shoe brake (b) band brake
c) band and block brake (d) internal expanding brake
14. The brake commonly used in motor cars is [ d]
(a )shoe brake (b) band brake
(c) band and block brake (d) internal expanding brake
15. When brakes are applied to all the four wheels of a moving car, the distance travelled by
the car before it is brought to rest, will be [ b]
(a) maximum (b) minimum c) Zero d) None
16. Which of the following is an absorption type dynamometer? [ a ]
a) prony brake dynamometer (b) torsion dynamometer
c) epicyclic-train dynamometer (d) None
17. A band brake having band-width of 80mm, drum diameter of 250mm, coefficient of friction
of 0.25 and angle of wrap of 270 degrees is required to exert a friction torque of 1000N-m. The
maximum tension (in kN) developed in the band is [ C]
(A) 1.88 (B) 3.56 (C) 6.12 (D) 11.56 GATE 2010
18. Automatically engaged and disengaged clutch is known as [ c ]

a) Disc clutch b) Cone Clutch c) Centrifugal Clutch d) None
19. The brake applied on brake drum in radial direction is known as [ a ]

a) Radial brake b) Axial brake c) Hydrodynamic brake d) None
A 1 kg block is resting on a surface with coefficient of friction μ = 0.1. A force of 0.8N is applied
to the block as shown in figure. The friction force is [ b]

(A) 0 (B) 0.8N (C) 0.98N (D) 1.2N

GATE 2011
20. Which of the following is a transmission type dynamometer? [ c]

a)Prony brake dynamometer (b) rope brake dynamometer
c)epicyclic-train dynamometer (d) None
Unit III
1. A flywheel connected to a punching machine has to supply energy of 400 Nm while
running at a mean angular speed of 20 radians/s. If the total fluctuation of speed is not to
exceed ±2%, the mass moment of inertia of the flywheel in 2 kg − m is
[ a]
(A) 25 (B) 50 (C) 100 (D) 125
2. In a turning moment diagram, the variations of energy above and below the mean resisting
torque line is called [a ]
a) fluctuation of energy b) maximum fluctuation of energy
c) coefficient of fluctuation of energy c)none of the above
3. The ratio of the maximum fluctuation of speed to the mean speed is called [ c ]
a) fluctuation of speed (b) maximum fluctuation of speed
c) coefficient of fluctuation of speed (d) none of these
4. CS = Coefficient of fluctuation of speed, and ω= Mean angular speed = ( ω1 + ω2 )/2

The maximum fluctuation of energy is the [ b ]
a) sum of maximum and minimum energies
b) difference between the maximum and minimum energies
c) ratio of the maximum energy and minimum energy
d) ratio of the mean resisting torque to the work done per cycle
5. The maximum fluctuation of energy in a flywheel is equal to [ d ]

(a) I .ω (ω1 − ω2 ) (b) 2 I .ω2 .CS (c) 2E.CS (d) all of these
6.The ratio of the maximum fluctuation of energy to the, ......... is called coefficient of fluctuation
of energy. [ b]
(a) minimum fluctuation of energy (b) work done per cycle
where I = Mass moment of inertia of the flywheel,
E = Mean kinetic energy of the flywheel,
7.The height of a Watt’s governor (in metres) in equal to [ c ]

(a) 8.95/N2 (b) 89.5/N2 c) 895/N2 (d) 8950/N2
where N = Speed of the arm and ball about the spindle axis
8.When the sleeve of a Porter governor moves upwards, the governor speed [ a]
a) increases (b) decreases (c) remains unaffected d)None

9.A Hartnell governor is a [ b ]

(a) pendulum type governor (b) spring loaded governor
(c) dead weight governor (d) inertia governor
10.Which of the following governor is used to drive a gramophone ? [ c ]

(a) Watt governor (b) Porter governor
(c) Pickering governor (d) Hartnell governor
11.Which of the following is a spring controlled governor? [ d ]

(a) Hartnell (b) Hartung (c) Pickering (d) all of these
12.For two governors A and B, the lift of sleeve of governor A is more than that of governor B,
for a given fractional change in speed. It indicates that [ a ]
a) governor A is more sensitive than governor B
b) governor B is more sensitive than governor A
c) both governors A and B are equally sensitive
d) none of the above
13.The sensitiveness of a governor is given by [ b ]

(a)ω mean/(ω2 −ω1) (b) (ω2 −ω1)/ ωmean (c) (ω2 −ω1)/ 2ωmean (d)none where ω1 and ω2 =
Minimum and maximum angular speed, and ωmean = Mean angular speed.
14. In a Hartnell governor, if a spring of greater stiffness is used, then the governor will
` [ b ]
(a) more sensitive (b) less sensitive (c) isochronous d) None
15. A governor is said to be hunting, if the speed of the engine [ d ]

a) remains constant at the mean speed b) is above the mean speed
c) is below the mean speed
d) fluctuates continuously above and below the mean speed.
16.A hunting governor is [ c ]

a) more stable (b) less sensitive (c) more sensitive (d) none
17. Isochronism in a governor is desirable when [b ]

a) the engine operates at low speeds b) the engine operates at high speeds
c) the engine operates at variable speeds d) one speed is desired under one load
18.When the relation between the controlling force (Fc ) and radius of rotation (r) for a spring
controlled governor is Fc = a.r + b, then the governor will be [b ]
a) stable (b) unstable c) isochronous d) None
19.A governor which canot be ischronous is [ a ]

a) porter b) Hartnell c) Watt d) Hartung
20.When the relation between the controlling force (Fc ) and radius of rotation (r) for a spring
controlled governor is Fc = a.r, then the governor will be [ c]
a) stable (b) unstable c) isochronous d) None
UNIT IV

1. The balancing of rotating and reciprocating parts of an engine is necessary when it runs at
[ c ]
(a) slow speed (b) medium speed (c) high speed
2. A disturbing mass m1 attached to a rotating shaft may be balanced by a single mass m2

attached in the same plane of rotation as that of m1 such that [ b ]
(a) m1.r2 = m2.r1 (b) m1.r1 = m2.r2 (c) m1. m2 = r1.r2
3. For static balancing of a shaft, [ a]

(a) the net dynamic force acting on the shaft is equal to zero
(b) the net couple due to the dynamic forces acting on the shaft is equal to zero
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of the above
4. For dynamic balancing of a shaft, [ c ]

(a) the net dynamic force acting on the shaft is equal to zero
(b) the net couple due to dynamic forces acting on the shaft is equal to zero
(c) both (a) and (b)
5. In order to have a complete balance of the several revolving masses in different planes
[ c]
(a) the resultant force must be zero
(b) the resultant couple must be zero
(c) both the resultant force and couple must be zero
6.The primary unbalanced force is maximum when the angle of inclination of the crank with the
line of stroke is [ c]
(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) 180° (d) 360°
7. The partial balancing means [ b ]

(a) balancing partially the revolving masses (b) balancing partially the reciprocating masses
(c) best balancing of engines (d) all of the above
8.In order to facilitate the starting of locomotive in any position, the cranks of a locomotive, with
two cylinders, are placed at . . . . . . to each other. [ b ]
a) 45° (b) 90° (c) 120° (d) 180°
9.In a locomotive, the ratio of the connecting rod length to the crank radius is kept very large in
order to [ b]
(a) minimise the effect of primary forces (b) minimise the effect of secondary forces
(c) have perfect balancing (d) start the locomotive quickly
10.The swaying couple is maximum or minimum when the angle of inclination of the crank to
the line of stroke ( θ ) is equal to [ b]
(a) 45° and 135° (b) 90° and 135°
(c) 135° and 225° (d) 45° and 225°
11.The tractive force is maximum or minimum when the angle of inclination of the crank to the
line of stroke ( θ ) is equal to [ d ]

(a) 90° and 225° (b) 135° and 180° (c) 180° and 225° (d) 135° and 315°
12. The swaying couple is due to the [ a ]

(a) primary unbalanced force (b) secondary unbalanced force
(c) two cylinders of locomotive (d) partial balancing
13.In a locomotive, the maximum magnitude of the unbalanced force along the perpendicular to
the line of stroke, is known as [ c ]
(a ) tractive force (b) swaying couple (c) hammer blow (d) none of these
14.The effect of hammer blow in a locomotive can be reduced by [ d ]

(a) decreasing the speed (b) using two or three pairs of wheels coupled together
(c) balancing whole of the reciprocating parts (d) both (a) and (b)
15.Multi-cylinder engines are desirable because [ c ]

(a) only balancing problems are reduced (b) only flywheel size is reduced
(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these
16.When the primary direct crank of a reciprocating engine makes an angle θ with the line of
stroke, then the secondary direct crank will make an angle of . . . . . with the line of stroke.[ c ]
(a) θ /2 (b) θ (c) 2 θ (d) 4 θ
17. Secondary forces in reciprocating mass on engine frame are [a ]

(a) of same frequency as of primary forces (b) twice the frequency as of primary forces
(c) four times the frequency as of primary forces (d) none of the above
18.The secondary unbalanced force produced by the reciprocating parts of a certain cylinder of a
given engine with crank radius r and connecting rod length l can be considered as equal to
primary unbalanced force produced by the same weight having [ a ]
(a) an equivalent crank radius r2/4l and rotating at twice the speed of the engine
(b) r2/4l as equivalent crank radius and rotating at engine speed
(c) equivalent crank length of r2/4l and rotating at engine speed
19. Which of the following statement is correct? [ c ]

(a) In any engine, 100% of the reciprocating masses can be balanced dynamically
(b) In the case of balancing of multicylinder engine, the value of secondary force is higher than
the value of the primary force
(c) In the case of balancing of multimass rotating systems, dynamic balancing can be directly
started without static balancing done to the system
(d) none of the above.
20.Inradial engine , since the plane of rotation of the various cranks is same there is no [ a ]
a) unbalanced primary and secondary forces b) unbalanced primary
c) unbalanced secondary forces d) None
UNIT V
1. When there is a reduction in amplitude over every cycle of vibration, then the body is said to
have [ c ]
(a) free vibration (b) forced vibration (c) damped vibrationd) None

2.Longitudinal vibrations are said to occur when the particles of a body moves [ b ]
a) perpendicular to its axis (b) parallel to its axis (c) in a circle about its axis
3.When a body is subjected to transverse vibrations, the stress induced in a body will be [ b]
(a) shear stress (b) tensile stress (c) compressive stress
4.The natural frequency (in Hz) of free longitudinal vibrations is equal to [ d ]

(a) 1/2π s/m (b 1/2π δ/g (c ) 0.4985/δ d) All of the above
where m = Mass of the body in kg,
s = Stiffness of the body in N/m, and
δ = Static deflection of the body in metre
5.The factor which affects the critical speed of a shaft is [ d ]

(a) diameter of the disc (b) span of the shaft
(c) eccentricity (d) all of these
6.The equation of motion for a vibrating system with viscous damping is d x2/ dt2 + c/mX dx/ dt
+ s/mXx = 0 If the roots of this equation are real, then the system will be
[ a ]
(a) over damped (b) under damped (c) critically damped
7.In under damped vibrating system, if x1 and x2 are the successive values of the amplitude on
the same side of the mean position, then the logarithmic decrement is equal to [ b ]
(a) x1/x2 (b) log (x1/x2) (c) loge (x1/x2) (d) log (x1.x2)
8.The ratio of the maximum displacement of the forced vibration to the deflection due to the
static force, is known as [ d]
(a) damping factor (b) damping coefficient
(c) logarithmic decrement (d) magnification factor
9.In vibration isolation system, if ω/ωn is less than 2 , then for all values of the damping factor,
the transmissibility will be [ c]
(a) less than unity (b) equal to unity (c) greater than unity (d) zero
where ω = Circular frequency of the system in rad/s, and
ωn = Natural circular frequency of vibration of the system in rad/s.
10. In vibration isolation system, if ω/ωn >1, then the phase difference between the transmitted
force and the disturbing force is [ c ]
(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) 180° (d) 270°
11.The ratio of maximum displacement of the forced vibrations to the static deflection is called
[d ]
(a) Logarithmic decrement (b) Damping co-efficient
(c) critical damping co-efficient (d)Magnification factor
12.In SHM the product of periodic time ad the frequecy if equal to [ d ]

a) Zero b) Unity c) π d) π/2
13.If the damping factor for a vibrating system is unity, the system is [ a ]
a) Critical damping b) Under damping c) Over damping d) none

14.If the damping factor for a vibrating system is more than unity, the system is [ c ]
a) Critical damping b) Under damping c) Over damping d) none
15.At the nodal point in a shaft the amplitude of torsional vibration is [ a ]

a) Zero b) minimum c) maximum d) None
16.A shaft carrying two rotors as its ends will have [ b ]
a) One node b) Two node c) Three node d) None
17.In vibration isolation, which one of the following statements is NOT correct regarding
Transmissibility (T)? [ b ]
(A) T is nearly unity at small excitation frequencies
(B) T can be always reduced by using higher damping at any excitation frequency
(C) T is unity at the frequency ratio of 2
(D) T is infinity at resonance for undamped systems
18.Figure shows a single degree of freedom system. The system consists of a massless rigid bar
OP hinged at O and a mass m at end P. The natural frequency of vibration of the system I
[ a ]
19. Consider a single degree-of-freedom system with viscous damping excited by a harmonic
force. At resonance, the phase angle (in degree) of the displacement with respect to the exciting
force is [ c ]
(A) 0 (B) 45 (C) 90 (D) 135
20. Critical damping is the [ b ]

(A) Largest amount of damping for which no oscillation occurs in free vibration
(B) Smallest amount of damping for which no oscillation occurs in free vibration
(C) Largest amount of damping for which the motion is simple harmonic in free vibration
(D) Smallest amount of damping for which the motion is simple harmonic in free vibration
9.13 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Tutorials
Short Answer Questions
1 Discuss precesional angular motion Comprehension b
2 Define right hand screw rule Knowledge b
3 Derive a formula for gyroscopic couple. Synthesis b
4 Write a short note on gyroscope. Knowledge b
5 Define the pitching of a naval ship. Knowledge b
Discuss the effect of reactive gyroscopic couple when
6 Understand b
pitching up ward?
Discuss the effect of reactive gyroscopic couple when a
7 Understand b
naval ship is rolling?
8 Describe the gyroscopic effect on an aeroplane. Comprehension b
9 State the conditions for a body to be in equilibrium under Knowledge c

the action of two forces and torque

10 State and explain the D’Alembert’s Principle. Knowledge c

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Tutorials
Long Answer Questions
The turbine rotor of a ship has a mass of 20 tones & a
radius of gyration of 0.75m.Its speed is 2000 rpm.the ship
pitches 6degrees above & below the horizontal position.
One complete oscillation takes 18 sec & the motion is
simple harmonic. Determine
(i)The maximum couple tending to shear the holding down
1 Evaluation b
bolts of the turbine.
(ii)The maximum angular acceleration of the ship during
pitching &
(iii)The direction in which the bow will tend to turn while
rising, if the rotation the rotor is clock wise when looking
from rear.
A car weighs 20KN. It has a wheel base of 2m, Track width
1m & Height of C.G. 300 mm above the ground level &
lies midway between the front & rear axle. The engine
flywheel rotates at 3000 rpm clockwise when viewed from
the front. The moment of inertia of the fly wheel is 4kg-m²
2 Application b
& MOI of each wheel is 3 kg-m², Calculate the reactions
between the wheels & the ground when car takes the curve
of 15m radius towards right at 30 km/hr, taking into
consideration the gyroscopic & the centrifugal effects. Each
wheel radius is 400mm
The rotor of the turbine of a yacht makes 1200 rpm
clockwise when viewed from the stern. The rotor has a
mass of 750 kg, and its radius of gyration is 250 mm.
3 Calculate the maximum gyroscopic couple transmitted to Application b
the hull (body of the yacht), when the yacht pitches with
maximum angular velocity of 1 rad/s.
An aeroplane makes a complete half circle of 50 meters

radius, towards left, when flying at 200 kmph. The rotary
engine and the propeller of the plane has a mass of 400 kg.
4 and a radius of gyration of 0.3 m. The engine rotates at Application b
2400 r.p.m. clockwise when viewed from the rear.
Calculate the gyroscopic couple on the aircraft and state its
effect on it.

A four wheeled motor car of mass 2000 kg has a wheel

base 2.5 m, track width 1.5 m and height of center of
gravity 500 mm above the ground level and lies at 1 meter
from the front axle. Each wheel has an an effective
diameter of 0.8 m and a moment of inertia of 0.8 kg-m2.
5 The drive shaft, Engine flywheel and transmission are Application b
rotating at 4 times the speed of road wheel, in a clockwise
direction when viewed from the front, and is equivalent to a
mass of 75 kg having a radius of gyration of 100 mm. If the
car is taking a right turn of 60 m radius at 60 km/h,
Calculate the load on each wheel.
In a slider crank mechanism, the lengths of the crank and
the connecting rod are 480 mm and 1.6 m respectively. It
has an eccentricity of 100 mm. Assuming a velocity of 20
rad/sec of the crank OA. Calculate the following at an
7 Application c
interval of 30 degrees.
i). Velocity and the acceleration of the slider
ii). Angular velocity and angular acceleration of the
connecting rod.
In a Four-link mechanism, the dimensions of the links are:
AB=20 mm, BC= 66mm, CD= 56 mm, and AD = 80 mm.
AD is the fixed link. The crank rotates at uniform angular
velocity of 10.5 rad/sec in the counter-clockwise direction.
8 Determine the angular displacements, angular velocities Evaluation c
angular accelarations of the output link DC and the coupler
BC for a complete revolution of the crank at an interval of
40 degrees.
Determine the required input torque on the crank of a

slider-crank mechanism for the static equilibrium when the
applied piston load is 1500N. the lengths of the crank and
9 Evaluation c
the connecting rod are 40mm and 100 mm respectively, and
the crank has turned through 450 from the inner dead
centre.
Synthesize a 4 – bar mechanism to generate a function
y=log x for 1 ≤ x ≤ 2. The range of the output crank may be
10 chosen as 900 while that of input crank be 600. Assume Application c
three precession points which are to be obtained from
Chebyshev spacings.

Blooms
Questions Taxonomy Course
Sl.No. Level Outcome
UNIT-II
Tutorials
1 Define the phenomena of friction Knowledge d
2 Briefly explain about screw jack Knowledge d
Discuss Briefly about over hauling and self locking of
3 Comprehension d
screw
4 Define the terms of angle of repose Knowledge d
5 Give a brief account of friction between lubricated surfaces Knowledge d
6 Define friction circle Knowledge d
7 Discuss the various types of mechanical brakes Comprehension d
8 Describe the brakes used in locomotives. Knowledge d
9 Explain the function of Absorption type Dynamometer Knowledge d
10 Discuss the various types of transmission Dynamometers.. Comprehension d
Blooms
UNIT-II
Tutorials
The lead screw of the lathe has acme threads of 50 mm
outside diameter and 10 mm pitch. The included angle of
thread is 29 degrees. It drives a tool carriage and exerts a
pressure of 2500N. A collar bearing with outside diameter
1 100mm and inside diameter 50mm is provided to take up Application d
the thrust. If the lead screw rotates at 30 r.p.m. and
calculate the efficiency and the power required to drive the
screw. The coefficient of friction for the screw threads is
0.15 and for the collar is 0.12.
A band brake acts o he 3/4th of circumference of a drum of
450 mm diameter which is keyed to the shaft. the band
brake provided a braking torque of 225 N-m. One end of
the band is attached to a fulcrum pin of the lever and the
2 other end to a pin 100 mm from the fulcrum. If the Application a
operating force is applied at 500 mm from the fulcrum and
the coefficient of friction is 0.25, calculate the operating
force when the drum rotates in (a) anti0clockwise, and (b)
clockwise direction
An engine developing 45KW at 1000 rpm is fitted with a
cone clutch built inside a fly wheel. The cone has a face
angle of 12.5 0& maximum mean diameter of 500 mm.
3 The co-efficient of friction is 0.2. The normal pressure on Evaluation a
the clutch face is not to exceed 0.1 N/mm2.Determine 1.
The axial spring force necessary to engage to clutch.2.The
face width required.

A truck has 3.15 m wheel base & the C.G. is 1.28 m in

front of the rear axle & 0.9 m above ground level. The co
efficient of adhesion between tyres & road is 0.6 & the
brakes are applied to the rear wheels only. Calculate the
4 Application d
minimum distance in which the truck can be stopped on a
level road when travelling at 48 kmph? If the weight of the
truck is 8 tones, find the pressure on each wheel during
braking?
A single plate clutch is required to transmit 26.5 KW at
1600 rpm. The outer diameter of the plate is limited to 300
mm & intensity of the pressure between the plates is not
5 Application d
exceeds 68.5 KN/m2 Assuming uniform wear & co-
efficient of friction is µ is 0.3, show that the inner diameter
of the plate is approximately 90 mm.
An engine developing 45KW at 1000 rpm is fitted with a
cone clutch built inside a fly wheel. The cone has a face
angle of 12.5 0& maximum mean diameter of 500 mm.
6 The co-efficient of friction is 0.2. The normal pressure on Evaluation d
the clutch face is not to exceed 0.1 N/mm2.Determine 1.
The axial spring force necessary to engage to clutch.2.The
face width required.
A single block brake has the drum diameter 250 mm. The
angle of contact is 900 & co-efficient of friction between
7 the drum & the lining is 0.35. If the operating force of 650 Evaluation a
N is applied at the end of the lever, determine the torque
that may be transmitted by the block brake?
A truck has 3.15 m wheel base & the C.G. is 1.28 m in
front of the rear axle & 0.9 m above ground level. The co
efficient of adhesion between tyres & road is 0.6 & the
brakes are applied to the rear wheels only. Calculate the
8 Application d
minimum distance in which the truck can be stopped on a
level road when traveling at 48 kmph? If the weight of the
truck is 8 tones, find the pressure on each wheel during
braking?
A bicycle & rider of mass 100 kg are traveling at the rate
of 16 kmph on a level road. A brake is applied to the rear
wheel which is 0.9 m in diameter & this is the only
9 resistance acting. How far will the bicycle travel & how Application d
many turns will it make before it comes to rest. The
pressure applied on the brake is 100 N & the co-efficient
of friction is 0.2
A car is moving on a level road at a speed of 36 kmph. Its
C.G. lies at a distance of 0.6 m from the ground level. The
wheel base is 2.4 m & the distance of C.G from the rear
wheels is 0.9 m. Calculate the distance traveled by the car
10 Application d
before coming to rest when brakes are applied, 1.To the
rear wheels. 2. To the front wheels. 3. To all the four
wheels. The co-efficient of friction between the tyres & the
road surface is 0.45.

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Tutorials
1 Define coefficient of fluctuation of speed Knowledge a
2 Describe the function of flywheel Knowledge a
Write the formula for max fluctuation of energy in a
3 Knowledge a
flywheel
4 Define coefficient of fluctuation of Energy Knowledge a
5 Discuss the turning moment diagram Comprehension a
6 Define the Coefficient of steadiness Knowledge a
Explain precisely the uses of turning moment diagram of a 4
7 Knowledge a
stroke cycle internal combustion engine?
Describe the function of a fly wheel? How does it differ
8 Comprehension a
from that of a governor?
9 Describe the function of fly wheel in punching press Comprehension a
Draw the turning moment diagram of a single cylinder
10 Knowledge a
double acting steam engine?
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Tutorials
The turning moment diagram of a petrol engine is drawn to
the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm = 5 N-m; crank
angle, 1 mm = 10. The turning moment diagram repeats itself
at every half revolution of the engine & the areas above &
1 below the mean turning moment line taken in order are 295, Evaluation a
685,40, 340, 960,270 mm2 . The rotating parts are equivalent
to a mass of 36 kg at the radius of gyration of 150 mm.
Determine the co efficient of fluctuation of speed when the
engine runs at 1800 rpm.
The turning moment diagram of a multi cylinder engine is
drawn to the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm = 600
N-m vertically;& 1mm = 30 horizontally, The intercepted
areas between the output torque curve & the mean resistance
2 line, taken in order from one end, are as follows : +52 -124, Application a
+92, -140, + 85, -72 & +107 mm2. When the engine is
running at a speed of 600 rpm. If the total fluctuation of
speed is not to exceed± 1.5 % of the mean, Calculate the
necessary mass of the flywheel of radius 0.5 m.


The turning moment diagram of a multi cylinder engine is
drawn to the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm = 500
N-m vertically;& 1mm = 35 horizontally, The intercepted
areas between the output torque curve & the mean resistance
4 line, taken in order from one end, are as follows : +53,- Application a
125,+93, -142, + 86, -73 & +108 mm2. When the engine is
running at a speed of 600 rpm. If the total fluctuation of
speed is not to exceed± 1.6 % of the mean, Calculate the
necessary mass of the flywheel of radius 0.6 m.
The mass of the flywheel of an engine is 6.5 tones & the
radius of gyration is 1.8 m. It is found from the turning
5 moment diagram that the fluctuation of energy is 56 KN-m. Application a
If the mean speed of the engine is 120 rpm, Calculate the
maximum & minimum speeds
The equation of the turning moment curve of a three crank
engine is (5000 + 1500 sin 3θ ) N-m, where θ is the crank
angle in radians. the moment of inertia of the flywheel is
1000kg-m2 and the mean speed is 300r.p.m
6 Application a
calculate:1.power of the engine, and 2.the maximum
fluctuation of the speed of the flywheel in percentage when
(i) the resisting torque is constant, and(ii)the resisting torque
is (500+600 sin θ)N-m.

In a spring loaded governor of the Hartnell type, the mass of

each ball is 1kg, length of vertical arm of the bell crank lever
is 100 mm and that of the horizontal arm is 50 mm. The
distance of fulcrum of each bell crank lever is 80 mm from
the axis of rotation of the governor. The extreme radii of
8 rotation of the balls are 75 mm and 112.5mm. The maximum Application a
equilibrium speed is 5 per cent greater than the minimum
equilibrium speed which is 360 r.p.m. Calculate, neglecting
obliquity of arms, initial compression of the spring and
equilibrium speed corresponding to the radius of rotation of
100 mm.
A hart Nell governor having a central sleeve spring and two
right-angled bell crank levers moves between 290 r.p.m. and
310 r.p.m. for sleeve lift of 15 mm. The sleeve arms and ball
arms are 80 mm and 120 mm respectively. The leavers are
9 pivoted at 120 mm from the governor axis and mass of each Evaluation a
ball is 2.5 k. the ball arms are parallel to the governor axis at
the lowest equilibrium speed. Determine: 1. loads on the
spring at lowest and the highest equilibrium speeds, and 2.
stiffness of the spring.
The following particulars refer to a Wilson-Hart Nell
governor: Mass of each ball = 125 mm; maximum radius
=175 mm ; minimum speed = 240 r.p.m ; maximum speed =
250 r.p.m ; length of the ball arm of each bell crank
10 Application a
lever=150 mm; length of the sleeve arm bell crank lever =
100 mm; combined stiffness of the two ball springs = 0.2
kN/m. Calculate the equivalent stiffness of the auxiliary
spring referred to the sleeve.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Tutorials
State why is balancing of rotating parts necessary for high
1 Knowledge e
speed engines ?
Explain clearly the terms ‘static balancing’ and ‘dynamic
2 Knowledge e
balancing’. State the necessary conditions to achieve them.
Discuss how a single revolving mass is balanced by two
3 Comprehension e
masses revolving in different planes.
Explain the method of balancing of different masses
4 Knowledge e
revolving in the same plane.
Explain how the different masses rotating in different planes
5 Knowledge e
are balanced ?
6 Write a short note on primary and secondary balancing. Knowledge e
Explain why only a part of the unbalanced force due to
7 Knowledge e
reciprocating masses is balanced by revolving mass.
Describe are in-line engines ? How are they balanced ? It is
8 Knowledge e
possible to balance them completely ?

Explain the ‘direct and reverse crank’ method for

9 Knowledge e
determining unbalanced forces in radial engines.
10 Discuss the balancing of V-engines Comprehension e
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Tutorials
Four masses m1 ,m2, m3 and m4 are 200 kg , 300 kg , 240 kg ,
and 260 kg respectively. The corresponding radii of rotation
are 0.2m , 0.15m, 0.25m and 0.3m respectively and the angles
1 Application e
between successive masses are 45 degree, 35 degree and 135
degree. Calculate the postion and magnitude of the balance
mass required, if its radius of the rotation is 0.2m.
A,B,C and D are four masses carried by a rotating shaft at radii
100, 125, 200 and 150 mm respectively. The planes in which
the masses revolve are spaced 600 mm apart and the mass of
2 Application e
B,C and D are 10 kg, 5 kg and 4 kg respectively. Calculate the
required mass a and the relative angular settings of the four
masses so that the shaft shall be in complete balance.
A shaft has three eccentrics, each 75 mm diameter and 25 mm
thick, machined in one piece with the shaft. The central planes
of the eccentric are 60 mm apart. The distance of the centers
from the axis of rotation are 12 mm, 18 mm and 12 mm and
their angular positions are 120 degrees apart. The density of
3 Application e
metal is 7000 kg /m3. Calculate the amount of out-of-balance
force and couple at 600 r.p.m. If the shaft is balanced by adding
two masses at a radius 75 mm at distances of 100 mm from the
central plane of the middle eccentric, Calculate the amount of
masses and their angular positions.
A shaft carrier five masses A,B,C,D and E which revolves at
the same radius in planes which are equidistant from one
another. The magnitude of the masses in planes A, C and D are
4 50 kg, 40 kg and 80 kg respectively. The angle between A and Evaluation e
C and that between C and D is 135 degrees. Determine the
magnitude the masses in planes Band E and their position to
put the shaft in complete rotating balance.
A,B,C and D are four masses carried by a rotating shaft at radii
100 mm, 150 mm ,150mm and 200mm respectively. The
planes in which the masses rotate are spaced at 500mm apart
5 and the magnitude of the masses B,C and D are 9kg,5 kg and 4 Application e
kg respectively. Calculate the required mass A and the relative
angular settings for the four masses so that the shaft shall in
complete balance.

In an in-line six cylinder engine a working on two stroke cycle,

the cylinder center lines are spaced at 600 mm. in end view, the
crank shaft 60 degree apart and in the order 1-4-5-2-3-6. The
stroke of each piston is 400 mm and the connecting rod length
6 is 1 meter. The mass of the reciprocating parts is 200 kg per Application e
cylinder and that of rotating parts 100 kg per crank .The engine
rotates at 300 r.p.m. examine the engine for the balance of
primary and secondary forces and couple. Calculate the
maximum unbalanced forces and couples.
A four cylinder vertical engine has cranks 150 mm long. The
planes of rotation of the first, second and fourth cranks are 400
mm, 200 mm and 200 mm respectively from the third crank
and their reciprocating masses are 50 kg, 60 kg and 50 kg
7 Application e
respectively. Calculate the mass of the reciprocating parts for
the third cylinder and the relative angular positions of the
cranks in order that the engine may be in complete primary
balance.
A four crank engine has the two outer cranks set at 120° to each
other, and their reciprocating masses are each 400 kg. The
distance between the planes of rotation of adjacent cranks are
450 mm, 750 mm and 600 mm. If the engine is to be in
8 complete primary balance, find the reciprocating mass and the Application e
relative angular position for each of the inner cranks. If the
length of each crank is 300 mm, the length of each connecting
rod is 1.2 m and the speed of rotation is 240 r.p.m., Calculate
the maximum secondary unbalanced force ?
The firing order in a 6 cylinder vertical four stroke in-line
engine is 1-4-2-6-3-5. The piston stroke is 100 mm and the
length of each connecting rod is 200 mm. The pitch distances
between the cylinder centre lines are 100 mm, 100 mm, 150
9 mm, 100 mm, and 100 mm respectively. The reciprocating Evaluation e
mass per cylinder is 1 kg and the engine runs at 3000 r.p.m.
Determine the out-of-balance primary and secondary forces and
couples on this engine, taking a plane midway between the
cylinder 3 and 4 as the reference plane.
The three cylinders of an air compressor have their axes 120° to
one another, and their connecting rods are coupled to a single
crank. The stroke is 100 mm and the length of each connecting
rod is 150 mm. The mass of the reciprocating parts per cylinder
10 Knowledge e
is 1.5 kg. Find the maximum primary and secondary forces
acting on the frame of the compressor when running at 3000
r.p.m. Describe clearly a method by which such forces may be
balanced.

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
1 Discuss the causes and effects of vibrations ? Comprehension a
Define, in short, free vibrations, forced vibrations and damped
2 Knowledge a
vibrations.
Discuss briefly with neat sketches the longitudinal, transverse
3 Comprehension a
and torsional free vibrations.
Derive an expression for the natural frequency of free
4 Synthesis a
transverse and longitudinal vibrations by equilibrium method.
Discuss the effect of inertia of the shaft in longitudinal and
5 Comprehension a
transverse vibrations.
6 Synthesis a
transverse vibrations for a simply supported
7 Derive an expression for the amplitude of forced vibrations. Synthesis a
8 Synthesis a
transverse vibrations for a beam fixed at
Explain the terms ‘under damping, critical damping’ and ‘over
9 damping’ Knowledge a

transverse vibrations for a simply supported beam carrying a
10 Synthesis a
number of point loads, by (a) Energy method and (b)
Dunkerley’s method.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
A beam of length 10 m carries two loads of mass 200 kg at
distances of 3 m from each end together with a central load of
1 mass 1000 kg. Calculate the frequency of transverse Application a
vibrations. Neglect the mass of the beam and take I = 109
mm4 and E = 205×103 N/mm2.
A steel bar 25 mm wide and 50 mm deep is freely supported at
two points 1 m apart and carries amass of 200 kg in the middle
of the bar. Neglecting the mass of the bar, Calculate the
2 Application a
frequency of transverse vibration .If an additional mass of 200
kg is distributed uniformly over the length of the shaft, what
will be the frequency of vibration ? Take E = 200 GN/m2.

A vertical shaft 25 mm diameter and 0.75 m long is mounted

in long bearings and carries a pulley of mass 10 kg midway
between the bearings. The centre of pulley is 0.5 mm from the
Application a
3 axis of theshaft. Calculate (a) the whirling speed, and (b) the
bending stress in the shaft, when it is rotating at 1700r.p.m.
Neglect the mass of the shaft and E = 200 GN/m2.
A vibrating system consists of a mass of 8 kg, spring of
stiffness 5.6 N/mm and a dashpot of damping coefficient of 40
4 Application a
N/m/s. Calculate (a) damping factor, (b) logarithmic
decrement, and (c) ratio of the two consecutive amplitudes.
A mass of 5 kg is supported by a spring of stiffness 5 kN/m. In
addition, the motion of mass by a damper whose resistance is
proportional to velocity. The amplitude of vibration reduces to
5 Evaluation a
1/15th of the initial amplitude in four complete cycles.
Determine the damping force per unit velocity and the ratio of
the frequencies of the damped and undamped vibrations.
A shaft 50 mm diameter and 3 meters long is simply
supported at the ends and carries three loads of 1000 N, and
6 1500 N and 750 N at 1 m, 2 m and 2.5 m from the left support. Application a
The young’s modulus for shaft material is 200 GN/m2.
Calculate the frequency of transverse vibration.
A motor drives a centrifugal pump through gearing the pump
speed being one-third that of the motor. The shaft from the
motor to the pinion is 60 mm diameter and 300 mm long .The
movement of inertia of the motor is 400 kg-m2 the impeller
7 shaft is 100 mm diameter 600 mm long .The movement of Evaluation a
inertia of the impeller is 1500 kg –m2 neglecting inertia of the
gears and shaft,determine the frequency of torsional vibration
of the system the modulus of rigidity of the shaft material is
80 GN /m2.
An electric motor is to drive centrifuge a running at four
times the motor speed through a spur gear and pinion .The
shaft from the motor to the gear wheel is 54 mm diameter and
8 L meter long ;the shaft from the pinion to the centrifuge is 45 Application a
mm diameter and 400 mm long .The masses and radii of
gyration of motor and centrifuge are respectively 37.5 kg,100
mm; 30 kg and 140 mm. Calculate the speed of the motor.
A shaft of 100 mm diameter and 1 meter long is fixed at one
end and other end carries a flywheel of masses one ton
9 .The radius of gyration of the flywheel is 0.5m. Calculate the Application a
frequency of torsional vibrations if the modulus of rigidity for
the shaft materials 80GN/m2.
The flywheel of an engine driving a dynamo as a mass of one

10 Application a
eighty kgs and a radius of gyration of 30 mm .The shaft at the

flywheel end as an effective length of 250mm is 50mm

diameter .The armature mass is 120kg and it radius of gyration
is 22.5mm the dynamo shaft is 43mm diameter and 200mm
effective length calculate the position of node and frequency
of trosional oscillation,C=83 KN/mm2
9. 14 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Assignments
1 Apply gyroscopic principle to aircrafts. Application b
Explain what do you understand by static equilibrium of a
2 Knowledge c
body?
Discuss the effect of reactive gyroscopic couple on an
3 aeroplane when taking left turn and the propeller rotating Comprehension b
clock wise
Discuss the effect of reactive gyroscopic couple on a naval
4 Comprehension b
ship when taking left turn and the rotor rotating clock wise
Explain about angle of heel in stability of two wheel
5 Knowledge b
vehicle
6 Briefly describe about piston effort Knowledge c
7 Differentiate between pitching and rolling of naval ship Analysis b
Discuss the conditions for a body to be in equilibrium
8 Comprehension c
under the action of two force and three forces?
Discuss the effect of reactive gyroscopic couple when a
9 Comprehension b
naval ship is rolling?
1010. Define the pitching of a naval ship. Knowledge b
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Assignments
A boat is propelled by a steam turbine. The moment of
inertia of the rotor shaft and propeller is 60 kg-m2. The
turbine runs at 3000rpm in clockwise direction looking
1 from the front .The boat describes a circular path towards Application b
the right making one revolution in 10 seconds. Calculate
the magnitude and direction of the couple acting on boat
hull
An Aeroplane makes a complete half circle radius towards
left when flying at 210 km/hr. The rotary engine and the
propeller of the plane is of 50 kg mass having a radius of
2 Application b
gyration of 300mm.The engine rotates at 2400 rpm
clockwise as seen from the rear. Calculate the Gyroscopic
couple on the aircraft and its effect on the plane.
3 The moment of inertia of each wheel of a motorcycle is Application b

1.5kg-m2.The rotating parts of the engine of the motorcycle

have moment of inertia of 0.28kg-m2.The speed of the
engine is six times the speed of the wheels and is in same
direction. The mass of the motorcycle is 250 kg and its
centre of gravity is 0.6m above the ground level. Calculate
the angle of Wheel if the motor cycle is travelling at
45km/hr and is taking a turn of 30m radius. The Wheel
diameter is 0.6m.
A Racing car of mass 2000kg has a wheel base of 2m and
track width of 1m.The C.G. lies midway between the front
and rear axles and is 0.4m above the ground. The engine of
the car has a flywheel rotating in a clockwise direction
when seen from the front at 6000 rpm. The moment of
4 Application b
inertia of the flywheel is 50 kg-m2.If the car takes a curve
of 15m radius towards right, while running at 45 km/hr ,
Calculate the reaction between the wheels and the ground
considering the gyroscopic and centrifugal effect of the fly
wheel and the weight of the car respectively.
The mass of turbine rotor of a ship is 20tonnes and has a
radius of gyration 0.60 m. Its speed is 2000rpm. The ship
pitches 60 above and 60 below the horizontal position. A
complete oscillation takes 30 seconds and motion is simple
5 Evaluation b
harmonic. Determine 1.Maximum gyroscopic couple and
2. The direction in which the bow will tend to turn when
rising, if the rotation of the rotor is clockwise when looking
from the left.
Explain the application of gyroscopic principles to
6 Knowledge b
aircrafts.
What do you understand by gyroscopic couple? Derive the Knowledge &
7 b
formula for its magnitude. Synthesis
Explain what do you understand by static equilibrium of a
8 Knowledge c
body? Also explain the equilibrium of four force members.
Explain the effect of the gyroscopic couple on the reaction
9 Knowledge b
of the 4 wheels of a vehicle negotiating a curve.
10. A car weighs 20KN. It has a wheel base of 2m, Track
width 1m & Height of C.G. 300 mm above the ground
level & lies midway between the front & rear axle. The
engine flywheel rotates at 3000 rpm clockwise when
viewed from the front. The moment of inertia of the fly
10 Application b
wheel is 4kg-m² & MOI of each wheel is 3 kg-m²,
Calculate the reactions between the wheels & the ground
when car takes the curve of 15m radius towards right at 30
km/hr, taking into consideration the gyroscopic & the
centrifugal effects. Each wheel radius is 400mm

Blooms
UNIT-II
Assignments
Derive expression for efficiency of screw jack terms of
1 Synthesis d
mechanical advantage and velocity ratio
2 Define is friction circle. Knowledge d
Discuss the two assumptions for uniform intensity of pressure
3 or uniform rate of wear, you make use of in designing friction Comprehension d
clutch & why?
4 Describe the function of brake. Knowledge d
5 Discuss the various types of mechanical brakes Comprehension d
Discuss the leading and trailing shoes of a internal expanding
6 Comprehension d
brakes
7 Dicuss the types of brakes used in locomotives. Comprehension d
Discuss what is meant by self locking and self energised
8 Comprehension d
brake
9 Explain the function of Absorption type Dynamometer Knowledge d
10 Discuss the varies types of transmission Dynamometers Comprehension d
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-II
Assignments
Describe with neat sketch working of a single plate friction
1 Knowledge d
clutch?
Derive a formula for the maximum torque transmitted by a
2 single plate clutch of external & internal radii is r1 & r2, if the Synthesis d
limiting co-efficient of friction is µ & the axial spring load W.
3 Explain the working of a centrifugal clutch with a neat sketch Knowledge d
4 Explain about cone clutch with neat sketch? Knowledge d
5 With neat sketch explain the Rope Brake Dynamometer? Knowledge d
6 Explain about Band Brake& derive the expression for torque? Knowledge d
7 Explain the function of Absorption type Dynamometer? Knowledge d
An engine developing 45KW at 1000 rpm is fitted with a cone
clutch built inside a fly wheel. The cone has a face angle of
12.5 0& maximum mean diameter of 500 mm. The co-
8 Evaluation d
efficient of friction is 0.2. The normal pressure on the clutch
face is not to exceed 0.1 N/mm2.Determine
the torque transmitted.

A single block brake has the drum diameter 250 mm. The
angle of contact is 900 & co-efficient of friction between the
9 drum & the lining is 0.35. If the operating force of 650 N is Evaluation d
applied at the end of the lever, determine the torque that may
be transmitted by the block brake?
A car engine has its rated output of 10kW. Maximum torque
developed is 100Nm. The clutch used is of single plate type
having two active surfaces. Axial pressure is not to exceed
10 0.85 bar. External diameter of the friction plate is 1.25 times Evaluation d
the internal diameter. Determine the dimensions of the
friction plate and the axial force exerted by the springs.
Assume uniform wear and coefficient of friction as O.3.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Assignments
Draw the turning moment diagram of a single cylinder double
1 Knowledge a
acting steam engine.
Explain precisely the uses of turning moment diagram of
2 Knowledge a
reciprocating engines.
Explain the turning moment diagram of a four stroke cycle
3 Knowledge a
internal combustion engine.
Discuss the turning moment diagram of a multicylinder
4 Comprehension a
engine.
Explain the terms ‘fluctuation of energy’ and ‘fluctuation of
5 Knowledge a
speed’ as applied to flywheels.
Define the terms ‘coefficient of fluctuation of energy’ and
6 Knowledge a
‘coefficient of fluctuation of speed’, in the case of flywheels.
Describe the function of a flywheel? How does it differ from
7 Knowledge a,e
that of a governor?
Draw the turning moment diagram of a single cylinder double
8 Knowledge a
acting steam engine.
Show that the sensitiveness of a Proell governor is greater
9 Application e
than that of a Porter governor.
Write short note on ‘coefficient of insensitiveness’ of
10 Knowledge e
governors.

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Assignments
The mass of the flywheel of an engine is 6.5 tones & the
radius of gyration is 1.8 m. It is found from the turning
1 moment diagram that the fluctuation of energy is 56 KN-m. If Application a
the mean speed of the engine is 120 rpm, Calculate the
maximum & minimum speeds
A punching machine carries out 6 holes per minute. Each
hole of 40 mm diameter in 35 mm thick plate requires 8N-m
of energy/mm2 of the sheared area. The punch has a stroke of
4 95 mm. Find the power of the motor required if the mean Evaluation a
speed of the fly wheel is 20 m/s. If total fluctuation of speed is
ot to exceed 3% of the mean speed. Determine the mass of the
fly wheel
A three cylinder single acting engine has its cranks set equally
at 120° and it runs at 600 r.p.m. The torque-crank angle
diagram for each cycle is a triangle for the power stroke with
a maximum torque of 90 N-m at 60° from dead centre of
corresponding crank. The torque on the return stroke is
5 sensibly zero. Determine : 1. power developed. 2. coefficient Evaluation e
of fluctuation of speed, if the mass of the flywheel is 12 kg
and has a radius of gyration of 80 mm, 3. coefficient of
fluctuation
of energy, and 4. maximum angular acceleration of the
flywheel

A certain machine requires a torque of (5000 + 500 sin θ ) N-

m to drive it, where θ is the angle of rotation of shaft
measured from certain datum. The machine is directly
coupled to an engine which produces a torque of (5000 + 600
sin 2θ) N-m. The flywheel and the other rotating parts
6 attached to the engine has a mass of 500 kg at a radius of Application a
gyration of 0.4 m. If the mean speed is 150 r.p.m., Calculate :
1. the fluctuation of energy, 2. the total percentage fluctuation
of speed, and 3. the maximum and minimum angular
acceleration of the flywheel and the corresponding shaft
position.
A single cylinder double acting steam engine develops 150
kW at a mean speed of 80 r.p.m. The coefficient of fluctuation
of energy is 0.1 and the fluctuation of speed is ± 2% of mean
speed. If the mean diameter of the flywheel rim is 2 metre and
7 Application a
the hub and spokes provide 5% of the rotational inertia of the
flywheel, Calculate the mass and cross-sectional area of the
flywheel rim. Assume the density of the flywheel material
(which is cast iron) as 7200 kg/m3.
A machine punching 38 mm holes in 32 mm thick plate
requires 7 N-m of energy per sq. mm of sheared area, and
punches one hole in every 10 seconds. Calculate the power of
the motor required. The mean speed of the flywheel is 25
8 metres per second. The punch has a stroke of 100 mm. Application a
Calculate the mass of the flywheel required, if the total
fluctuation of speed is not to exceed 3% of the mean speed.
Assume that the motor supplies energy to the machine at
uniform rate.
A vertical double acting steam engine develops 75 kW at 250
r.p.m. The maximum fluctuation of energy is 30 per cent of
the work done per stroke. The maximum and minimum
9 Application a
speeds are not to vary more than 1 per cent on either side of
the mean speed. Calculate the mass of the flywheel required,
if the radius of gyration is 0.6 m.
A single cylinder double acting steam engine delivers 185 kW
at 100 r.p.m. The maximum fluctuation of energy per
revolution is 15 per cent of the energy developed per
revolution. The speed variation is limited to 1 per cent either
10 Application a
way from the mean. The mean diameter of the rim is 2.4 m.
Calculate the mass and cross-sectional dimensions of the
flywheel rim when width of rim is twice the thickness. The
density of flywheel material is 7200 kg/m3

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Assignments
1 Comprehension e
masses revolving in different planes.
2 Write a short note on primary and secondary balancing. Knowledge e
Derive the following expressions, for an uncoupled two
cylinder locomotive engine :
3 Synthesis e
(a) Variation is tractive force ; (b) Swaying couple ; and (c)
Hammer blow.
Explain the method of balancing of different masses
4 Knowledge e
revolving in the same plane.
Explain why is balancing of rotating parts necessary for high
5 Knowledge e
speed engines ?
Explain clearly the terms ‘static balancing’ and ‘dynamic
6 Knowledge e
balancing’. State the necessary conditions to achieve them.
7 Comprehension e
masses revolving in same plane
8 Explain clearly ‘dynamic balancing’ Knowledge e
Derive the expressions for Swaying couple for an uncoupled
9 Synthesis e
two cylinder locomotive engine
10 Write a short note on secondary balancing. Knowledge e
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Assignments
A Porter governor has equal arms each 250 mm long and
pivoted on the axis of rotation. Each ball has a mass of 5 kg
and the mass of the central load on the sleeve is 25 kg. The
1 radius of rotation of the ball is 150 mm when the governor Application e
begins to lift and 200 mm when the governor is at maximum
speed. Calculate the minimum and maximum speeds and
range of speed of the governor.
A loaded Porter governor has four links each 250 mm long,
two revolving masses each of 3 kg and a central dead weight
of mass 20 kg. All the links are attached to respective sleeves
2 at radial distances of 40 mm from the axis of rotation. The Evaluation e
masses revolve at a radius of 150 mm at minimum speed and
at a radius of 200 mm at maximum speed. Determine the
range of speed.

A Proell governor has equal arms of length 300 mm. The

upper and lower ends of the arms are pivoted on the axis of
the governor. The extension arms of the lower links are each
3 80 mm long and parallel to the axis when the radii of rotation Evaluation e
of the balls are 150 mm and 200 mm. The mass of each ball is
10 kg and the mass of the central load is 100 kg. Determine
the range of speed of the governor.
A Hartnell governor having a central sleeve spring and two
right-angled bell crank levers moves between 290 r.p.m. and
310 r.p.m. for a sleeve lift of 15mm. The sleeve arms and the
ball arms are 80 mm and 120 mm respectively. The levers are
4 pivoted at 120 mm from the governor axis and mass of each Evaluation e
ball is 2.5 kg. The ball arms are parallel to the governor axis
at the lowest equilibrium speed. Determine : 1. loads on the
spring at the lowest and the highest equilibrium speeds, and 2.
stiffness of the spring.
The upper arms of a Porter governor has lengths 350 mm and
are pivoted on the axis of rotation. The lower arms has lengths
300 mm and are attached to the sleeve at a distance of 40 mm
5 from the axis. Each ball has a mass of 4 kg and mass on the Evaluation e
sleeve is 45 kg. Determine the equilibrium speed for a radius
of rotation of 200 mm and find also the effort and power of
the governor for 1 per cent speed change.
The radius of rotation of the balls of a Hartnell governor is 80
mm at the minimum speed of 300 r.p.m. Neglecting gravity
effect, determine the speed after the sleeve has lifted by 60
mm. Also determine the initial compression of the spring, the
6 Evaluation e
governor effort and the power. The particulars of the
governor are given below: Length of ball arm = 150mm ;
length of sleeve arm = 100mm ; mass of each ball = 4 kg ; and
stiffness of the spring = 25 N/mm.
In a Porter governor, the mass of the central load is 18 kg and
the mass of each ball is 2 kg. The top arms are 250 mm while
the bottom arms are each 300 mm long. The friction of the
7 Application e
sleeve is 14 N. If the top arms make 45° with the axis of
rotation in the equilibrium position, calculate the range of
speed of the governor in that position.
A spring controlled governor of the Hartnell type with a
central spring under compression has balls each of mass 2 kg.
The ball and sleeve arms of the bell crank levers are
respectively 100 mm and 60 mm long and are at right angles.
In the lowest position of the governor sleeve, the radius of
8 Evaluation e
rotation of the balls is 80 mm and the ball arms are parallel to
the governor axis. Determine the initial load on the spring in
order that the sleeve may begin to lift at 300 r.p.m. If the
stiffness of the spring is 30 kN/m, what is the equilibrium
speed corresponding to a sleeve lift of 10 mm?

The spring controlled governor of the Hartung type has two

rotating masses each of 2.5 kg and the limits of their radius of
rotation are 100 mm and 125 mm. The each mass is directly
controlled by a spring attached to it and to the inner casing of
the governor as shown in Fig 18.26 (a). The stiffness of the
spring is 8 kN/m and the force on each spring, when the
9 Evaluation e
masses are in their mid-position, is 320 N. In addition, there is
an equivalent constant inward radial force of 80 N acting on
each revolving mass in order to allow for the dead weight of
the mechanism. Neglecting friction, determine the range of
speed of the hartung governor.
the governor.
In a spring controlled governor, the radial force acting on the
balls was 4500 N when the centre of balls was 200 mm from
the axis and 7500 N when at 300 mm. Assuming that the
force varies directly as the radius, find the radius of the ball
10 Evaluation e
path when the governor runs at 270 r.p.m. Also determine the
alteration in spring load is required in order to make the
governor isochronous and the speed at which it would then
run. The mass of each ball is 30 kg.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
Assignments
1 Comprehension a
transverse vibrations
2 transverse vibrations for a beam fixed at both ends and Synthesis a
carrying a uniformly distributed mass of m kg per unit length.
3 Knowledge a
damping’
4 Derive an expression for the amplitude of forced vibrations Synthesis a
5 Explain what do you understand by transmissibility ? Knowledge a
6 Explain the term ‘dynamic magnifier’. Knowledge a
7 Comprehension a
transverse vibrations
8 Explain the term ‘whirling speed’ or ‘critical speed’ of a shaft. Knowledge a
Discuss briefly with neat sketches the longitudinal, transverse
9 Comprehension a
and torsional free vibrations.
10 Knowledge a
damping’

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
Assignments
An inside cylinder locomotive has its cylinder centre lines 0.7 m apart
and has a stroke of 0.6 m. The rotating masses per cylinder are
equivalent to 150 kg at the crank pin, and the reciprocating masses
per cylinder to 180 kg. The wheel centre lines are 1.5 m apart. The
cranks are at right angles. The whole of the rotating and 2/3 of the
1 Evaluation a
reciprocating masses are to be balanced by masses placed at a radius
of 0.6 m. Determine the magnitude and direction of the balancing
masses. Calculate the fluctuation in rail pressure under one wheel,
variation of tractive effort and the magnitude of swaying couple at a
crank speed of 300 r.p.m.
A four cylinder vertical engine has cranks 150 mm long. The planes
of rotation of the first, second and fourth cranks are 400 mm, 200 mm
and 200 mm respectively from the third crank and their reciprocating
2 masses are 50 kg, 60 kg and 50 kg respectively. Calculate the mass of Application a
the reciprocating parts for the third cylinder and the relative angular
positions of the cranks in order that the engine may be in complete
primary balance.
The following data apply to an outside cylinder uncoupled
locomotive : Mass of rotating parts per cylinder = 360 kg ; Mass of
reciprocating parts per cylinder = 300 kg ; Angle between cranks =
90° ; Crank radius = 0.3 m ; Cylinder centres = 1.75 m ; Radius of
balance masses = 0.75 m ; Wheel centres = 1.45 m. If whole of the
3 Application a
rotating and two-thirds of reciprocating parts are to be balanced in
planes of the driving wheels, Calculate: 1. Magnitude and angular
positions of balance masses, 2. Speed in kilometres per hour at which
the wheel will lift off the rails when the load on each driving wheel is
30 kN and the diameter of tread of driving wheels is 1.8 m.
A four cylinder vertical engine has cranks 150 mm long. The planes
of rotation of the first, second and fourth cranks are 400 mm, 200 mm
and 200 mm respectively from the third crank and their reciprocating
4 masses are 50 kg, 60 kg and 50 kg respectively. Calculate the mass of Application a
the reciprocating parts for the third cylinder and the relative angular
positions of the cranks in order that the engine may be in complete
primary balance.
A five cylinder in-line engine running at 750 r.p.m. has
successive cranks 144° apart, the distance between the
cylinder centre lines being 375 mm. The piston stroke is 225
mm and the ratio of the connecting rod to the crank is 4.
5 Application a
Examine the engine for balance of primary and secondary
forces and couples. Calculate the maximum values of these
and the position of the central crank at which these
maximum values occur. The mass for each cylinder is 15 kg.

The three cylinders of an air compressor have their axes

120° to one another, and their connecting rods are coupled to
a single crank. The stroke is 100 mm and the length of each
connecting rod is 150 mm. The mass of the reciprocating
6 Evaluation a
parts per cylinder is 1.5 kg. Determine the maximum
primary and secondary forces acting on the frame of the
compressor when running at 3000 r.p.m. Describe clearly a
method by which such forces may be balanced.
A shaft carries five masses A, B, C, D and E which revolve
at the same radius in planes which are equidistant from one
another. The magnitude of the masses in planes A, C and D
7 are 50 kg, 40 kg and 80 kg respectively. The angle between Evaluation a
A and C is 90° and that between C and D is 135°.Determine
the magnitude of the masses in planes B and E and their
positions to put the shaft in complete rotating balance.
A, B, C and D are four masses carried by a rotating shaft at
radii 100 mm, 150 mm, 150 mm and
200 mm respectively. The planes in which the masses rotate
are spaced at 500 mm apart and the
8 Application a
magnitude of the masses B, C and D are 9 kg, 5 kg and 4 kg
respectively. Calculate the required mass A
and the relative angular settings of the four masses so that
the shaft shall be in complete balance.
A single cylinder engine runs at 250 r.p.m. and has a stroke
of 180 mm. The reciprocating parts has a mass of 120 kg
and the revolving parts are equivalent to a mass of 70 kg at a
radius of 90 mm. A mass is placed opposite to the crank at a
radius of 150 mm to balance the whole of the revolving
9 Evaluation a
mass and two-thirds of the reciprocating mass. Determine
the magnitude of the balancing mass and the resultant
residual unbalance force when the crank has turned 30° from
the inner dead centre,
neglect the obliquity of the connecting rod.
A four cylinder inline marine oil engine has cranks at
angular displacement of 90°. The outer
cranks are 3 m apart and inner cranks are 1.2 m apart. The
inner cranks are placed symmetrically
between the outer cranks. The length of each crank is 450
10 mm. If the engine runs at 90 r.p.m. and Evaluation a
the mass of reciprocating parts for each cylinder is 900 kg,
find the firing order of the cylinders for
the best primary balancing force of reciprocating masses.
Determine the maximum unbalanced primary couple for the
best arrangement.

10.0 MACHINE TOOLS (A10322)

Course Code A10322
Course Title MACHINE TOOLS
Course Structure
3 1 - 3
Course Coordinator Dr. J. Krishna Raj - Professor
Team of Instructors Mr.K.Shravan Kumar, Mr. B.L.N. Krishna Sai- Asst.Professor
COURSE OVERVIEW:
Machining is any process in which a cutting tool is used to remove small chips of material from
the workpiece (the workpiece is often called the "work"). To perform the operation, relative
motion is required between the tool and the work. This relative motion is achieved in most
machining operation by means of a primary motion, called "cutting speed" and a secondary
motion called "feed". The shape of the tool and its penetration into the work surface, combined
with these motions, produce the desired shape of the resulting work surface.
10.2 PREREQUISITES:
Engineering Workshop, Production
UG 3 4 Technology, Metallurgy & Materials
Science

Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks
There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm examination
consists of one objective paper, one subjective paper and four
assignments. The objective
paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10 marks, with
duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for objective and 60
minutes for subjective paper).
Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice questions, fill-
in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper contains of 4 full
questions (one from each unit) of
which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each question carrying 75 100
5 marks. First midterm examination shall be conducted for 2.5 units
of syllabus and second
midterm examination shall be conducted for another 2.5 units. 5
marks are allocated for Assignments. First two assignments should
be submitted before the
conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments should be
submitted before the conduct of the second mid. The total marks
secured by the student in each midterm examination are evaluated
for 25 marks, and the average of the two midterm examinations
shall be taken as the final marks secured by each candidate.


S. No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment method (s)
Apply the basic concept of parameters in the
a metal cutting operations, tool material, forces, Practical’s/Mini & Main Projects
and merchantability aspects.
Differentiate various cutting tool materials and
b cutting fluid properties and the working of a Practical’s/Mini & Main Projects
production lathe.
Recognize the principle and importance of
operations like slots, keyways and splins by
c shaper, slotter and planer produced by Practical’s/Mini & Main Projects
combination of reciprocating and translating
movements.
Ability to Understand the different types of
d holes preparation by drilling and boring Practical’s/Mini & Main Projects
machines.
Ability to Understand the machining and
finishing processes like milling, grinding,
e honing, broaching operations by combination of Practical’s/Mini & Main Projects
reciprocating , translating and elevating
movements.

2 I Assignment 5
4 II Assignment 5
MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2 MID’s
Total 75

10.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES AND OUTCOMES MAPPING TO BLOOMS LEVEL
S.No Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms Level

I.identifyand Calculate analytically of
the basic parameters in the metal a.Apply the basic concept of
cutting operations, differentiate parameters in the metal cutting
various types of chips, various cutting operations, Differentiate and
1 fluids and their application methods, utilize various tool materials and BL 1
forces and other machining determine or estimate the forces,
parameter, tool wear and tool life and cutting fluid properties and
the variables associated with merchantability aspects.
manufacturing.
II.Understand the principle and
classify of mechanism in lathe
b.Apply the principle and
operations, its many varieties and
importance of mechanisms in
basic structure of lathe produced by
lathe operations and utilize the
2 combination of rotary and translating BL 2
various attachments for create
movements by choose various aids
modify objects replace to
that are used to locate and support
exsiting designs for products
work pieces to operate on lathe
attachments
III.Classify and differentiate
c.Recognize the principle and
between various shpaers, slotting, and importance of operations, to
planer machines to create operations generate the slots, keyways and
3 like slots, keyways and splins by splins by shaper, slotter and BL 3
shaper, slotter and planer produced by planer produced by combination
combination of reciprocating and of reciprocating and translating
translating movements. movements.
d.Ability to dicuss the use of
IV.Understand the illustrate and
compare different types of holes
4 generate the various types of holes by BL 4
preparation by drilling and boring
drilling and boring machines.
machines.
V.Understand and list out the
e.Ability to identify the
machining and finishing processes
supporting of finishing process
like milling, grinding, honing,
5 for machining process and to BL 5
broaching operations by combination
create slots, keyways gears and
of reciprocating , translating and
machine bed guideways .
elevating movements
V.Understand and list out the super
finishing processes like honing, f.Ability to identify the
6 broaching operations by combination supporting of super finishing BL 6
of reciprocating , translating and process for machining process
elevating movements
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)


Proficiency
Program Outcomes Level Blooms Level
assessed by
An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematical Applying and

A H Assignment
foundations and engineering theory in the modeling design. Evaluating
Assigning
An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to
B H Exercises Analyzing, Creating
analyze the concept.
An ability to design , implement, process the component to

Assigning
meet desired needs, within realistic constraints such as
C S Exercises Analyzing
economic, environmental, social, political, health and safety,
manufacturability, and sustainability (Creative Skills)
An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary teams Applying,
D N Mini Projects
(team work)
An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate and use

Analyzing and
E the appropriate computing and engineering requirements for H Mini Projects
Evaluating
obtaining its solution (engineering problem solving skills)
Assigning
An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and
F N Exercises Understanding
social issues and responsibilities (professional integrity)
An ability to communicate effectively both in writing and
G N ---
orally (speaking / writing skills)
The broad education necessary to analyze the local and global
impact of computing and engineering solutions on
H N ---
individuals, organizations, and society (engineering impact
assessment skills)
Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in Remembering and
I continuing professional development and life-long learning H Discussions Applying,
(continuing education awareness)
J A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social awareness) N ---
An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools
Assigning Applying and
K necessary for computing and engineering practice (practical S
Exercises Analyzing
engineering analysis skills)
An ability to apply design and development principles in the Understanding
L construction of mechanical engineering systems of varying S Discussions Applying
complexity And Creating
Remembering And
M competitive examinations that offer challenging and S Discussions
Creating
rewarding careers in computing (successful career and

10.7 SYLLABUS
UNIT – I
Elementary treatment of metal cutting theory – Element of cutting process – Geometry of single
point tool and angles chip formation and types of chips – built up edge and its effects chip
breakers. Mechanics of orthogonal cutting – Merchant’s Force diagram, cutting forces – cutting
speeds, feed, depth of cut, tool life, coolants, mach inability – Tool materials.
UNIT – II
Engine lathe – Principle of working, specification of lathe – types of lathe – work & tool holding
devices-Taper turning thread, turning – for Lathes and attachments. Turret and capstan lathes –
Principal features of automatic lathes – classification – Single spindle and multi-spindle
automatic lathes – tool layout
UNIT – III
Shaping slotting and planing machines – Principles of working – Principal parts – specification
classification, operations performed. Kinematic scheme of the shaping slotting and planning
machines, machining time calculations.
Drilling and Boring Machines – Principles of working, specifications, types, operations
performed – tool holding devices – twist drill – Boring machines – Fine boring machines – Jig
Boring machine. Deep hole drilling machine. Kinematics scheme of the drilling and boring
machines.
UNIT – IV
Milling machine – Principles of working – specifications – classifications of milling machines –
Principal features of horizontal, vertical and universal milling machines – machining operations
Types geometry of milling cutters – milling cutters – methods of indexing – Accessories to
milling machines, kinematic scheme of milling cutters – milling cutters – methods of indexing.
Lapping, honing and broaching machines – comparison to grinding – lapping and honing.
Kinematics scheme of Lapping, Honing and Broaching machines. Constructional features of
speed and feed Units, machining time calculations
UNIT –V
Grinding machine – Fundamentals – Theory of grinding – classification of grinding machine –
cylindrical and surface grinding machine – Tool and cutter grinding machine – special types of
grinding machines – Different types of abrasives – bonds specification of a grinding wheel and
selection of a grinding wheel Kinematic scheme of grinding machines.
TEXT BOOKS
1.Production Technology by R.K. Jain and S.C. Gupta.
2.Production Technology by H.M.T. (Hindustan Machine Tools).
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.Machine Tools – C.Elanchezhian and M. Vijayan / Anuradha Agencies Publishers.
2.Workshop Technology – B.S.Raghu Vamshi – Vol II
3.Principles of machine Tools/ Bhattacharya A and Sen.G.C./New central Book Agency.

10.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning Outcomes.
Course Learning Course

Lecture Bloom Outcomes Learnin
Referenc
. s g Topics to be covered
e
No. Levels Outcom
es
At the end of the session
the student will be able to
describe the main role of
L1
machine tools in modern
industry Introduction, Importance
of machine tools in the
a,b,c,d,
1 At the end of the session modern industry T1&R1
e,f
the student will be able to http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112
improve the productivity in 105126/1-41
L4 manufacturing field by
proper utilization of
machines, its act as a main
role to create new products
L4
compare the methods of
metal cutting .
Methods of metal cutting
2 a http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T1&R1
105126/1-42 and 43
justify various types of
L5
forces encounted during
chipformation by choosing
of methods of metal cutting
L1
list out main Elements
Elements of machining
used in machining process
process
3 By end of the session a T1&R1
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112
student able by arrangeing
105126/1-44
L6 in order of machining
elements to minimize the
machine leading time
L4 comparision between
orthogonal and oblique
Differences between
cutting
orthogonal and oblique
By end of the session
4 a cutting T1&R1
student able concluding the
distinguish of orthogonal
105126/1-44
L4 and oblique ctiing process.
To simplify thepriritizing
of selection of cutting
process


L2
explain difference types
cutting tools
Classification of cutting
tools
5 the student will be able to a T1&R1
analyze which type of
105126/1-41
L6 cutting tools used in metal
cutting by selecting of
single point or multy point
tools
L5
construct the Geometry of
single point cutting tool. Nomenclature of single
At the end of the session point cutting tool(Angles)
6 a,b T1&R1
analyze the significance of 105126/1-48
L4
various angles like rake,
relife and end cutting edge
angles used to metal cutting
L2
explain chip formation
Chip formation
types and their effects.
mechanism
7 By end of the session a,b T2&R1
student able toinspect
105126/1-41
L5 various chip effects assesed
by cutting forcess during
metal cutting operations
L2
explain difference types of
Types of chips (Build up
chips their effects.
edge), Tool failure, Chip
8 a,b breakers, T2&R1
analyze the chip effects
L4 105126/1-52
during metal cutting
according to the pririority
of solids
L6
estimate tool life & ORS
Tool life , Coolants or
System.
cutting fluids, Mechanics
of metal cutting
9 the student will be able to a,b T2&R1
(Orthogonal cutting)
justify the various
L5 parameters for to increse
105126/1-41
the tool life span as per
ASA and ORS cutting
systems


L3 Cutting Parameters (
calculate Cutting speed,
Cutting speed, feed, and
feed and Tool life.
depth of cut)
10 At the end of the session a,b T2&R1
105126/1-41
L5 determination of various
maching parameters for
metal cutting.
L5
justify kinematic scheme of
Lathe Machinability, Cutting
At the end of the session Tool Material
11 a T2&R1
understand and plan to 105126/1-41
L6
selecting of cutting tool
materials as per metal
composions
L4
analyze the Merchant force
Merchant force
diagram.
diagram(Cutting force
During metal cutting
12 a,b diagram) T2&R1
students to able summarize
the various cutting forces
L6 105126/1-41
encounted between cutting
too and workpiece
interface.
L6 calculate and Modify
Constructional features of
Cutting speed, feed and
speed & feed gear box.
Tool life.
Kinematics of Machine
13 At the end of the session a,b T2&R1
Tools
modify the constructional
L6 105126/1-41
features of speed and feed
gear box according to the
operation
L1
describe the operation of
engine Lathe. Engine lathe-principle of
At the end of the session working, specification of
14 the student will be able to a,b lathe, Operations T2&R1
reconstruct the lathe http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112
L6 principle as per machine 105126/1-41
specifications based on
working principle and
operations.


L5 identify & Importance
various types work Types of lathe, work
holders & tool holders. holders, tool holders.
15 b T2&R1
At the end of the session http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112
the student will be able to 105126/1-41
L5 select the workholding
devices based on workpeice
and type of lathe machines.
L4 illustrate Geometry of Box
tools, taper turning, Box tools, taper turning,
threading –for lathes. threading –for lathes.
16 b T2 & R1
L6 rearrange the cutting tools
and operations according to
box tool layout
L6
categorize & Describe lathe
lathe attachments Lathe attachments.
17 At the end of the session b http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T2 & R1
L6 analyze the selecting of
attachments related to
operations and machine.
L1 describe and Create the
operation Turret and
Turret and Capstan lathes
Capstan lathes,
18 b,d http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T2 & R1
105126/1-41
L6 create the new objects by
mass production in capstan
and turret lathe.
L1 Work Holding
describe the work holders
Devices(Collet chucks,
and tool holders.
other work holders), tool
19 At the end of the session b T2 & R1
holding devices.
L6 select the workholding
105126/1-41
devices based on workpeice
and type of lathe machines.


L4 explain and Distinguish
the Turret and Capstan
Box and tool lay out.
lathes,
20 b http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T2 & R1
105126/1-41
L4 distinguish to capstan and
turret lathes parts according
to applications.
L1
describe the Box and tool
Principle features of
lay out for Automatic lathe.
automatic lathes-
21 b classification. T2 & R1
analyze the selecting of
L6 105126/1-41
machine related to spindle
arrangements and cam
designs.
L1
describe the Operations of
Single spindle and multi
Turret & Capstan lathe.
spindle automatic lathes,
22 b Tool lay out T2 & R1
reconstruction work
L6 105126/1-41
according to oprtaion of
single spindle and multy
spindle lathes.
L5
justify kinematic scheme of
Kinematic scheme of lathes
Lathe
23 a,b http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T2 & R1
Finally students are
105126/1-41
conclude the various forces
L6
encounted during lathe
operations
L1
describe the shaping, Introduction to shaping,
planning, slotting planning, slotting
24 a,c T2 & R1
L6
recognize the machines
according to applications


L2
compare the principle of
shaping, planning, slotting Principle of working to
At the end of the session shaping, planning, slotting
25 a,c T1 & T2
reconstruct the shaping, 105126/1-41
L6
planning, slotting principle
as per principle and
operations.
L6 the student will be able to
Classification or Types of
classify the shapers
shaper
26 At the end of the session c T1 & T2
105126/1-45
categorize variops types of
shaper
L1
state the principle diagram Principle parts of shaper
and parts of of shaping (Parts of shaper)
27 a,c T1 & T2
L6
constructions of principle
parts of shaper
L1
state the Specification of
Specifications
shaping
28 c http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T1 & T2
105126/1-41
L6
specification of shaping
machine as per ram stroke
L1
Shaping machine.
Shaper operations
29 c http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T1 & T2
105126/1-41
analyze shaper operations
L6
of horizontal, vertical,
inclind and dovetail
shaping


L5 assess kinematic scheme of
Kinematic schemes of
Shaping, slotting and
shaping, slotting,
planning machine.
machines, planning
Finally students are a,c T1 & T2
30 machines.
encounted during shaping,
L6 105126/1-41
slotting, machines,
planning machines.
operations
L1 state the shaper machine Machining time
machining time calculations
31 a,c T1 & T2
calculations http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112
Estimate the machine 105126/1-41
L5 Machining time
calculations,
L1
describe the Drilling Introduction of Drilling
machine . machine- principle
32 d T1 & T2
L6
L6 specify and justify the
specification of drilling
Specification of Drilling
and boring
Machine
33 At the end of the session d T1 & T2
105126/1-41
specification of shaping
L6
machine as per height
between surface of the
table to chuck
L1
Drilling Machine.
Drilling M/C operations
34 d http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T1 & T2
105126/1-41
modify drilling operations
L5
of cylindrical , counter
boring and counter
shinking, trappening etc


L1 describe and choose tool
Tool holding devices of
holding devices of drilling.
drilling
35 d Machine T1 & T2
105126/1-41
L6 categorize tool holding
devices according to drill
bits.
L2
explain difference types of
Types of drills ( Twist
drills
drill.)
36 At the end of the session a,d T1 & T2
105126/1-41
L6 categorize various types of
drills as per alphabate ,
numerical, matric systems
L1
describe the operation of Boring Machine
Boring Machine. Operations
37 b,d T1&T2
L6
recognize boring
operations
L1 describe the Fine boring
machine, jig boring Fine boring machine, jig
machine . boring machine
38 d T1&T2
L6 analyze boring operations
according to precision
boring operation
L5
assess kinematic scheme of Kinematic schemes of
Drilling drilling, boring machines
39 a,d T1&T2
Finally students are http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112
conclude the various forces 105126/1-41
L5
encounted during drilling
and boring operations
L1
state the principle of Milling machine-principle
40 milling machine. a,d http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T1&T2
At the end of the session 105126/1-41
L6 the student will be able to

L1
state the Specification of
milling Specification,
At the end of the session classification.
41 d T1&T2
specification of milling 105126/1-41
L6
machine as per length of
movement of T-Slot table
axis
L1
describe the Horizontal
milling machine Horizontal milling
At the end of the session machine
42 e T1&T2
recognize the various 105126/1-41
L6
principle parts of horizontal
milling machine as per
atrrangement of tool head
L3
build the Vertical milling
machine
Vertical milling machine
43 e http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 T1&T2
105126/1-41
recognize the various
L6
principle parts of vertical
atrrangement of tool head
L1
describe the Universal
milling machine
Universal milling machine
recognize the various
105126/1-41
principle parts of vertical
L6
rotary table having three
axis and swiveling
movement


L4
illustrate Geometry of
Geometry of milling
milling cutters,
cutters
45 At the end of the session a,e T1&T2
105126/1-41
L5 recognize the multi point
cutters as compare to single
point cutting tool angles
L1
describe the Milling
Milling operations
operations .
105126/1-41
L6
plan the milling operations
as per application diagrams
L1& categorize & describe
L6 Milling Attachment
Milling Attachment
(Accessories of milling
(Accessories of milling
machine).
47 b,e machine). T1&T2
105126/1-41
analyze the selecting of
L4
attachments related to
operations in milling
machine.
L1
describe attachment
methods of indexing
Methods of indexing.
48 e http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 R1
105126/1-41
analyze various index
L4
mechanism for dividing
equalent divisions for
circular slots
L5
assess kinematic scheme of Kinematic scheme of
Milling. milling cutters.
49 a,e R1
Finally students are http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112
conclude the various forces 105126/1-41
L6
encounted during milling
operations


L1
describe & Distinguish the
operations of grinding. Introduction to grinding
50 At the end of the session e http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 R1
L4 analyze to finish the
operation done by either
external or internal surface
L6
categorize Theory of
grinding. Theory of grinding.
51 At the end of the session a,e http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112 R1
L5 understanding the
importance of grinding
process
L4 explain & classify various
types of grinding Classifications of grinding
machines. machines.
52 e, R1
operation done according to
placing of grinding wheel
L1 describe the Cylindrical
and surface grinding Cylindrical and surface
machines grinding machines
53 e R1
operation done according to
external or internal surface
L2
explain Tool and cutter Tool and cutter grinding
grinding machine. machine.
54 e R1
L6
create various cutting tools
angle as per significance


L2 Special types of grinding
explain the Special types of
machines.
grinding machines.
55 e Types of abrasives, bonds. T2
L4 105126/1-41
analyze to finish the
smallest to special works
L6 categorize the bonds
Specification of grinding Bonds Specification of
wheel. grinding wheel.
56 a,e T2
L5 importance of various
bonds used to preparation
of grinding wheel
L4 Selection of wheel,
how to select of grinding
Kinematic scheme of
wheel
57 a,e grinding machine. T2
L5 105126/1-41
selection of grinding wheel
as per requirements
L1
describe the Lapping, Introduction to Lapping,
honing, broaching. honing, broaching.
58 e,f T2
L4
anlyze the special
fininshing process
L4
differentiate the grinding, Comparison of grinding,
lapping, honing. lapping, honing.
59 e,f T2
L4
analyze the process
the student will be able to Kinematic schemes of
L5 assess kinematic scheme of lapping, honing,
60 lapping, honing, broaching e,f broaching machines. T2
machines. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112
Finally students are 105126/1-41
L5

encounted during above

operations
L5
determine the Machining Constructional features of
time calculations speed, Feed units.
At the end of the session Machining time
61 a,e,f T2
the student will be able to calculations
modify the constructional http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112
L6
features of speed and 105126/1-41
machining parameters
according to the operation
T1. Production Technology by R.K. Jain and S.C. Gupta.
T2. Production Technology by H.M.T. (Hindustan Machine Tools).
R1. Machine Tools – C.Elanchezhian and M. Vijayan / Anuradha Agencies Publishers.
R2.Workshop Technology – B.S.Raghu Vamshi – Vol II
R3. Principles of machine Tools/ Bhattacharya A and Sen.G.C./New central Book Agency.
R4. Elements of Work Shop Technology- Vol-II/ Hajra chowdary/Media prometers.
R5. Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine tools/ Geofrey Boothroyd/McGraw Hill.
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)



PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
I H H S H S S S S
II H H H S S
III H H H H
IV H H S
V H H S S S

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
a H H H S H H S
b S H S H S H S
c S H S S S
d S H H S S H S
e S H S H S H H


10.11 MAPPING OF BLOOM TAXONOMY WITH COURSE OUTCOMES

6. Creating /
Synthesis :
4. Analyzing / Builds a structure
5. Evaluating /
Analysis : or pattern from
Evaluation:
Separates diverse elements.
Make judgments
material or Put parts together
about the value
concepts into to form a whole,
of ideas or
3. Applying / component parts with emphasis on
2. Understanding materials.
Application: so that its creating a new
/ Comprehension
Use a concept in organizational meaning or
Blooms Taxonomy  : Key Words:
a new situation structure may be structure.
1. Comprehending Agree,
or unprompted understood.
Remembering / the meaning, Appraise,
use of an Distinguishes Key Words:
Knowledge: translation, Assess, Award,
abstraction. between facts Adapt, Build,
Recall or retrieve interpolation, and Choose,
Applies what and inferences. Change,
previous learned interpretation of Compare,
was learned in Choose,
information. instructions and Conclude,
the classroom Key Words: Combine,
problems. State a Criteria,
into novel Analyze, Compile,
Key Words: problem in one's Criticize,
situations in the Assume, Compose,
Choose, Define, own words. Decide, Deduct,
work place. Categorize, Construct,
Find, Defend,
Classify, Create,
Course Outcomes How, Label, Key Words: Determine,
Key Words: Compare, Delete, Design,
List, Match, Classify, Disprove,
Apply, Build, Conclusion, Develop,
Name, Omit, Compare, Estimate,
Choose, Contrast, Discuss,
Recall, Relate, Contrast, Evaluate,
Construct, Discover, Elaborate,
Select, Show, Demonstrate, Explain,
Develop, Dissect, Estimate,
Spell, Tell, Explain, Extend, Importance,
Experiment, Distinguish, Formulate,
What, When, Illustrate, Infer, Influence,
with, Identify, Divide, Happen,
Where, Which, Interpret, Outline, Interpret, Judge,
Interview, Make Examine, Imagine,
Who, Why Relate, Rephrase, Justify, Mark,
use of, Model, Function, Improve, Invent,
Show, Measure,
Organize, Plan, Inference, Make up,
Summarize, Opinion,
Select, Solve, Inspect, List, Maximize,
Translate Perceive,
Utilize Motive, Minimize,
Prioritize,
Relationships, Modify,
Prove, Rate,
Simplify, Original,
Recommend,
Survey, Take, Originate, Plan,
Rule on, Select,
part, in, Test For, Predict, Propose,
Support, value
Theme Solution, Solve,
Suppose, Test,
Theory
a.Apply the basic
concept of
parameters in the
metal cutting
operations,
Differentiate and
utilize various tool
materials
determine
and
or
√ √ √
estimate the
forces, cutting
fluid properties
and
merchantability
aspects.
b.Apply the
principle and
importance of
mechanisms
lathe
in
operations √ √
and utilize the
various
attachments for

create modify
objects replace to
exsiting designs
for products
c.Recognize the
principle and
importance of
operations, to
generate the slots,
keyways and splins
by shaper, slotter
and planer
√ √ √
produced by
combination of
reciprocating and
translating
movements.
d.Ability to dicuss
the use of different
types of holes
preparation by √ √ √
drilling and boring
machines.
e.Ability to
identify the
supporting of
finishing process
for machining
process and to √ √ √
create slots,
keyways gears and
machine bed
guideways .


UNIT-I
1. A built –up-edge is formed while machining [ B ]
a) Ductile materials at high speed
b)Ductile materials at low speed
c)Brittle materials at high speeds
d)Brittle materials at low speeds
2. A single point tool has the following specifications in ASA system 8, 7, 5, 6, 10, 9, 1.5 The
number 1.5represents [ D ]
a)Bake rake angle
b)End relief angle
c)Side relief angle
d)Nose radius
3. Tool signature means [ B ]

a) The impression of the tool taken on a paper for any reference
b) A numerical method of identification of tool
c) The plan of tool
d) The signature of operator using the tool
4. According to ASA a tool signature is given as 10, 10, 6, 6, 8, 8, 2. The number 6 indicates
[ C ]
a) Rake Angle
b) Cutting Edge Angle
c) Relief Angle
d) Nose Radius
5. Discontinuous chips will be formed when machining speed is [ B ]

a) High
b) Low
c) Medium
d) Away from the design value
6. Machinability of a metal is determined by [ A ]

a) Machinability Index
b) Maximum possible cutting speed
c) Maximum possible depth of cut
d) Maximum surface finish per cut
7. Recognize the metal cutting element [ B ]

a) Feed
b) Tool Holding Device
c) Depth of cut
d) Speed
8. In orthogonal cutting system, cutting edge is [ B ]

a) In line with direction of tool travel
b) Perpendicular to direction of tool travel

c) Perpendicular to shear plane

d) At 300 to the cutting plane
9. The spindle speeds of machine tools are usually designed to follow: [ B ]

a)Arithmetic progressiob) Geometric progression
c) Harmonic progression
d) Logarithmic progression
10. The primary clearance angle in milling cutter provided for Aluminum, Brass etc. is of the order
[ A ]
a) 10 – 12
b) 1 – 2
c) 5 – 10
d) 4 – 7
11. The cutting speed is Maximum while machining -------------with high speed steel tool.
[ D ]
a) Cast Iron
b) Mild steel
c) Brass
d) Aluminium
12. The width of cutting edge of parting tool varies from-------- [ A ]

a) 3 – 12mm
b) 5 – 20mm
c) 8 – 30mm
d) 15 – 40mm
13. Cutting fluids mostly used for machining steel is ----------------- [ B ]

a) Water
b) Soluble oil
c) Dry
d) Heavy oil
14. When cutting face of tool is 900 to the line of action of tool then it is known as -
[ B ]
a) Oblique cutting
b) Orthogonal cutting
c) ASA System
d) ORS System
15. Work done in metal cutting is depends on ---------------------- [ A ]

a) Cutting force & Cutting speed
b) Cutting speed & heat generated
c) Depth of cut & cutting speed
d)Depth of Cut & Cutting Force
16. -------------Gives best finish [ C ]

a) Lower cutting speed & higher feed b) Higher cutting speed & higher feed

c) Higher cutting speed & fine feed d) All the above
17. As the cutting speed increases tool cutting forces [ C ]

a) Remains constant
b) Increases
c) decreases
d)None
18. Larger end cutting edge angle --------------Tool life [ A ]

a) Increases
b) decreases
c) No effect
d)all the above
19. ------------are most commonly used for measuring force in metal cutting [ A ]
a) Mechanical & Strain gauge dynamometer
b) Calorimeter
c) Wattmeter
d)Ammeter
20. Surface which face the work piece is known as--------------of the tool [ A ]
a) Flank
b) Heel
c) Base
d) Top Angle
UNIT-II
1. Capstan and turret lathes are usually used [ D ]
a) To make small components
b) To make large components
c) For ordinary work
d) For mass production
2. Which of the following is not used as work holding device [ D ]

a) Chuck
b) Angle plate
c) Face plate
d) Carriage
3. The lathe that can accommodate maximum number of tools is [ D ]

a) Engine lathe
b) Tool room lathe
c) Copy lathe
d) Capstan and Turret lathe
4. Tail stock set over method of taper Turning is preferred for [ C ]

a) Internal tapers
b) small tapers
c) long slender tapers

d)step tapers
5. Half nut mechanism is employed while performing __________ operation in lathe [ C ]

a) Under cutting
b) plain turning
c)thread cutting
d)taper turning
6. Which the following is lathe accessory [ C ]

a) Head stock
b) compound rest
c) lathe carrier
d) tool post
7. Enlarging an existing hole with a rotating single point tool is called [ A ]

a) boring
b) drilling
c) reaming
d) internal turning
8. The lathe spindle is generally provided with a taper of [ D ]

a) 1 in 5
b) 1 in 10
c) 1 in 15
d) 1 in 20
9. Generally lathe tool is made of ______________ steel [ D ]

a) Iron
b) Aluminum
c) Cast Iron
d) High Speed Steel
10. The lathe with 15 cm center height would have a swing over the bed as [ A ]
a) 30cm
b) 15cm
c) 45 cm
d) 60 cm
10. The lathe with 15 cm center height would have a swing over the bed as [ A ]
a) 30cm
b) 15cm
c) 45 cm
d) 60 cm
11. Which operations are performed in lathe [ D ]

a) Undercut
b) Threading
c) Facing

d) All of These
12. Lathe bed is made of [ D ]

a) Wood
b) Steels
c) Plastic
d) Cast Iron
13. The movement of the cutting tool in lathe is [ B ]

a) Static
b) Moved
c) Not necessary
d) All of these
14. Most of the cases lathe is preferred to machining of [ B ]

a) Square
b) Cylindrical
c) Rectangular
d) Any Shape
15. In lathe the tool post is arranged in _________side [ A ]

a) Above
b) Below
c) Right side
d) Left side
16. Short work piece is hold in [ A ]

a) Chuckb) Tail Stock
c) Carriage
d) Lathe bed
17. Between center are used in lathe for ________Work [ C ]

a) Cutting
b) Shaping
c) Holding
d) All of these
18. For capstan and turret lathes turret head is used or not. [ A ]
a) Yes
b) No
c) May be
d) All of these
19. Steady Rest is also called [ B ]

a) Head stroke
b) Centre Rest
c) Chuck
d) Tool Post

20. Lathe dogs are made up of [ C ]

a) Wood
b) Plastics
c) Metal
d) Non of above.
UNIT-III
1. Reciprocation of the cutting tool in shaping machines is accomplished by [ D ]
a. Rack pinion mechanism
b. Crank and connecting rod mechanism
c. Cam and cam follower mechanism
d. Oscillating lever mechanism
2. Internal keyway in gears can be cut in [ C ]

a. Shaping machine
b. Planing machine
c. Slotting machine
d. None of the above
3. The job reciprocates in [ B ]

a. Shaping machine
b. Planing machine
c. slotting machine
d. All of the above
4. The T-slots in the table of planing machines are cut in [ B ]

a. Shaping machine
b. Planing machine
c. Slotting machine
5. Flat surface can be produced in [ D ]

a. Shaping machine only
b. Planing machine only
c. Slotting machine only
d. All of the above
6. Large number of cutting tool [ B ]

s can be simultaneously used in
a. Shaping machine
b. Planing machine
c. Slotting machine
7. Heavy cuts can be given during machining in [ B ]

a. Shaping machine
b. Planing machine
c. Slotting machine


8. Slotting machines are used to cut internal gear teeth for [ A ]
a. Batch production
b. Lot production
c. Mass production
9. The work-table can rotate in [ C ]
a. Shaping machine
b. Planing machine
c. Slotting machine
10. Length of the stroke can be varied in [ B ]

a. Shaping machine
b). Planing machine
c). Slotting machine
d). All of the above
11. The table in a slotter is a [ B ]

a) Square Table
b) Circular Table
c) Rectangular Table
d) Semi – circular Table
12. Normally shaping machine is used for producing [ C ]

a) Threads
b) Cylindrical surfaces
c) Surfaces composed of straight line elements
d) Cylindrical holes.
13. In a planer [ D ]
a) The tool is rotated
b) The tool is reciprocated
c) The job is rotated
d) The job is reciprocated
14. Size of a shaper is given by [ A ]

a) stroke length
b) motor power
c)weight of machine
d)table size
15. In a mechanical shaper the lifting of the tool during idle stroke is ensured by a) tool head
[ D ]
b) ratchet and pow mechanism
c) ram adjustment
d)clamper box mechanism

16. If the speed of Forward Stroke in a shaper is 12 m/min, the speed of Backward Stroke should be
[ C ]
a) 6 or 15 m/min
b) 12 m/min
c) 8 or 18 m/min
d) 6 or 24 m/min
17. Drill bushes are made up of [ D ]

a) High Speed Steel
b) Aluminum
c) Low carbon steels
d) High Carbon Steels, hardened and ground
18. Drill bushes are made up of [ B ]

a) High Speed Steel
b) Aluminum
c) Low carbon steels
d) High Carbon Steels, hardened and ground
19. Drill chucks are used for holding [ B ]

a) Taper shank drills
b) Straight shank drills
c) Hexagonal shank drills
d) Square shank drills
20. In reaming process [ C ]

a) Metal removal rate is high
b) position of drilled hole is corrected
c) high form accuracy is obtained
d) high dimensional accuracy is obtained
UNIT-IV
1. In a milling operation, two side milling cutters are mounted with a desired distance between them so
that both sides of a wok piece can be milled simultaneously. This set up is called
(a) Gang milling
(b) straddle milling
(c) Side milling
(d) slab milling [ B ]
2. A milling cutter having 8teeth is rotating at 150 rpm. If feed per tooth is 0.1mm,the value of the table speed
in mm/minis [ A ]
(a) 120
(b) 187
(c) 125
(d) 70
3. Indexing is applied to ______________ machines [ A ]

(a) milling

(b) grinding
(c) lapping
(d) honing
4. The angle included between the land and the face of the tooth of a milling cutter is called
a) Lip Angle b) Rake Angle c) Cutting Angle d) Chisel Edge Angle [ A ]
5. Standard taper generally used on milling machine is [ B ]

a) Morse
b) Brown and Sharpe
c) Chapman
d) Seller's
6. In a milling cutter, the angle between the land of a tooth and the tangent to the outside diameter
Of the cutter at the cutting edge of the tooth is called [ C ]
a) Lip Angle
b) Rake Angle
c) Relief Angle
d) Chisel Edge Angle
7. The arbor of the milling machine is used to hold [ A ]

a) Cutting tool
b) Spindle
c) Over arm
d) Mandrel
8. Feed rate in milling operation is expressed as [ A ]

a) mm/tooth
b) mm/rpm of the milling cutter
c) meters/minute
d) Revolution per minute.
9. Very thin chips with end mills [ A ]

a) Dull the cutting edge quickly
b) Improve tool life
c) Sharpen the cutting edge
d) Cause chipping of the cutting
10. The angle included between the land and the face of the tooth of a milling
cutter is called …….. [ B ]
a)Rake angle
b) Lip Angle
c)Cutting angle
d)Nose angle
11. The surface finish obtained in broaching operation is of the order of [ B ]

(a) 8 micron
(b)0.8 micron
(c) 0.08 micron

(d) 0.008 micron
12. The maximum depth of cut which the tooth of a broach cuts is [ B ]
(a) I mm (b) 0.15 nim (c) 0.01 mm (d) 0.5 mm
13. A broach has (a) roughing teeth, semifinishing teeth and finishing teeth [ A ]
(b) roughing teeth and finishing teeth
(c) only finishing teeth
(d)Non of above
14. The pitch for teeth of internal brooches is given by the relation: [ B ]
(a) 0.35 times length of cut in mm.
(b) 1.25 to 1.5 times length of cut in mm
(c) 4 times length of cut in mm
(d) None of the above
15. For proper broaching. at least the following number of teeth should be in the work at a time
[ C ]
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 0
16. Choose the wrong statement: In broaching [ B ]

(a) the job is completed in one stroke of the machine
(b) the tooling WU is low
(c) the rate of production is high
(d)Non of above
17. The finishing teeth of a broaching tool are provided with [ B ]

(a) large amount of land
(b) smaller amount of land
(c) no land
(d)Non of above
18. The range of hardness of the material which can be broached is [ B ]

(a) 10 to 20 Rockwell C
(b) 25 to 40 Rockwell C
(c) 60 to 80 Rockwell C
(d)Non of above
19. Broaching is primarily done for [ C ]

(a) better finish
(b) cylindrical jobs
(c) mass production
(d) hard materials

20. The broaching operation in which the tool moves past the stationary work is (a) push
broaching [ D ]
(b) pull broaching
(c) continuous broaching
(d) surface broaching
UNIT-V
1. In a milling operation, two side milling cutters are mounted with a desired distance between them
so that both sides of a wok piece can be milled simultaneously. This set up is called
(a) Gang milling
(b) straddle milling
(c) Side milling
(d) slab milling [ B ]
2. A milling cutter having 8teeth is rotating at 150 rpm. If feed per tooth is 0.1mm,the value of the
table speed in mm/minis [ A ]
(a) 120
(b) 187
(c) 125
(d) 70
3. Indexing is applied to ______________ machines [ A ]

(a) milling
(b) grinding
(c) lapping
(d) honing
4. The angle included between the land and the face of the tooth of a milling cutter is called
a) Lip Angle
b) Rake Angle
c) Cutting Angle
d) Chisel Edge Angle [ A ]
5. Standard taper generally used on milling machine is [ B ]

a) Morse
b) Brown and Sharpe
c) Chapman
d) Seller's
6. In a milling cutter, the angle between the land of a tooth and the tangent to the outside diameter of
the cutter at the cutting edge of the tooth is called [ C ]
a) Lip Angle
b) Rake Angle
c) Relief Angle
d) Chisel Edge Angle
7. The arbor of the milling machine is used to hold [ A ]

a) Cutting tool
b) Spindle

c) Over arm
d) Mandrel
8. Feed rate in milling operation is expressed as [ A ]

a) mm/tooth
b) mm/rpm of the milling cutter
c) meters/minute
d) Revolution per minute.
9. Very thin chips with end mills [ A ]

a) Dull the cutting edge quickly
b) Improve tool life
c) Sharpen the cutting edge
d) Cause chipping of the cutting
10. The angle included between the land and the face of the tooth of a milling
cutter is called …….. [ B ]
a)Rake angle
b) Lip Angle
c)Cutting angle
d)Nose angle
11. The surface finish obtained in broaching operation is of the order of [ B ]

(a) 8 micron
(b)0.8 micron
(c) 0.08 micron
(d) 0.008 micron
12. The maximum depth of cut which the tooth of a broach cuts is [ B ]
(a) I mm
(b) 0.15 nim
(c) 0.01 mm
(d) 0.5 mm
13. A broach has

(a) roughing teeth, semifinishing teeth and finishing teeth [ A ]
(b) roughing teeth and finishing teeth
(c) only finishing teeth
(d)Non of above
14. The pitch for teeth of internal brooches is given by the relation: [ B ]
(a) 0.35 times length of cut in mm.
(b) 1.25 to 1.5 times length of cut in mm
(c) 4 times length of cut in mm
15. For proper broaching. at least the following number of teeth should be in the work at a time.
(a) 1 [ C ]
(b) 2

(c) 3
(d)0
16. Choose the wrong statement: In broaching [ B ]

(a) the job is completed in one stroke of the machine
(b) the tooling WU is low
(c) the rate of production is high
(d)Non of above
17. The finishing teeth of a broaching tool are provided with [ B ]

(a) large amount of land
(b) smaller amount of land
(c) no land
(d)Non of above
18. The range of hardness of the material which can be broached is [ B ]

(a) 10 to 20 Rockwell C
(b) 25 to 40 Rockwell C
(c) 60 to 80 Rockwell C
(d)Non of above
19. Broaching is primarily done for [ C ]

(a) better finish
(b) cylindrical jobs
(c) mass production
(d) hard materials
20. The broaching operation in which the tool moves past the stationary work is [ D ]
(a) push broaching
(b) pull broaching
(c) continuous broaching
(d) surface broaching
10.13 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Tutorials
1 Explain are the types of tool materials used in metal cutting? comprehension a,b
Discuss their importance.
2 Explain are the different types of chips? Explain comprehension a
Machinability.
3 Explain the effect of cutting fluids on chip contraction. comprehension a
4 Discuss the various forces encountered in metal cutting. comprehension a
5 Describe the effect of cutting fluid on cutting speed and tool comprehension a
life

Define various angle of single point nomenclature with

6 Knowledge b
example?
7 Explain briefly about effects of cutting fluids while during comprehension a,b
metal cutting?
8 Distinguish between ASA and ORS systems? comprehension b
9 Estimate the tool life? Comprehension b
10 State the differences Feed and Depth of Cut? Knowledge A,b
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Tutorials
1 Discuss the various forces encountered in metal cutting. Knowledge a
What are the types of tool materials used in metal cutting?
2 Knowledge b
3 With the help of neat sketch, explain the tool geometry. Analysis b
Describe the effect of cutting fluid on cutting speed and
4 comprehension a,b
tool life.
What are the different types of chips? Explain
5 comprehension a
Machinability.
Explain the following types of cutting fluids: i. Water based
6 Knowledge b
cutting fluids ii. Straight or neat oil based cutting fluids.
7 Explain the effect of cutting fluids on chip contraction. Knowledge a,b
8 Explain the factors used for judging the Machinability. Analysis a
9 Discuss the various forces encountered in metal cutting. Analysis a
10 Knowledge b
Blooms
UNIT-II
Tutorials
1 List out various types of lathes? Knowledge B
2 State the differences between engine lathe and centre lathe? comprehension B
Explain the four types of operations that need to lathe
3 comprehension B
machining?
Differentiate the tool setup for face turning and plain
4 Analysis a,b
turning?
5 Explain briefly about taper turning methods? comprehension b
6 Discuss the various tool holding devices for lathe? comprehension b
7 List out the two mandrel? Knowledge b
8 Define lathe dogs? Explain how it is used to lathe? Knowledge b

9 Discuss the lathe carriers? And its applications. comprehension b

10 Write the full classification of lathe? Knowledge b
Blooms
UNIT-II
Tutorials
Explain briefly the working principle of a lathe with
1 Comprehension b
diagram
2 Name any six work-holding devices and explain briefly. Comprehension a,b
3 Draw the sketch of capstan lathe mention parts. Knowledge b
4 Compare an engine lathe with capstan and turret lathe. Analysis b
5 Explain six operations for lathe: Knowledge b
What are the chief distinguishing features of a turret lathe
6 comprehension b
as compared to an engine lathe?
7 Describe the ‘tool layout’ for a turret lathe? Knowledge a,b
Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a turret lathe. Comprehension
8 b
Explain briefly the working principle of a lathe with Comprehension
9 b
diagram .
Name any six work-holding devices and explain briefly. Comprehension
10 a,b

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
1 How to classify the shaper? Application a,c
Explain the following related operations to address the tool: Comprehension
2 a,c
a. Horizontal Cutting b. Inclined Cutting
3 Explain the principle of slotting machine? Comprehension c
Discuss advantages of disadvantages of shaper operations Comprehension
4 c
over slotting operations?
5 Explain the principle of slotting machine? Comprehension c
Discuss advantages of disadvantages of shaper operations Comprehension
6 c
over slotting operations?
Explain the following mechanism A. Whit-worth quick Comprehension
7 c
return B. Crank and slotted lever
8 Explain the feed mechanism in shaper? Comprehension c
Differentiate between mechanical shaper and hydraulic
9 Analysis c
shaper?
Define the various work holding devices for shaper, slotter
10 Knowledge c
and planer?
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Draw the block diagram of a horizontal shaper and write
1 Knowledge c
about its important parts.
2 Identify the main operations performed on a planer? Knowledge c
Describe with a schematic sketch the operation of a
3 Knowledge c
hydraulic shaper and explain.
Write the planning machine working principle and its
4 Knowledge c
applications.
Draw and explain the hydraulic drive of a horizontal Knowledge,
5 c
shaper. comprehension
Name the common work-holding devices used on shaper
6 planers. With the help of a neat sketch, describe a planer Knowledge a,c
vice.
Describe with a schematic sketch the operation of a
7 Knowledge c
hydraulic shaper and explain.
8 Write the planning machine working principle and its Knowledge a,c,e

applications.
9 Explain any three methods opration on a slotter. comprehension c
Draw the block diagram of a horizontal shaper and write
10 Knowledge c
about its important parts.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Tutorials
Write about milling machine? How do you classify the Knowledge,
1 e
milling machine? Application
Give the working principle of milling machine with a neat
2 Analysis e
diagram?
3 Classifications of drilling machines. Application e
4 Explain the importance of Universal milling machine comprehension e
5 Classifications of various milling cutters.? Application e
What are the various boring operations? Explain with the
6 comprehension e
help of suitable sketches.
7 Explain the drilling with neat sketches comprehension e
8 Explain the drilling type milling machine. comprehension e
9 Explain the Rotary table or continuous milling machine. comprehension e

Mention the size and specification of boring machine ? comprehension
10 d,e
Explain.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Tutorials
Write about milling machine? How do you classify the Knowledge,
1 e
Comprehension,
2 sketch? Mention the size and specification of milling e
synthesis
machine?
3 Classifications of milling machines. Application e
What are the various drilling operations? Explain with the
6 comprehension e
help of suitable sketches.
Knowledge,
7 Explain the jig boring with neat sketches. e
comprehension
8 Explain the Plano type milling machine. comprehension e

Explain the milling machine? How do you classify the Comprehension,

10 e
Blooms
Course
Sl.No Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
Tutorials
Explain the theory of grinding. What is the principle of metal
1 comprehension e
removal? Discuss the elements of grinding
2 What type of materials are used for honning? Discuss . comprehension e
What is indexing? Explain some common methods of
3 comprehension e
indexing in milling machines?
4 Make a comparison of grinding machine with lapping. evaluation e
5 Explain Grinding processes with diagrams: comprehension e
6 Sketch a broaching tool and explain various elements. Knowledge e
7 How the length of a broach is determined? Explain. comprehension e
What is indexing? Explain some common methods of
8 comprehension e
indexing in milling machines?
9 Make a comparison of grinding machine with lapping. evaluation e
Differences between honing and broaching machines with
10 Analysis e
regard to the construction, working and applications.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
Tutorials
Give the working principle of grinding machine with a neat
Knowledge,
1 sketch? Mention the size and specification of grinding e
synthesis
machine?
2 Explain the importance of Universal grinding machine comprehension e
Clacify the various abrasive operations? Explain with the help Comprehension,
3 e
of suitable sketches. Application
4 Explain the horizontal milling machine. comprehension e
5 Classifications of various grinding cutters.? Application e
What are the various superfinishing operations? Explain with
6 comprehension e
the help of suitable sketches.
7 Explain the cylindrical grinding with neat sketches: comprehension e
8 Explain the special grinding with neat sketches: comprehension e
9 Write about the Rotary table or continuous grinding machine. Knowledge e
Give the working principle of grinding machine with a neat Knowledge,
10 e
sketch? Mention the size and specification of grinding synthesis

machine?
ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Assignments
Explain briefly about effects of cutting fluids while during
1 comprehension b
metal cutting?
2 Distinguish between ASA and ORS systems? comprehension a,b
3 How to identify the tool life? Knowledge a,b
4 State the differences Feed and Depth of Cut? Knowledge a
5 Describe various types of work holding devices? Knowledge a
6 List out various parameters for improve the Tool life? Remember b
7 List out the two parameters for metal cutting? Knowledge a
8 Distinguish between Oblique and Orthogonal methods? comprehension a,b
9 How to measure the tool life? Knowledge A,e
10 State the differences Feed and Depth of Cut? Knowledge a
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Assignments
1 Discuss the various forces encountered in metal cutting. Knowledge A
2 Knowledge B
3 With the help of neat sketch, explain the tool geometry. comprehension B
Describe the effect of cutting fluid on cutting speed and tool
4 Knowledge A
life.
5 What are the different types of chips? Explain Machinability. comprehension A
6 List out elements of metal cutting? Knowledge A
7 Differentiate HSS and Tungsten Carbide Tools? analysis a,e
8 Write briefly about Chip formation? Knowledge A
9 Define the Chips? Knowledge A
10 List the various types chips? Knowledge a.b,c,d,e,
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-II
Assignments


1 Explain method of tail stock offset method? comprehension b
State the differences between Engine lathe and automatic
2 Knowledge b
lathe?
3 Discuss the various work holding devices for lathe? Knowledge b
4 Discuss the various tool holding devices for lathe? Knowledge b
5 List out and explain any two types of mandrel? Knowledge b,e
Define lathe dogs? Explain how it is used to lathe? Knowledge
6 b,e
7 Discuss the lathe carriers? And its applications. Knowledge b,c,e

8 Write the full classification of lathe? Knowledge b
9 Explain method of tail stock offset method? comprehension b
State the differences between Engine lathe and automatic
10 Knowledge b
lathe?
Blooms
UNIT-II
Assignments
1 List out various types of lathes? Knowledge b
2 State the differences between engine lathe and centre lathe? Knowledge b
Explain the four types of operations that need to lathe
3 comprehension b
machining?
Differentiate the tool setup for face turning and plain
4 Analysis b
turning?
5 Explain briefly about taper turning methods? comprehension b
6 List out various types of lathes? Knowledge b
7 Esimate the ‘tool layout’ for a turret lathe? comprehension b
8 Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a turret lathe. comprehension b
Explain briefly the working principle of a lathe with diagram
9 comprehension a,b
.
10 Name any six work-holding devices and explain briefly. comprehension a,b
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Assignments
1 Explain the principles of shaper, slotter, planer with diagram? comprehension c
2 Illustrate the shaper operations based on principles. analysis a,c
3 How to recognize the slotter? Knowledge c
4 Draw the diagram of slotting machine Knowledge c
5 Design a whit-worth quick return mechanism for shape analysis c


7 Illustrate the shaper operations based on principles. analysis b
8 Explain the feed mechanism in shaper? comprehension b
Differentiate between mechanical shaper and hydraulic
9 analysis b
shaper?
Define the various work holding devices for shaper, slotter
10 Knowledge e
and planer?
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Assignments
Draw the block diagram of a horizontal shaper and write about
1 Knowledge c
its important parts.
2 Discuss the main operations performed on a planer? comprehension c
Describe with a schematic sketch the operation of a hydraulic
3 Knowledge c
shaper and explain.
Write the planning machine working principle and its
4 Knowledge c
applications.
5 Sketch and explain the hydraulic drive of a horizontal shaper. Knowledge c
7 Illustrate the shaper operations based on principles. analysis c
8 How to recognize the slotter? analysis c
9 Draw the diagram of slotting machine Knowledge c
10 Design a whit-worth quick return mechanism for shape analysis c
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Assignments
What is a milling machine? How do you classify the milling
1 Application e
machine?
2 Knowledge e
sketch?
3 Classifications of milling machines. Application e
What are the various milling operations? Explain with the help
6 comprehensio e
of suitable sketches.
7 Explain the plano type milling with neat sketches: comprehension e
8 Explain the Planer type milling machine. comprehension e

10 Mention the size and specification of milling machine? synthesis e
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Assignments
1 How to classify the milling cutters? Application e
Define various clearance angles of multi point cutting tool
2 Knowledge A,b,e
nomenclature with importance?
3 Explain briefly about lapping process? comprehension e
4 Distinguish between lapping and honing process? comprehension e
5 State the differences lapping and honing with grinding? Analysis e
6 State the differences vertical and horizontal milling machines? Knowledge e
7 Describe various types of work holding devices for milling? Knowledge e
8 How to classify the milling cutters? Knowledge e
9 List out the two parameters for milling? Knowledge e

10 Define lapping? How it’s working? Knowledge e
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
1 List out various types of abrasives and bonds? Knowledge e
2 State the differences between surface and cylindrical grinders? Knowledge e
3 Explain the importance of grinding operations? comprehension e
4 Differentiate the grinding to other finishing processes? analysis e
5 Explain briefly about methods of methods? comprehension e
6 Define advance grinding processes with examples? Knowledge e
7 List the various types of grinding machines ? Knowledge e
8 Discuss the selection of grinding wheels? comprehension e
9 Define the differentiate natural and artificial abrasives? Knowledge e
Why artificial abrasives are preferred for grinding wheels?
10 comprehension e
Discuss
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
Assignments

1 Discuss the selection of bonds for grinding wheels? Knowledge a

2 Explain surface grinding machining process? comprehension e
3 Explain cylindrical grinding machining process? comprehension e
4 State the differences between surface and cylindrical? Knowledge e
5 Discuss the various work holding devices grinding machines? Knowledge e
6 Explain centre less grinding machining process? comprehension e
List out and explain any two types of work holding devices
7 Knowledge a,e
for grinding?
Define grinding operations? Explain any three advantages with
8 Knowledge e
suitable examples?
Discuss the Tool and cutter grinding machine? And its
9 Knowledge e
applications.
10 Write the full classification of grinding machines? Knowledge e

11.0 THERMAL ENGINEERING-II (A50326)

Course Code A50326

Course Title Thermal Engineering – II
Lectures Tutorials Practical Credits
Course Structure
5 1 - 4
Course Coordinator Durga Bhavani.K, Asst.Professor
Team of Instructors N. Prabhu Kishore, Assoc Professor
COURSE OVERVIEW:
The subject, Thermal Engineering-II is designed to cover the concept of steam and gas turbines, turbine
accessories, jet propulsion and rockets. It gives an opportunity to apply first and second laws of
thermodynamics, continuity equation and momentum equations. It focuses on thermodynamic analysis and
design aspects of turbomachines and jet propulsions. It also gives insight into fuel to be used in boilers and
rocket propulsions, combustion equations and heat of combustion. By the end of course one will be able to
distinguish and classify various turbomachines both thermodynamically and analytically. Thus there is great
relevance for this course for mechanical engineers.
11.2 PREREQUISITES:

1. Thorough understanding of first
law and second law of
thermodynamics.
2. Knowledge of energy equation,
entropy and loss relations.
3. Understanding of law of
conservation of mass- continuity
UG 4 4
equation.
4. Application knowledge of
newton’s second law of motion-
momentum equation.
5. Understanding of closed and open
cycles of thermodynamics and
fuel combustion equations.

Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks
75 100
examination consists of one objective paper, one subjective paper
and four assignments. The objective


Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice questions,
fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper contains of 4 full
carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination shall be conducted
for 2.5 units of syllabus and second
marks are allocated for Assignments. First two assignments
conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments should
be submitted before the conduct of the second mid. The total
marks secured by the student in each midterm examination are
evaluated for 25 marks, and the average of the two midterm
examinations shall be taken as the final marks secured by each
candidate.

2 I Assignment 5
4 II Assignment 5
Total 75
11.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES VS COURSE OUTCOMES WITH BLOOMS

Ability to tell suitable
To recall the first law and thermodynamic laws
1 second law of applicable for steam B1
thermodynamics, continuity turbines, nozzles, gas
and momentum equation. turbines and jet propulsion.
Understand the basic

To distinguish working of concepts of turbines and to
steam turbines and gas turbines Exhibit the knowledge of
2 and classify, identify mounting various mountings and
B2
and accessories for a given accessories to be utilized in
turbine, rocket and jet steam and gas turbines
propulsion systems. plants, rocket and jet
propulsion systems.

An ability to apply the

To apply first law and second
knowledge of first law and
law of thermodynamics,
3 second law of
continuity and momentum B3
thermodynamics, continuity
equation to suit steam and gas
and momentum equation.
turbines.
Ability to conduct
thermodynamic analysis of
To do a detailed
steam and gas turbines and
thermodynamic analysis of
4 to perform the combustion
steam and gas turbines and B4
equations of various fuels to
categorize fuels to be used in
be used in boilers and
boilers and jet propulsion.
rockets.
Ability to select the

5 To asses working of steam
requirements of steam and B5
turbines and gas turbines
gas turbines.
To adopt the laws of Ability to design turbines,
6 thermodynamics to propose nozzles and other
B6
modified working cycles to suit accessories to support steam
turbines. and gas turbines.
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)
BL 1: Remember / Knowledge BL 2: Understanding BL 3: Apply
Program Outcomes Level Proficiency assessed by Bloom’s Level
An ability to apply knowledge of mathematical

Solving Gate and text book
A foundations, to real-world problems S Apply
problems
(fundamental engineering analysis examinations skills)
Remember
An ability to design, analyze and interpret data, as well as Solving Gate and text book
B H Understand
to analyze and interpret data. (information retrieval skills) problems
Apply
An ability to design , implement, and evaluate a system,
Assignment & Gate Design
C process, component, or program to meet desired needs, H
questions Create
within realistic constraints (Creative Skills)
Graduates will demonstrate an ability to visualize and work
D on laboratory and multidisciplinary tasks individually or as S Mini & Micro projects Create
a member with in teams (team work)
An ability to demonstrate skills to use the techniques
modern engineering tools software and equipment Micro projects models / Analyze
E S
necessary to analyze computer engineering problems Gate questions Evaluate
(engineering problem solving skills)

An understanding of professional, social and ethical Understand

F N ---------
responsibilities (professional integrity) Adopt
An ability to recognize the global issues like green
initiatives and alternate energy sources and to take Micro projects models / Design
G N
technology to villages and to recognize the rural Gate questions Create
requirements.(Engineering application skills)
The broad education necessary to analyze the local and
Assignment & Gate Analyze
H global impact of engineering solutions in a global N
questions Evaluate
economic, environmental and social context
Graduate will develop confidence for self-education and
acquire new technology in the computing discipline and
I H Class test & seminar Evaluate
ability and practice for multi-disciplinary tasks as a member
within the teams
J To communicate effectively N Seminars Organize
An ability to use techniques, skills, and modern engineering Class test & Group activity Solve
K N
tools necessary for engineering practice in class room Analyze
Graduates are able to participate and succeed in
competitive examinations like GATE, TOEFL, GRE, GMAT
L S GATE Develop
etc.,
(Continuing education)
The use of current application software and the design and
use of operating systems and the analysis design testing Text book problems as part Evaluate
M N
and documentation of computer programs for the use in of Assignments Solve
computer science and engineering technologies
N An ability to setup an enterprise ( Employment skills) S Placements Develop
11.7 SYLLABUS:
UNIT - I:
Basic Concepts: Rankine cycle - Schemantic layout, Thermodynamic Analysis, Concept of Mean Temperature
of Heat addition, Methods to improve cycle performance - Regeneration & reheating. Combustion: Fuels
and combustion- concept of heat of reaction-adiabatic flame temperaturestoichiometry-flue gas analysis.
UNIT - II:
Boilers: Classification - Working principles with sketches including H.P. Boilers - Mountings and Accessories -
Working principle. Steam Nozzles: Function of nozzle - Applications and Types- Flow through
nozzlesThermodynamic analysis.
UNIT - III:
Steam Turbines: Classification - Impulse turbine; Mechanical details - Velocity diagram - Effect of friction -
Power developed, Axial thrust, Blade or diagram efficiency - Condition for maximum efficiency. Reaction
Turbine: Mechanical details - Principle of operation, Thermodynamic analysis of a stage, Degree of reaction -
Velocity diagram - Parson's reaction turbine - Condition for maximum efficiency. Steam Condensers:
Requirements of steam condensing plant - Classification of condensers - Working principle of different
types.
UNIT - IV:
Gas Turbines: Simple gas turbine plant - Ideal cycle, essential components - Parameters of performance -
Actual cycle - Regeneration, Inter cooling and Reheating - Closed and Semi - closed cycles - merits and
Demerits - Brief Concepts about compressors- Combustion chambers and turbines of Gas Turbine plant.

UNIT - V:
Jet Propulsion: Principle of Operation - Classification of jet propulsive engines - Working Principles with
schemantic diagrams and representation on T-S diagram- Thrust, Thrust Power and Propulsion Efficiency -
Turbo jet engines - Needs and Demands met by Turbo jet - Schemantic Diagram, Thermodynamic Cycle,
Performance Evaluation Thrust Argumentation - Methods. Rockets: Application - Working Principle -
Classification - Propellant Type - Thrust, Propulsive Efficiency - Specific Impulse - Solid and Liquid propellant
Rocket Engines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Thermal Engineering / Rajput / Lakshmi Publications.
2. Gas Turbines / V. Ganesan / TMH.
REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. Gas Turbines and Propulsive Systems / P. Khajuria & S.P. Dubey / Dhanapatrai Pub.
2. Thermal Engineering / Ballaney / Khanna Pub.
3. Gas Turbines / Cohen, Rogers and Saravana Muttoo / Addison Wesley - Longman.
4. Thermal Engineering / R.S. Khurmi & J.S. Gupta / S. Chand Pub.
5. Thermodynamics and Heat Engines / R. Yadav / Central Book Depot.
6. Thermal Engineering / Ajoy Kumar / Narosa.
11.8 COURSE PLAN:

Date Date
Lectur Leve Session objectives planne conducte
Topics to be covered
e no. l d d
At the end of the

session the student will
be able to understand
Introduction to the subject,Basic the basics
1 L2 Concepts
At the end of the
be able to analyse the
different concepts
At the end of the

be able toUnderstand
the rankine cycle
2 L1 Rankine cycle - Schematic
At the end of the
layout,
be able to classify the
various components

At the end of the

the thermodynamic
analysis
3 L5
Thermodynamic Analysis
At the end of the
be able to analyse
various parameters
At the end of the

the concept of mean
Concept of Mean, and temperature of
4 L4 Temperature of Heat addition heat addition
At the end of the

be able to compare
both
At the end of the

be able to Understand
various methods
5 L2 Methods to improve cycle
At the end of the
performance
be able to classify
various methods
At the end of the

regenaration
6 L4 Regeneration
At the end of the
be able to calculate the
regeneration efficiency
At the end of the

7 L4
Reheating session the student will

reheating
At the end of the

reheating efficiency
At the end of the

be able to identify the
Combustion: fuels and various fuels
8 L2
combustion
At the end of the
be able to classify fuels
At the end of the

be able to define
adiabatic flame
temperature
Concepts of heat of reaction and
9 L3
Adiabatic Flame Temperature At the end of the
be able to analyse
concept of heat
reaction
At the end of the

be able to Judge the
flue gases
10 Stoichiometry and Flue gas
L1
analysis At the end of the
be able to evaluate air
fuel ratio
At the end of the

11 L2 Problems
be able to Able to do
apply various formulas

to do problems
At the end of the

efficiency and various
parameters
At the end of the

Boilers : Classification – boilers
Working
12 L2
principles – with sketches At the end of the
including , H.P.Boilers session the student will
be able to classify
different boilers
At the end of the

mountings and
Mountings and Accessories – accessories
13
L1 Working Principles
At the end of the
be able to classify
mountings and
accessories
At the end of the

nozles
Steam Nozzles : Function of
14 L3 nozzle At the end of the
applications & types session the student will
be able to draw
different types of
nozzles
At the end of the

15 L3 Flow through nozzles
the flow through

nozzles
At the end of the

be able to analyze the
flow through nozzle
At the end of the

the thermodynamic
analysis
16 Thermodynamic analysis
L1
At the end of the
be able to analyse
various parameters
At the end of the

Problems Related To The Unit to do problems
17 nptel.ac.in/courses/114105029/
L2 At the end of the
12
parameters
At the end of the

Problems Related To The Unit to do problems
18
L2 nptel.ac.in/courses/114105029/
At the end of the
12
parameters
Problems Related To The Unit At the end of the

19 L5 nptel.ac.in/courses/114105029/ session the student will
12 be able to Able to do


to do problems
At the end of the

parameters
At the end of the

be able to classify
Steam Turbines : Classification turbines
20 L6 –
At the end of the
Impulse turbine;
be able to differentiate
types of turbines
At the end of the

Mechanical details – Velocity velocity diagram
21
L2 diagram– effect of friction
At the end of the
be able to draw
velocity triangles
At the end of the

formulas
Power developed, axial thrust, At the end of the
22 L2 blade or diagram efficiency
be able to evaluate
power,axial
thrust,diagram
efficiency
At the end of the

Condition for maximum session the student will
23 L2
efficiency. be able to Understand
Condition for

maximum efficiency
At the end of the

be able to apply the
condition while
solving problems
At the end of the

to do problems
24 L1 Problems Related To The Unit
At the end of the
parameters
At the end of the

to do problems
25 L1 Problems Related To The Unit
At the end of the
parameters
At the end of the

reaction turbine
Reaction Turbine : Mechanical
26 L6 details – principle of operation At the end of the
working of reaction
turbine
27 Thermodynamic analysis of At the end of the

L2
a stage, degree of reaction – session the student will

velocity diagram be able to Understand

Thermodynamic
analysis of a stage
At the end of the

be able to draw
velocity diagram
At the end of the

parsons reaction
Parson’s reaction turbine turbine
28 L6 nptel.ac.in/courses/114105029/
12 At the end of the
be able to analyse
parson reaction turbine
At the end of the

Condition for
Condition for maximum maximum efficiency
efficiency.
29 L3
nptel.ac.in/courses/114105029/ At the end of the
12 session the student will
condition while
solving problems
At the end of the

Solving the Problems Related
to the topic to do problems
At the end of the
12
parameters
31 L1 Solving the Problems At the end of the

Related to the topic session the student will

to do problems
At the end of the

parameters
At the end of the

steam condensors
Steam Condensers :
Requirements of steam
32 L2 At the end of the
condensing plant
requirements of
condensing plant
At the end of the

different types of
Classification of condensers – condensors
working principle of different
33 L3
types. At the end of the
be able to classify
different types of
condensors
At the end of the

to do problems
34 L2 Problems solving related to the
topic
At the end of the

parameters
At the end of the

Gas Turbines : Simple gas
turbine gasturbines
35 L2 plant – Ideal cycle,
At the end of the
essential
components session the student will
be able to draw ideal
cycle
At the end of the

different performance
parameters of performance – parameters
36 L6 actual
At the end of the
cycle
be able to differentiate
the performance
parameters
At the end of the

regeneration
37 L2 Regeneration
At the end of the
be able to draw
regenerative cycle
At the end of the

Inter Cooling
38 L2 Inter Cooling
At the end of the
be able to draw Inter
Cooling cycle
39 L2 Reheating At the end of the


Reheating
At the end of the

be able to to draw
Reheating cycle
At the end of the

Closed and Semi-
Closed and Semi-closed cycles – closed cycles
40 L2 merits
At the end of the
and demerits,
be able to classify
Closed and Semi-
closed cycles
At the end of the

session the student
will be able to
understand
compressors,
Brief concepts about Combustion chambers
compressors,
41 L2 At the end of the
Combustion chambers and
turbines of Gas Turbine Plant. session the student will
be able to draw,
classify different types
of compressors,
combustion chambers
At the end of the

Problems solving related to the to do problems
42 L2
topic
At the end of the

parameters
At the end of the

principle of jet
Jet Propulsion : Principle of propulsion
43 L4
Operation
At the end of the
be able to draw jet
propulsion diagram
At the end of the

jet propulsive engines
Classification of jet propulsive
44 L3
engines At the end of the
be able to classify
propulsive engines
At the end of the

Working Principles
Working Principles with
45 L3 schematic At the end of the
Diagrams session the student will
concept in doing
problems
At the end of the

Thrust, Thrust Power Thrust, Thrust Power
At the end of the
24
be able to calculate
thrust, thrust power

At the end of the

Propulsion Efficiency
Turbo jet engines
Propulsion Efficiency Turbo jet
47 L3
engines At the end of the
be able to apply
concept in doing
problems
At the end of the

Needs and Demands
met by Turbo jet
Needs and Demands met by
48 L2
Turbo jet At the end of the
be able to analyse
Needs and Demands
met by Turbo jet
At the end of the

Schematic Diagram,
Schematic Diagram, Thermodynamic Cycle
Thermodynamic Cycle,
49 L3
nptel.ac.in/courses/114105029/ At the end of the
24 session the student will
be able to draw
Schematic Diagram,
Thermodynamic Cycle
At the end of the

session the student
will be able to
understand
Performance Evaluation Thrust
50 L3 Performance
Augmentation – Methods.
Evaluation Thrust
Augmentation –
Methods

At the end of the

session the student
will be able to apply
and calculate the
Performance
Evaluation Thrust
Augmentation –
Methods.
At the end of the

session the student
will be able to
understand rockets
Applications and
Working
Rockets : Applications and Principle,Classificatio
Working n and Propellant
51 L2 Principle, Classification and Type
Propellant
Type At the end of the
be able to draw the
basic layout and
classify the different
propellents
At the end of the

session the student
will be able to
understand,
Classification and
Propellant
Classification and Propellant Type
52 L2
Type
At the end of the
be able to classify the
different propellants
At the end of the

Thrust, Propulsive and be able to understand
Efficiency of Engines. Specific the topic
53 L4
Impulse and Solid propellant
Rocket Engines At the end of the
be able to calculate and

apply the concept

while doing problems
At the end of the

the topic
At the end of the

Liquid propellant Rocket session the student will
54 L4
Engines be able to analyze the
topic
At the end of the

be able to unde

11. 9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Program outcomes
Objectives A B C D E F G H I J K L M
I H S S
II H H S S H S H
III H S S
IV S S H
V H S H S
VI H S S S H S H
S = Supportive H = Highly Related
11.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Program outcomes
Outcomes A B C D E F G H I J K L M
a H S H S S S H S H H
b S H S S S
c H H S S S H S H
d H S S
e H S H S S H S H
f S H S S S

6. Creating /
Synthesis :
Builds a
5. Evaluating / structure or
4. Analyzing / Evaluation: pattern from
Analysis : Make diverse
Separates judgments elements. Put
material or about the value parts together to
3. Applying / concepts into of ideas or form a whole,
Blooms Taxonomy  Application: component parts materials. with emphasis
2. Understanding / Use a concept in so that its on creating a
Comprehension : a new situation organizational Key Words: new meaning or
Comprehending or unprompted structure may be Agree, structure.
1. Remembering
the meaning, use of an understood. Appraise,
/ Knowledge:
translation, abstraction. Distinguishes Assess, Award, Key Words:
Recall or retrieve
interpolation, and Applies what between facts Choose, Adapt, Build,
previous learned
interpretation of was learned in and inferences. Compare, Change,
information.
instructions and the classroom Conclude, Choose,
problems. State a into novel Key Words: Criteria, Combine,
Key Words:
Course Outcomes problem in one's situations in the Analyze, Criticize, Compile,
Choose, Define,
own words. work place. Assume, Decide, Deduct, Compose,
Find,
Categorize, Defend, Construct,
How, Label, List,
Key Words: Key Words: Classify, Determine, Create,
Match, Name,
Classify, Compare, Apply, Build, Compare, Disprove, Delete, Design,
Omit, Recall,
Contrast, Choose, Conclusion, Estimate, Develop,
Relate, Select,
Demonstrate, Construct, Contrast, Evaluate, Discuss,
Show, Spell, Tell,
Explain, Extend, Develop, Discover, Explain, Elaborate,
What, When,
Illustrate, Infer, Experiment, Dissect, Importance, Estimate,
Where, Which,
Interpret, Outline, with, Identify, Distinguish, Influence, Formulate,
Who, Why
Relate, Rephrase, Interview, Make Divide, Examine, Interpret, Happen,
Show, Summarize, use of, Model, Function, Judge, Justify, Imagine,
Translate Organize, Plan, Inference, Mark, Measure, Improve, Invent,
Select, Solve, Inspect, List, Opinion, Make up,
Utilize Motive, Perceive, Maximize,
Relationships, Prioritize, Minimize,
Simplify, Survey, Prove, Rate, Modify, Original,
Take, part, in, Recommend, Originate, Plan,
Test For, Theme Rule on, Select, Predict,
Support, value Propose,
Solution, Solve,
Suppose, Test,
Theory
Ability to tell suitable
thermodynamic laws
√ √ √
applicable for steam
turbines, nozzles, gas
turbines and jet
propulsion.
Understand the basic

concepts of turbines and
to Exhibit the knowledge
√ √ √
of various mountings and
accessories to be utilized
in steam and gas turbines
plants, rocket and jet
propulsion systems.
An ability to apply the

knowledge of first law
and second law of
thermodynamics,
continuity and
√ √ √
momentum equation.

Ability to conduct
thermodynamic analysis
√ √ √
of steam and gas turbines
and to perform the
combustion equations of
various fuels to be used
in boilers and rockets.
Ability to select the
requirements of steam
and gas turbines.
√ √
Ability to design turbines,
nozzles and other
accessories to support
steam and gas turbines.
√ √
1 Locomotive boiler is a _______________ [c]
A) Single tube, horizontal ,internally fired and stationary boiler
B) Single tube, vertical, externally fired and stationary boiler
C) multi tubular, horizontal ,internally fired and mobile boiler
D) multi tubular, horizontal ,externally fired and stationary
boiler
2 The nozzle is said to divergent nozzle [a]
A) when the cross section of the nozzle increases
continuously from entrance to exit
B) when the cross section of the nozzle decreases
C) when the cross section of the nozzle first decreases from
entrance to throat and then increases from its throat to exit
D) none of the above
3 Which of the following boiler is best suited to meet the fluctuating [ a]
demand of steam (
A) Locomotive boiler B) Lancashire boiler
C) Cornish D) Bobcock and
wilcox boiler
4 is a vertical boiler [a]
A) Cochran B) Lancashire
C) Cornish D) Babcock Wilcox
Boiler
5 Which of the following is a water tube boiler [b ]
A) Lancashire boiler B) Bobcock and
wilcox boiler
C) Locomotive boiler D) Cochran boiler
6 One kg of ethylene (C H
2 4 ) requires 2 kg of oxygen and produces 22/7 [a]
kg of carbon dioxide and
A) 9/7 kg of water B) 11/7 kg of water
C) 7/4 kg of water D) 11/4 kg of water
7 Which of the following is high pressure boiler [ c]
A) Cochran B) Lancashire
C) La-mount D) Babcock Wilcox
Boiler

8 The mass of flue gas per kg of fuel is the ratio of [ c]

A) mass of oxygen in 1 kg of flue gas to the mass of oxygen in 1 kg of
fuel
B) mass of oxygen in 1 kg of fuel to the mass of oxygen in 1 kg of flue
gas
C) mass of carbon in 1 kg of flue gas to the mass of carbon in 1 kg of
flue gas
D) mass of carbon in 1 kg of fuel to the mass of carbon in 1 kg of flue
gas
9 One kg of carbon monoxide requires 4/7 kg of oxygen and produces [c]
A) 11/3 kg of CO2
B) 7/3 kg of CO
C) 11/7 kg of CO2
D) 8/3 kg of CO
10 Artificial Draught is normally designed to produce [b]
A) Less smoke B) more draught
C) less chimney gas temperature D)all the above
11 Draught is obtained by chimney [a]
A) Natural B) Induced
C) Forced D) Mechanical
12 The diameter of internal flue tubes of a Lancashire boiler is about.....that [c]
of its shall
A) one fourth B) one third C) two fourth D) one half
13 is fitted above the combustion chamber [c]

A) Blow off cock B) Stop valve
C) Fusible Plug D) feed check valve
14 For maximum discharge of hot gases through the chimney the height [b]
of hot gas column producing draught is
A) twice the height of chimney B) equal the height of
chimney
C) half the height of chimney D) none of the above
15 In balanced draught system the pressure at force fan inlet [c]

A) is greater than pressure at chimney outlet
B) is less than pressure at chimney outlet
C) approximately same as that at chimney outlet
16 The expansion of steam in a nozzle follows [b]
A) Carnot cycle B) Rankine cycle C) joule cycle D) sterling
cycle
17 The flow through a nozzle is regarded as [ d]

A) constant volume flow B) constant pressure flow
C) isothermal flow D) isentropic flow

18 A steam nozzle converts [a]

A)heat energy of steam into kinetic energy
B) kinetic energy into heat energy of steam
C) heat energy of steam into potential energy
D) potential energy of steam into heat energy of steam
19 The nozzle is said to be a convergent nozzle [b]
A) when the cross section of the nozzle increases
B) when the cross section of the nozzle decreases
C) when the cross section of the nozzle first decreases from
entrance to throat and then increases from its throat to exit
20 Lancashire boiler is a [d]
A) stationary fire tube boiler B) internally fired
boiler
C) horizontal boiler D) none of the above
UNIT-III
1 In an impulse, steam expands [a]
A) only in blades
B) only in nozzle
C) partly in the nozzle and partly in the blades
D) none of these
2 DE-leval turbine is a [a]
A) Simple impulse turbine B) simple reaction turbine
C) impulse-reaction turbine D) none of these
3 In turbines, the fluid undergoes a continuous steady flow process and the speed of [ d ]
flow is
A)low B) very low C)high D) very high
4 In an impulse turbine [a]

A) The steam is expanded in nozzle only and there is a pressure drop and heat drop
B) The steam is expanded both in fixed and moving blades continuously
C) The steam is expended in moving blades only
D) The pressure and temperature of steam remains constant
5 De-leval turbine is mostly used [d]
A) where low speeds are required
B) for small power purposes and low speeds
C) for large power purposes
D) for small power purposes and high speeds
6 The blade fraction in the impulse reduces the velocity of steam [a]
by................while it is passes over the blades
A) 10 to 15 % B) 15 to 20 % C) 20 to 30 % D) 30 to 40 %
7 The action of steam in a steam turbine is [b]
A) static B) dynamic
C) static and dynamic D) neither static nor dynamic

8 Which one of the statement is correct for steam turbines as compared to [d]
reciprocating steam engines
A) a steam turbine develops higher speeds
B) the efficiency of steam turbine is higher
C) the steam consumption is less
D) all of these
9 Steam turbines are used for (d) [c]
A) large marine propulsion
B) electric power generation
C) direct drive of fans, compressors ,pumps
D) all of these
10 In an ideal impulse turbine, the [b]

A) Absolute velocity at the inlet of moving blade is equal to that at the outlet
B) Relative velocity at the inlet of the moving blade is equal to that at the outlet
C) Axial velocity at inlet is equal to that at the outlet
D) Whirl velocity at inlet is equal to that at the outlet
11 De-leval turbine is [a]
A) single rotor impulse turbine B) multi rotor impulse turbine
C) impulse reaction turbine D) none of these
12 In impulse turbines, when friction is neglected, the relative velocity of steam at [a]
outlet tip of the blade is .........the relative velocity of steam at inlet tip of
the blade
A) equal to B) less than C) greater than D) none of these
13 The difference of super saturated temperature and saturation temperature at that [c]
pressure is called
A) degree of super saturation B) degree of super heat
C) degree of under cooling D) none of these
14 .................. is done to reduce the rotor speed of the impulse turbine [a]
A) Compounding B) super heating C) sub cooling D) condensing
15 In ............. turbine the steam is expanded in both fixed and moving blades [c]
continuously while the stem passes over them
A) impulse B) super heated C) impulse-reaction D) sub cooled
16 De-Laval turbine is a [a]
A. single rotor impulse turbine
B. multi-rotor impulse turbine
C. impulse reaction turbine
D. none of these
17 A single stage impulse turbine with a diameter of 1.2 m runs at 3000 rpm. If the [c]
blade speed ratio is 0.42, then the inlet velocity of steam will be A) 79 m/s B)
188 m/s C)450 m/s D)900 m/s
18 Parson's turbine is a [b]
A.simple impulse turbine
B.simple reaction turbine
C.impulse-reaction turbine
D.none of these

19 Parson's reaction turbine is a __________ reaction turbine. [b]

A. 0%
B. 50%
C. 75%
D. 100%
20 The value of the reheat factor varies from [a]
A.1.02 to 1.06
B.1.08 to 1.l0
C.1.2 to 1.6
D.1.6 to 2
UNIT-IV
1 Gas turbine follows the ___________ cycle [a]
A) Brayton B) Rankine
C) Carnot D) none of these
2 The compressed air may be used [d]
A.in gas turbine plants
B. for operating pneumatic drills
C. in starting and supercharging of I.C. engines
D. all of the above
3 The maximum temperature in a gas turbine is [c]
A.200°C B.500°C C.700°C D.1000°C
4 An open cycle gas turbine works on the same cycle as that of a closed cycle gas [a]
turbine.
A.Yes B.No
5 The capacity of a compressor is expressed in [c]
A.kg/m2 B.kg/m3 C.m3/min D.m3/kg
6 The work ratio of simple gas turbine cycle depends on [d]
(a) pressure ratio
(b) maximum cycle temperature
(c) minimum cycle temperature
7 The work ratio of a gas turbine plant is defined as the ratio of [b]
(a) net work output and heat supplied
(b) net work output and work done by turbine

(c) actual heat drop and isentropic heat drop
(d) net work output and isentropic heat drop
8 The pressure ratio for an open cycle gas turbine compared to closed cycle gas [a]
turbine of same h.p. is
(a) low (b) high
(c) same (d) low/high depending on make and type
9 Open cycle gas turbine works on [a]
(a) Brayton or Atkinson cycle
(b) Rankine cycle
(c) Carnot cycle
(d) Ericson cycle
10 The fuel consumption in gas turbines is accounted for by [a]
(a) low.er heating value (b) higher heating value

(c) heating value (d) higher calorific value
11 Gas turbines for power generation are normally used [b]

(a) to supply base load requirements
(b) to supply peak load requirements
(c) to enable start thermal power plant
(d) in emergency
12 Mechanical efficiency of gas turbines as compared to I.C engines is [a]
(a) higher (b) lower
(c) same (d) depends on other considerations
13 The ratio of specific weight/h.p. of gas turbine and I.C engines may be typically of [c]
the order of
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 6 (d) 1:2
14 The air-fuel ratio in gas turbines is of the order of [b]
(a) 7 : 1 (b) 50 : 1 (c) 30 : 1 (d) 40 : 1
15 The thermal efficiency of a gas turbine as compared to a diesel plant is [c]
(a) same (b) more (c) less (d) depends on other factors
16 The pressure ratio in gas turbines is of the order of [b]
(a),2:l (b)6:1 (c) 9 : 1 (d) 12:1.
17 The hottest point in a gas turbine is [ d]
(a) at the base (b) at the tip
(c) in the center (d) between to i of the blade height
18 The following is true for an open cycle gas turbine having exhaust heat exchanger. [b]
Atmospheric air before entering the compressor is
(a) heated
(b) compressed air before entering the combustion chamber is heated
(c) bled gas from turbine is heated and readmitted for complete expansion
(d) exhaust gases drive the compressor
19 Gas turbine blades are given a rake [b]
(a) equal to zero
(b) in the direction of motion of blades
(c) opposite to the direction of motion of blades
(d) depending on the velocity
20 131. Efficiency of gas turbine is increased by [c]
(a) reheating (b) inter cooling
(c) adding a regenerator (d) all of the above
UNIT-V
1 A rocket works with maximum overall efficiency when air-craft velocity is [b]
__________ the jet velocity.
A. equal to B. one-half C. Double
2 In a jet propulsion [b]

A. the propulsive matter is ejected from within the propelled body
B. the propulsive matter is caused to flow around the propelled body
C. its functioning does not depend upon presence of air
D. none of the above

3 It is not possible to use closed gas turbine cycle in aeronautical engines because [c]
(a) it is inefficient
(b) it is bulky
(c) it requires cooling water for its operation
4 The combustion efficiency of a gas turbine using perfect combustion chamber is [d]
of the order of
(a) 50% (b) 75% (c) 85% (d) 99%
5 Ram compression in turbojet involves [a]
(a) reduction of speed of incoming air and conversion of part of it into pressure
energy
(b) compression of inlet air
(c) increasing speed of incoming air
(d) lost work
6 A jet engine works on the principle of conservation of [d]
(a) mass (b) energy
(c) angular momentum (d) linear momentum
7 In jet engines, for the efficient production of large power, fuel is burnt in an [ c]
atmosphere of
(a) vacuum (b) atmospheric air
(c) compressed air (d) oxygen alone
8 Which of the following fuels can be used in turbojet engines [ c]
(a) liquid hydrogen
(b) high speed diesel oil
(c) kerosene
(d) demethylated spirit
9 Turbo propeller has the following additional feature over the turbojet [c]
(a) propeller (b) diffuser
(c) intercooler (d) turbine and combustion chamber
10 Propulsive efficiency is defined as ratio of [d]
(a) thrust power and fuel energy
(b) engine output and propulsive power
(c) propulsive power and fuel input
(d) thrust power and propulsive power
11 In jet engines, paraffin is usually used as the fuel because of its [d]
(a) high calorific value
(b) ease of atomization
(c) low freezing point
(d) (a) and (c) above
12 A rocket engine for the combustion of its fuel [c]
(a) carries its own oxygen
(b) uses surrounding air
(c) uses compressed atmospheric air
(d) does not require oxygen
13 A rocket works with maximum overall efficiency when air craft velocity is equal [c]
to the
(a) jet velocity
(b) twice the jet velocity
(c) half the jet velocity
(d) average of the jet velocity

14 The maximum propulsion efficiency of a turbojet is attained at around following [d]

speed
(a) 550 km/hr (b) 1050km/hr
(c) 1700 km/hr (d) 2400km /hr
15 In jet propulsion power unit, the inlet duct of diverging shape is used in order to [b]
(a) collect more air
(b) convert kinetic energy of air into pressure energy
(c) provide robust structure
(d) beautify the shape
16 In jet engines the products of combustion after passing through the gas turbine are [c]
discharged into
(a) atmosphere
(b) back to the compressor
(c) discharge nozzle
(d) vacuum
17 The air entry velocity m a rocket as compared to aircraft is [d]
(a) same
(b) more
(c) less
(d) zero
18 Fighter bombers use following type of engine [a]
(a) turbo-jet
(b) turbo-propeller
(c) rocket
(d) ram-jet
19 Air-fuel ratio in a jet engine will be of the order of [d]
(a) 10: 1 (b) 15: 1 (c) 20 : 1 (d) 60 : 1
20 In jet engines the compression ratio [c]
(a) varies as square root of the speed
(b) Varies linearly to the speed
(c) varies as square of the speed
(d) varies as cube of the speed

11. 12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Tutorials
1 Discuss shortly on flue gas analysis Knowledge a
2 Discuss shortly on regenerative cycle Knowledge b
Explain the methods of increasing the thermal efficiency of
3 Knowledge e
Rankin cycle
4 Explain the adiabatic flame temperature? Knowledge c
5 Define rankine cycle Remember a
6 Define reheating cycle Remember a
7 Discuss the different operations in rankine cycle Knowledge a
8 Determine is the efficiency of rankine cycle Analysis a
9 Difference between rankine and carnot cycle Analysis a
Discuss the different methods to improve performance of
10 Knowledge b
rankine cycle
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Tutorials
During a boiler trial, the dry flue gas analysis by volume was
repeated as CO2=13%, CO=0.3%, O2=6%, N2=80.7% . The
coal analysis by mass was reported as C=62.4%, H2 =4.2%,
1 Apply a
O2=4.5 %, Moisture=15%, Ash=13.9%. Calculate: i)
Minimum air required to burn one Kg of coal. ii) Mass of air
actually supplied per Kg of coal
A steam boiler uses pulverized coal in the furnace. The
ultimate analysis of coal (By mass) as received is C=78%,
H2=3%, O2=3%,S=1%, Ash=10%, and moisture = 5%,
2 Apply a
Excess air supplied is 30%. Calculate the mass of air to the
supplied and mass of gaseous product formed per Kg of Coal
burnt.
A 35KW (IP) System engines consumes 284Kg/h at 15bar
and 250o C. If condenser pressure is 0.14bar, Determine: i)
3 Analysis a
Final condition of steam\ ii) Rankine efficiency iii) Relative
efficiency.
In a Rankin cycle, the steam at inlet to turbine is saturated at
4 a pressure of 35bar, and the exhaust pressure is Apply b
0.2bar. Calculate i) The pump work ii) Turbine work iii)

Rankine efficiency.
Consider a steam power plant operating on the ideal reheat
Rankinecycle. Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 15
MPa and 600°Cand is condensed in the condenser at a
pressure of 10 kPa. If themoisture content of the steam at the
exit of the low-pressure turbineis not to exceed 10.4 percent,
5 Analysis a
determine(a) the pressure at which the steam should be
reheated(b) the thermal efficiency of the cycle.Assume the
steam is reheated to the inlet temperature of the high-pressure
turbine.
Consider a steam power plant operating on the ideal Rankine

cycle.Steam enters the turbine at 3 MPa and 350°C and is
condensed in thecondenser at a pressure of 10 kPa.
Determine(a) The thermal efficiency of this power plant(b)
6 Analysis b
The thermal efficiency if steam is superheated to 600°C
instead of 350°C(c) The thermal efficiency if the boiler
pressure is raised to 15 MPa while the turbine inlet
temperature is maintained at 600°C. 334 373 430
Rankinecycle. Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 15
MPa and 600°Cand is condensed in the condenser at a
pressure of 10 kPa. If themoisture content of the steam at the
7 exit of the low-pressure turbineis not to exceed 10.4 percent, Analysis e
determine(a) the pressure at which the steam should be
reheated(b) the thermal efficiency of the cycle. Assume the
steam is reheated to the inlet temperature of the high-pressure
turbine.
Consider a steam power plant that operates on an ideal
reheat–regenerative Rankinecycle with one open feedwater
heater, one closed feedwater heater, and one reheater.Steam
enters the turbine at 15 MPa and 600°C and is condensed in
the condenser at apressure of 10 kPa. Some steam is
extracted from the turbine at 4 MPa for the closedfeedwater
heater, and the remaining steam is reheated at the same
8 Analysis c
pressure to 600°C.The extracted steam is completely
condensed in the heater and is pumped to 15 MPabefore it
mixes with the feedwater at the same pressure. Steam for the
openfeedwater heater is extracted from the low-pressure
turbine at a pressure of0.5 MPa.Determine, a) the fractions
of steam extracted from the turbine b) the thermal efficiency
of the cycle
A steam power plant operates on the reheatRankine cycle.
Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 12.5 Mpa and
550°C at arate of 7.7 kg/s and leaves at 2 MPa. Steamis then
9 Analysis a
reheated at constant pressure to450°C before it expands in
the low-pressureturbine. The isentropic efficiencies of
theturbine and the pump are 85 percent and 90percent,

respectively. Steam leaves thecondenser as a saturated liquid.

If themoisture content of the steam at the exit ofthe turbine is
not to exceed 5percent, determine(a) the condenser
pressure(b) the net power output(c) the thermal efficiency
Answers: (a) 9.73 kPa, (b) 10.2 MW, (c) 36.9 percent
Consider a steam power plant operating on theideal
regenerative Rankine cycle with one openfeedwater heater.
Steam enters the turbine at15 MPa and 600°C and is
condensed in thecondenser at a pressure of 10 kPa. Some
10 Analysis a
steamleaves the turbine at a pressure of 1.2 MPa andenters
the open feedwater heater. Determine the fraction of steam
extracted from the turbineand the thermal efficiency of the
cycle.
Blooms
UNIT-II
Tutorials
1 When a nozzle is said to be a convergent nozzle? Analysis b
2 When a turbine is said to have an axial discharge? comprehension a
3 How The flow through a nozzle is regarded ? comprehension b
In the absence of steam flow meter, suggest a method by
4 Analysis e
which steam quantity can be assessed in a boiler.
List out the merits and demerits of direct method of boiler
5 Knowledge b
efficiency.
In the indirect method of boiler efficiency evaluation, list any
6 two additional losses computed for solid fuel fired boilers as comprehension a
compared to liquid and gas fired boilers?
What are the main losses which are not accounted in an
7 Analysis b
indirect method of boiler efficiency testing?
In the absence of data for evaluation of surface heat loss of
boiler, what percentage value can be assumed for the
following three categories of boilers? a Industrial fire tube /
8 packaged boiler Knowledge e
b Industrial water tube boiler
c Power station boiler
9 Define evaporation ratio. Knowledge a

10 State two causes for rise in exit flue gas temperature in a boiler Knowledge a
Blooms
UNIT-II

Tutorials
With a neat sketch explain the working principle of
1 Analysis b
Babcock and Wilcox boiler
A boiler uses 18kg air per kg of fuel. Determine the min
height of the chimney required to produce a draught of
2 comprehension a
25mm of water. The mean temperature of chimney gases is
3150C and that of outside air is 270C
3 Discuss what are the boiler accessories comprehension b
The following readings were recorded during a 2 hour
boiler trial on a boiler: Feed water supplied: 14000 kg
Boiler working pressure: 10 bar Dryness fraction of the
steam: 0.96 Temperature of feed water entering
Economizer: 350C Temperature of feed water leaving
4 Analysis e
Economizer: 900C Temperature of steam leaving super
heater : 250 0 c Coal burnt : 1500 kg Calorific value of the
coal : 33500 kJ/kg Conduct Boiler Trial based on the data.
Also evaluate the overall efficiency of the boiler. Also
evaluate the equivalent evaporation from and at 1000C.
5 Draw neat sketch of Benson Boiler and Explain briefly Knowledge b
6 List out mountings and explain briefly. comprehension b
For the evaluation of boiler efficiency by direct method,
describe how the heat input can be a quantified for the
following three cases:
7 • Gaseous fuels Analysis a
• Liquid fuels
• Solid fuels
List out the major factors which affect the boiler
8 Knowledge b
performance.
List out different temperatures to be measured during the
9 Knowledge e
boiler (steam generation) audit
The measured parameters of paper industry boiler is given
below: Fuel analysis Ash content in fuel : 8.63% Moisture
in coal : 31.6% Carbon content : 41.65% Hydrogen
content : 2.0413% Nitrogen content : 1.6% Oxygen
content : 14.48% GCV of coal : 3501 kcal/kg Useful data
10 Theoretical air requirement : 4.84 kg/kg of coal Knowledge b
Theoretical CO2% : 20.67% Specific heat of air : 0.24
kcal/kg °C Ambient air temp : 30 °C Boiler efficiency :
82% Coal consumption/per hr : 12 TPH i. Estimate the
heat loss due to air infiltration. ii. Estimate heat loss
quantity as percentage of fuel input
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level

UNIT-III
Tutorials
1 What is a stage in a steam turbine?. Knowledge b
2 What is a diaphragm? Knowledge e
3 What is a radial-flow turbine? Analysis b
4 What are four types of turbine seals? comprehension a
5 In which turbine is tip leakage a problem? comprehension b
6 What are two types of clearance in a turbine? Knowledge e
7 What are four types of thrust hearings? Knowledge b
8 What is the function of a thrust bearing? Analysis e
9 What is a balance piston? Analysis b
Why should a steam or moisture separator be installed in
10 Knowledge a
the steam line next to a steam turbine?
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Tutorials
Dry saturated steam at 10bar is expanded isentropically in a
nozzle to 0.1bar. find the dryness fraction of the steam at
1 exit. Also Calculate the velocity of steam leaving the nozzle. Knowledge b
When a) Initial velocity is negligible b) Initial velocity of the
steam is 135m/s.
2 Explain the various types of steam nozzles Knowledge e
Dry saturated Steam at 5 bar with negligible velocity
expands isentropically in a convergent nozzle to 1bar and
3 Analysis b
dryness fraction 0.94. Determine the velocity of steam
leaving the nozzle.
4 Explain types of steam Nozzles comprehension a
Steam enters a group of nozzles of a steam turbine at 12bar
2200C and leaves at 1.2bar. The steam turbine develops
5 220KW with specific steam consumptions of 13.5Kg/KWh. comprehension b
If the diameter of nozzles at throat is 7mm, calculate the
number of nozzles
6 Discuss about the applications of Steam nozzles Knowledge b
Calculate the percentage increase in discharge from a
convergent-divergent nozzle expanding steam from 8.75 bar
7 Knowledge b
dry to 2 bar, when the expansion is taking place under
thermal equilibrium.
In an impulse turbine (with a single row wheel) the mean
diameter of the blades is 1.05m and speed is 3000r.p.m. The
8 nozzle angle is 180 , the ratio of the blade speed to steam Analysis e
speed is 0.42 and the ratio of the relative velocity at outlet
from the blades to that at inlet is 0.84. The outlet angle of the

blade is to be made 30 less than the inlet angle. The steam

flow is 10kg(S)s. Draw the velocity diagram for the blades
and derive the following: (a) Tangential thrust on the blades
and Axial thrust
9 What is the operating principle of a reaction turbine? Analysis b
10 What is an extraction turbine Knowledge a
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Tutorials
Name the methods employed to increase the specific output
1 Analysis b
and thermal efficiency of the plant?
2 Applications of the gas turbines? comprehension e
3 what do you mean by the term "gas turbines"? comprehension b
4 Draw a neat sketch of open cycle gas turbine ? Analysis a
5 Name various fuels used in gas turbines? Knowledge b
6 Write a short note on the fuels used in gas turbines? comprehension b
7 Explain inter cooling of open cycle gas turbines? Analysis e
8 Explain regeneration of open cycle gas turbine? Knowledge b
9 Explain reheating of open cycle gas turbine ? Knowledge a
10 Write the merits of closed cycle? Knowledge B

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Tutorials
What is the principle of a Gas Turbine? Give its
1 Analysis b
applications?
Explain the effect of operating variables on Thermal
2 comprehension e
Efficiency?
Explain the methods to improve the efficiency of a gas
3 comprehension b
turbine power plant?
Explain the gas turbine cycle with reheating with neat
4 Analysis a
sketches?
5 What is effectiveness or efficiency of a generator? Knowledge b
6 What are the fuels generally used in Gas turbines? comprehension e
Briefly explain Annular combustion chamber with a neat
7 Analysis b
sketch?
8 What are the basic requirements of a Combustion chamber? Knowledge a
9 Explain the gas turbine cycle with a regenerator? Knowledge b
Explain the effect of pressure ration on the thermal
10 Knowledge e
efficiency of a Gas turbine?
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
1 write Principle of jet propulsion? Knowledge b
Explain the role or function of diffuser nozzle in turbo
2 Knowledge e
jet gas turbine plant?
Define thrust power, propulsive power with their
3 Analysis b
formulas?
Define propulsive efficiency ,thermal efficiency with
4 comprehension b
their formulas?
5 Draw a neat sketch of turbo jet? comprehension e
Distinguish between jet propulsion and rocket
6 Knowledge b
propulsion?
7 Requirements of an ideal rocket propellant? Knowledge a
8 Write the applications of rocket? Analysis b
9 Write the advantages of Ram-jet engine? Analysis b
10 Write the advantages of pulse -jet engine? Knowledge e

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
1 What are the important properties of a good propellant? Knowledge b
2 Why liquid fuels are preferred in Rocket propulsion? Knowledge e
Describe the working principle of turbo propeller engine
3 Analysis b
with a neat sketch?
With the help of a neat diagram, explain the principle of
4 comprehension a
solid propulsion rocket?
5 Distinguish between Jet and rocket engines? comprehension b
Explain what is a Rocket Engine with a neat diagram? Give
6 Knowledge b
its applications?
7 What is bleed burn type of thrust augmentation? Knowledge e
8 Describe Reheating method of thrust augmentation? Analysis b
Name the processes involved in turbo jet engine cycle and
9 Analysis b
draw its TS diagram?
Write the differences between solid and liquid propellant
10 Knowledge e
rocket?
11. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Assignments
1 What do you mean by mean temperature Evaluate e
2 What is work ratio Remember a
3 What is specific steam consumption Understand a
4 What is effectiveness Evaluate e
5 What is efficiency ratio Evaluate e
Draw the mechanical system to show different process of
6 Remember a
rankin cycle
7 What does Rankine cycle comprises of? Understand a
In which operation of steam engines, the vapour cycle is
8 Analysis b
adopted ?
How In rankine cycle the work output from the turbine is given
9 Understand b
?
What is the range of Rankine cycle efficiency of a good steam
10 Analysis b
power plant ?
Sl.No. Questions Blooms Course

Taxonomy Outcome
Level
UNIT-I
Assignments
Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 12.5 Mpa and 550°C
at arate of 7.7 kg/s and leaves at 2 MPa. Steamis then reheated
at constant pressure to450°C before it expands in the low-
pressureturbine. The isentropic efficiencies of theturbine and the
1 pump are 85 percent and 90percent, respectively. Steam leaves Evaluate e
thecondenser as a saturated liquid. If themoisture content of the
steam at the exit ofthe turbine is not to exceed 5percent,
determine(a) the condenser pressure(b) the net power output(c)
the thermal efficiency Answers: (a) 9.73 kPa, (b) 10.2 MW, (c)
36.9 percent
In a Rankin cycle, the steam at inlet to turbine is saturated at a
pressure of 35bar, and the exhaust pressure is 0.2bar.
2 Remember a
Calculate i) The pump work ii) Turbine work iii) Rankine
efficiency.
3 Derive An Expression for Rankine Cycle efficiency Understand a
Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 12.5 Mpa and 550°C
at arate of 7.7 kg/s and leaves at 2 MPa. Steamis then reheated
at constant pressure to450°C before it expands in the low-
pressureturbine. The isentropic efficiencies of theturbine and the
4 pump are 85 percent and 90percent, respectively. Steam leaves Evaluate e
thecondenser as a saturated liquid. If themoisture content of the
steam at the exit ofthe turbine is not to exceed 5percent,
determine(a) the condenser pressure(b) the net power output(c)
the thermal efficiency Answers: (a) 9.73 kPa, (b) 10.2 MW, (c)
36.9 percent
5 Discuss Briefly about Orsat apparatus Analysis b
6 Discuss Briefly about Adiabatic Flame Temperature Understand b
Rankinecycle. Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 15 MPa
and 600°Cand is condensed in the condenser at a pressure of 10
kPa. If themoisture content of the steam at the exit of the low-
7 Evaluate e
pressure turbineis not to exceed 10.4 percent, determine(a) the
pressure at which the steam should be reheated(b) the thermal
efficiency of the cycle.Assume the steam is reheated to the inlet
temperature of the high-pressure turbine.
During a boiler trial, the dry flue gas analysis by volume was
repeated as CO2=13%, CO=0.3%, O2=6%, N2=80.7% . The
coal analysis by mass was reported as C=62.4%, H2 =4.2%,
8 Remember a
O2=4.5 %, Moisture=15%, Ash=13.9%. Calculate: i) Minimum
air required to burn one Kg of coal. ii) Mass of air actually
supplied per Kg of coal


Rankinecycle. Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 15 MPa
and 600°Cand is condensed in the condenser at a pressure of 10
kPa. If themoisture content of the steam at the exit of the low-
9 Understand a
pressure turbineis not to exceed 10.4 percent, determine(a) the
pressure at which the steam should be reheated(b) the thermal
efficiency of the cycle.Assume the steam is reheated to the inlet
temperature of the high-pressure turbine
Consider a steam power plant that operates on an ideal reheat–
regenerative Rankinecycle with one open feedwater heater, one
closed feedwater heater, and one reheater.Steam enters the
turbine at 15 MPa and 600°C and is condensed in the condenser
at apressure of 10 kPa. Some steam is extracted from the turbine
at 4 MPa for the closedfeedwater heater, and the remaining
10 steam is reheated at the same pressure to 600°C.The extracted Evaluate e
steam is completely condensed in the heater and is pumped to
15 MPabefore it mixes with the feedwater at the same pressure.
Steam for the openfeedwater heater is extracted from the low-
pressure turbine at a pressure of0.5 MPa.Determine, a) the
fractions of steam extracted from the turbine b) the thermal
efficiency of the cycle
Blooms
UNIT-II
Assignments
1 Define evaporation ratio. Understand a
2 State two causes for rise in exit flue gas temperature in a boiler Analysis b
Write the formula for evaluation of boiler efficiency by direct
3 Understand b
method.
4 . List out any four loss components in a heat balance of a boiler. Evaluate e
Find out the excess air percentage supplied for a boiler if the
5 theoretical CO2 is 20.67% and the actual CO2 measured in the Remember a
flue gas is 14%.
6 What is a boiler? Understand a
7 What are the types of boilers? Understand a
8 What is water tube boilers? Analysis b
9 What is fire tube boilers? Understand b
10 What is superheaters? Evaluate e
Blooms
UNIT-II
Assignments


1 Explain about mountings Remember a
2 Explain about accessories Understand a
3 Write the applications of nozzles? Analysis b
4 What are the types of nozzles? Understand b
5 What are the functions of nozzles? Evaluate e
6 What is flow through nozzles? Remember a
7 Describe the thermodynamic analysis of nozzles Understand a
Calculate the efficiency of the AFBC boiler by indirect method.
Fuel Analysis (% by mass) Carbon : 53.9 % Hydrogen : 3.1 %
Nitrogen : 1.1 % Sulphur : 0.3 % Ash : 23.8 % Oxygen : 10.5 %
Moisture : 7.3 % GCV : 5060 kCal / kg The boiler operating
parameters are given below. Steam pressure : 62.0 kg / cm2
Steam temperature : 470 oC Actual air supplied : 8.91 kg/kg of
8 Analysis b
coal Mass of dry flue gas : 9.31 kg/kg of coal Flue gas
temperature : 160 oC CO2 % : 14.7 CO ppm : 325 GCV of
bottom ash : 800 kCal / kg GCV of fly ash : 452.5 kCal / kg
Ratio of bottom ash to fly ash 15: 85 Loss due to hydrogen in
fuel = 3.54% Loss due to moisture in fuel = 0.93% Loss due to
moisture in air = 0.2% Surface heat losses = 2%.
In a process plant a coal fired boiler of 78% efficiency is
proposed to be replace with paddy husk fired boiler of 68%
efficiency. Calculate the cost savings for changing over to
paddy husk. Calorific value of coal = 4800 kcalAl / kg Cost of
coal = Rs. 2500 / MT GCV of paddy husk (Kcal/kg) = 3568
9 Understand b
Cost of Paddy Husk = Rs. 1100 / MT Quantity of steam
requirement = 15 TPH Enthalpy of steam = 770 kCal / kg
Enthalpy of feed water = 120 kCal / kg Annual operating hours
of boiler = 8000 hrs
Estimate the boiler efficiency by indirect method for the

following data. Type of fuel fired = Paddy husk Paddy Husk
composition: Moisture = 10.79% Mineral Matter = 16.73%
Carbon = 33.95% Hydrogen = 5.01% Nitrogen = 0.91%
10 Sulphur = 0.09% Oxygen = 32.52% GCV (Kcal/kg) = 3568 Analysis b
Cost of Paddy Husk = Rs. 1100 / MT Ambient DBT = 32 oC
Boiler parameters on Paddy Husk Flue gas temperature = 190
oC CO2 in flue gas = 12 % The losses other than exhaust loss =
28%
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Assignments
1 Draw the neat sketch of PV graph of a condenser? Analysis b
2 Define Condenser? Understand b

3 What are the functions of a condenser? Evaluate e

Write the Advantages of a Condenser in a Steam power
4 Remember a
plant?
5 Give the classification of Condensers? Understand a
6 Write the Advantages & Disadvantages of Jet Condensers? Analysis b
Write the Advantages & Disadvantages of Surface
7 Understand b
Condensers?
8 Classify Jet condensers? Analysis B
9 Compare Jet & Surface Condenser? Understand B
10 What is Condenser Efficiency? Evaluate E
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-III
Assignments
1 Classify Surface Condensers? Evaluate e
2 Define Vacuum Efficiency? Remember a
3 What is a Jet Condenser? Understand a
4 Define degree of Reaction?(Rd) Understand b
Give the conditions for maximum Efficiency of Reaction
5 Evaluate e
Turbine?
6 What is Parson Reaction Turbine? Understand b
7 What are the types of Compounding? Evaluate e
8 Sketch the velocity diagram of Reaction Turbine? Remember a
9 Draw the neat sketch of TS graph of a condenser? Understand a
10 What are the principal methods of Steam Governing? Understand b
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Assignments
1 write the demerits of closed cycle? Remember a
2 Explain liquid fuels and solid fuels? Understand a
why are back work ratios relatively high in gas turbine plants
3 Analysis b
compared to those of steam power plants?
4 Draw a neat T-S diagram of open cycle gas turbine? Understand b
5 Limitations of gas turbines? Evaluate e
6 Draw a neat sketch of a turbine plant with inter cooler? Evaluate e
7 Draw a neat sketch of a turbine plant with re-heater? Remember a
8 Draw a neat sketch of a turbine plant with regenerator? Understand a
9 Explain joule cycle or closed cycle gas turbine? Understand b
10 Explain semi-closed cycle? Analysis b

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-IV
Assignments
For an ideal cycle of a gas turbine plant, the compressor
receives air at 1 bar and 300K. The pressure ratio is 10 and
maximum temperature is 1000K.Calculate per kg of air:
1 Understand a
a.) Network output
b.) Amount of heat added
Thermal efficiency
In a gas turbine plant compressor takes in air at 1 bar and 300K
and compressed to 4 bar. Heat is added in the combustion
chamber to raise the temperature to 833K. The calorific value
of the fuel oil is 42000Kj/KgK. The air flow rate is 1.25kg/s.
2 Analysis b
The isentropic efficiencies of compressor and turbine are 85%
and 83% resp. Assume Index for compression as 1.4 and
Cp=1.0Kj/kgK and index for expansion is 1.32 and
Cp=1.05Kj/KgK. Calculate the overall efficiency of the plant
In a constant pressure open cycle gas turbine air enters at 1 bar
and 293K and leaves the compressor at 5 bar. Using the
following data:
Tempt. of gases entering the turbine = 953K
3 Pressure loss in combustion chamber = 0.1 bar Understand b
Compressor efficiency = 85%
Turbine efficiency = 80%
Combustion efficiency = 85% , Cp=1.024Kj/KgK for air and
gas Find the thermal efficiency of the cycle?
Air enters compressor of gas turbine plant at 1 bar and 300K.
The compressor pressure ratio is 10. The temperature at the
4 inlet to the first turbine stage is 1400K, and expanded to 3 bar. Understand a
The air is then reheated to 1400K and expanded in the second
stage to a pressure of 1 bar. Determine Thermal efficiency?
The air supplied to a gas turbine plant is 10kg/s. The pressure
ratio is 6 and the pressure at the inlet of the compressor is 1
bar. The compressor is two stage and is provided with a perfect
5 inter cooling. The inlet temperature of air is 300K and the Analysis b
maximum temperature is limited to 1073K. A regenerator with
an effectiveness of 0.7 is induced in the plant. Neglecting the
mass of fuel, determine the thermal efficiency of the plant?
The intake conditions of a constant pressure gas turbine are 1
bar and 288K. The maximum pressure and temperature in the
cycle are 5 bar and 853K. What must be the isentropic
6 efficiency of the turbine if the overall plant efficiency is 18%? Understand b
Assume isentropic efficiency of compressor is 80%. Take
Cp=1.004KJ/kg K for air, Cp=1.096Kj/KgK for gases and
R=0.287KJ?KgK for air and gas.

In a gas turbine plant, the compressor takes in air at 1 bar and

288K and compresses it to 4 bar. The fuel air ratio is 0.0125
and the calorific value is 41870KJ/Kg. The isentropic
7 Remember a
efficiencies of compressor and turbine are 85% and 82% resp.
Turbine inlet temperature is 1000K. Find the overall thermal
efficiency?
Air enters a compressor to open cycle, constant pressure gas
turbine plant at a pressure of 1 bar and a temperature of 300K.
The pressure ratio is 5 and the turbine inlet temperature is
8 Understand a
823K. Assume compressor and turbine efficiencies to be 85%,
determine thermal efficiency of the plant, when a regenerator
with 60% effectiveness is used?
The air enters a compressor of brayton cycle at 1 bar and
288K.The turbine inlet temperature and pressure are 923K and
9 Evaluate e
4 bar. Assuming turbine efficiency=85% and compressor
efficiency=80%. Determine the efficiency of the cycle
What is Actual Gas turbine Cycle? Explain with PV and TS
10
diagram
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
Assignments
1 Draw a neat sketch of Ram-jet engine? Understand a
2 Draw a neat sketch of pulse-jet engine? Analysis b
3 Classify rockets according to the type of propellant? Understand b
4 Classify rockets according to the number of motors? Understand a
5 Explain velocity of approach of air? Analysis b
6 What is "Ram effect" ? Understand b
7 Write the limitations of Ram-jet engine? Evaluate e
8 Write the limitations of pulse-jet engine? Remember a
9 When is the best performance of ram-jet engine obtained? Understand a
Explain the process inside the combustion chamber of "ram-
10 Evaluate e
jet engine"?
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT-V
Assignments
What are the advantages and limitations of liquid propellant
1 Understand a
rockets?
2 Differentiate Turbo prop and Turbo Jet engine? Analysis b
3 What is water-methanol injection method of thrust Understand b

augmentation?
4 Define propulsive efficiency and Thermal efficiency of jets? Remember a
5 Describe the operation of pulse jet engine with a neat sketch? Understand a
6 Differentiate between air breathing engines and rockets? Evaluate e
The effective jet velocity from a rocket is 2600m/s. The forward
flight velocity is 1300m/s and the propellant consumption is 75
7 Understand a
kg/s. Calculate a.) Thrust b.) Thrust Power c.) Propulsive
efficiency?
A turbine aircraft flies with a velocity of 260m/s at an altitude
where the air is at 0.35 bar and 233k. The compressor has a
pressure ratio of 10 and temperature of the gases at the turbine
8 inlet is 1368K. Air enters the compressor at a rate of 45.4kg/s. Analysis b
Determine
a.) The velocity of the gases at the nozzle exit
b.) The propulsive efficiency
A turbo jet aircraft is flying with a velocity of 320m/s at an
altitude where the air is 0.32 bar and tempt is 241K. The
pressure ratio across the compressor is 12, and the tempt at the
9 Understand b
turbine inlet is 1400K. Assuming ideal operations for all the
components and constant specific heat of air, determine:
Velocity of the exhaust gases & Propulsive efficiency
Air enters the diffuser of a ram jet engine at 0.25 bar, 220K with
a velocity of 855.5m/s and decelerates to negligible velocity.
10 The heat addition is 900Kj/kg of air. Air exits the nozzle at 0.25 Understand a
bar. Determine : the pressure at the diffuser exit & the velocity
at the nozzle exit

DESIGN OF MACHINE MEMBERS-II
COURSE DESCRIPTION:
Course Title DESIGN OF MACHINE MEMBERS-II
Course Code A10324
Regulation MLR15
Lectures Tutorials Practical’s Credits

Course Structure
3 1 -- 3
Course Coordinator LAKSHMIPATHIYERRA
Team of Instructors G.CHANDRA MOHANA REDDY
I. COURSE OVERVIEW:
The design of machine members-II focus mainly on design of power transmitting elements like
gears, connecting rod, crankpin, crankshafts, pistons, cylinders, bearings, belts, ropes, chain’s,
pulleys, Power screws and nuts. Design basis is strength and stiffness of the parts and selection of
material for manufacture of machine elements
II. PREREQUISITES:
Engineering mechanics, Material Science and

UG 3 4 Engineering, Kinematics of machinery, Strength
of Materials,
III. COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:

a) Marks Distributions (Traditional Evaluation methods)
End Total
Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks
Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm examinations):

examination consists of one objective paper, one subjective paper
and four assignments. The objective paper is for 10 marks and
subjective paper is for 10 marks, with duration of 1 hour 20
minutes (20 minutes for objective and 60 minutes for
subjective paper). Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple
choice questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper 75 100
contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of which, the
student has to answer 2 questions, each question carrying 5 marks.
First midterm examination shall be conducted for 2.5 units of
syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for
another 2.5 units. 5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First
two assignments should be submitted before the conduct of the
first mid, and the second two assignments
b) Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing
Able to analyze the performance factors in the Assignments

a study of journal bearings.
Midterm and University exams
Analyze various types of rolling contact bearings, Assignments

b their basic features.
Design of Belt for power transmission in n Assignments

c various application

Design of gears for power transmission in n Assignments

d various application
Design and analyze power screws and their Assignments

e applications
IV. EVALUATION SCHEME:
S. No. Component Duration Marks
2 I Assignment lot 5
TOTAL 25
4 II Assignment lot 5
TOTAL 25
MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2 MID’s TOTAL
5 EXTERNAL Examination 3 hours 75
GRAND TOTAL 100
V. COURSE OBJECTIVES & COURSE OUTCOMES:
Blooms
S.NO Course Objectives Course Outcomes
Level

I. The main objective of the course is to a. Ability to identify the

give the students confidence in analyzing selection of journal and
and designing of sliding and rolling roller bearing design from
1 data book. BL 3&4
bearings,
II. Analyzing the forces acting on various b. Ability to understand the

power transmission components and their design of piston, connecting
construction. rod and crankshaft based on
2 BL 4&5
maximum bending and
twisting moment.
III. Applying the theories of failure and c. Awareness of the basic

select optimum design size for various means of transmission
power transmission elements. system commonly used like
3 belts and gears in BL 3&4
mechanical engineering
IV. Theory of bearing and principles d. Awareness of the Gear

involved in design engineering in respect design against static and
of spur, helical, bevel and worm and dynamic loading along with
4 wear strength BL 2 & 4
worm gear drives.
V. Understanding need for bearing e. Acquaintance with the

elements and construction of various terminology, geometry and basic
5 bearings and their application for power screws concepts BL 1& 3
different purposes in power transmission. associated with screws.
VI. HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:
Program Outcomes Proficiency assessed Blooms

Level
by Taxonomy
A An ability to apply knowledge of computing, H Assignments Remember

mathematical foundations, algorithmic principles,

and computer science and engineering theory in the Midterm and

modeling and design of computer-based systems to University
real-world problems (fundamental engineering
analysis skills) examinations
Design handbook
Assignments
An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well
Midterm and
B as to analyze and interpret data (information retrieval H Evaluate
University
skills)
examinations
Assignments
An ability to design , implement, and evaluate a
computer- based system, process, component, or Midterm and
program to meet desired needs, within realistic
C S University Analyze
constraints such as economic, environmental, social,
political, health and safety, manufacturability, and examinations
sustainability (Creative Skills)
Design handbook
An ability to function effectively on multi-

D N --- Apply
disciplinary teams (team work)
Assignments
An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate Midterm and
and use the appropriate computing and engineering
E H University Analysis
requirements for obtaining its solution (engineering
problem solving skills) examinations
Design handbook
An understanding of professional, ethical, legal,

F security and social issues and responsibilities N --- ---
Mini projects
An ability to communicate effectively both in writing
G S Study in industries. ----
Technical seminars
The broad education necessary to analyze the local

H and global impact of computing and engineering N --- ----
solutions on individuals, organizations, and society

(engineering impact assessment skills)
Application for
Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage major projects.
I in continuing professional development and life-long H Technical workshops Evaluate
learning (continuing education awareness) & Publication
of technical papers
A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social

J N --
awareness)
Major project work

An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools &
K necessary for computing and engineering practice H attending technical ---

(practical engineering analysis skills) workshops exposure
to experts lectures
An ability to apply design and development

principles in the construction of software and
L N --- Understand
hardware systems of varying complexity (software
hardware interface)
An ability to recognize the importance of

professional
development by pursuing postgraduate studies or faceExposure under

industry institute
M competitive examinations that offer challenging and H Create
interaction projects
rewarding careers in computing (successful career in various industries
and
VII. SYLLABUS:

DESIGN OF MACHINE MEMBERS-II
NOTE: Design Data Book permitted. Design of all components should include design for strength
under rigidity a part from engineering performance requirements.
UNIT – I
Bearings: Types of Journal Bearings-lubrication-Bearing Modulus-Full and Partial bearings-

clearance ratio-Heat Dissipation of bearings,-Bearing materials-Journal bearing design - Ball and
Roller Bearings- Static loading of Ball and Roller Bearings, Bearing Life.
UNIT – II
Engine Parts:
Connecting rod: thrust in connecting rod-stress due to whipping action on connecting rod ends-
cranks and crank shafts, strength and proportions of over hung and center cranks-crank pins, Crank
shafts.
Pistons, Forces acting on piston - construction Design and proportions of piston, Cylinder, Cylinder
liners.
UNIT – III
Design of Power Screws:
Design of screw, Square, ACME, Buttress screws, design of nut, compound screw, differential
screw, ball screw-possible failures.
UNIT – IV
Power Transmission Systems and Pulleys: Transmission of power by Belt and Rope Drives,
Transmission efficiencies, Belts-Flat and V types-Ropes-Pulleys for belt and rope drives, Materials,
Chain drives.
UNIT – V
Spur & Helical Gear Drives:

Spur gears – Helical Gears - Load concentration factor-Dynamic load factor, Surface Compressive
Strength, Bending Strength - Design analysis of spur gears – Estimation of center distance, Module
and face Width, Check for plastic deformation, Check for dynamic and wear considerations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V. Bandari(2011), A Text Book of Design of Machine Elements, 3rd Editio, Tata McGraw Hill
Education (P) Ltd. New Delhi India.
2. R.L.Norton (2006), Machine design (An Integrated Approach), 2nd Edition, Pearson
Publishers, Chennai, India.
3. Machine design/Padya & Shah/Charotar Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.
4. Machine design/PV Soundarajan Murthy and N. Shanmugham/Anuradha Publishers.
REFERENCES
1. Shigley, J.E, (2011), Mechanical Engineering Design, 9th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, India.
2. S. M.D. Jalaludin, (2011), Machine Design, 3rd Edition, Anuradha Publishers, Kumbakonam,
Chennai, India.
3. P. Kannaiah, (2012), Machine Design, 2nd Edition, Scitech Publications India Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi, India.
4. Design of Machine Elements/V M Faires
5. Machine Design/ UC Jindal/Pearson.
6. Machine Design/ R.S.Khurmi.
7. Design of Machine Elements Volume-1/ T. Krishna Rao/JK International Publishing House
IX. COURSE PLAN:
At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning
Outcomes.
Course
Blooms Course Learning Referenc
L. No. Learning Topics to be covered
Level Outcomes e
Outcomes

UNIT-I
SLIDING CONTACT
At the end of section the BEARINGS:
1 L2 a T1, R2
student will be able to Types of journal bearings
understand the main role of
journal bearings in http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
engineering field 37/38
Basic modes of lubrication

At the end of section the Types of journal bearings
2 L2 student will be able to a T1, R2
understand use of http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
lubrication purpose 37/38
Bearing construction
Types of journal bearings

3 L4 At the end of section the a T1, R3
student will be able to http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
Illustrate various parts of 37/38
bearing
Bearing design
At the end of section the
4-8 L4 a T1, R2
Analyze the loads acting on
bearings 37/41
Bearing materials
9 L1 student will be able to a T1, R2
Recognize various http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
materials for 37/41
bearings
10 Selection of lubricants
L1 student will be able to a T1, R1
Select the lubricants for http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
various applications 37/38

Types of rolling contact bearings

11-12 L6 a T1, R2
Categorize rolling contact
bearings 37/38
Selection of bearing type

13-14 L2 student will be able to a T1, R1
Discuss types of bearings http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
for required application. 37/38
Selection of bearing life

15-16 L2 student will be able to a T1, R2
understand the life of http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
bearing 37/38
Static loading of ball & roller

bearings.
Describe static rating of
17-19 L1 a Types of journal bearings T1, R2
roller bearings
37/49
UNIT-II T1, R3
Design of IC Engine
b components: Connecting Rod
20 L2 At the end of section the
student will be able to http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121040
Explain various parts of 33/
connecting Rod
At the end of section the Thrust in Connecting Rod

student will be able to
21 L4 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121040 T1, R2
Illustrate about thrust b
acting on a connecting Rod 33/
At the end of section the b Stress due to Whipping action on

22-24 L6
student will be able to connecting rod ends.
Categorize & Describe

about stresses induced and http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121040

find suitable cross section 33/
T1, R2
Cranks and crankshafts

b
25 L3 Classify various types of
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121040 T1, R2
crankshafts. 33/
b Strength and proportions of

crankshafts
26-28 L3 Calculate sizes of different T1, R1
parts of crankshaft and http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121040
crank pin 33/
Piston, Forces acting on piston

29-30 L2 student will be able to b http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121040
Explain various parts of the 33/ T1, R3
piston and forces acting on
each of these parts
At the end of section the Construction design and

student will be able to b proportions of piston
31-32 L4 Construct piston diagram T1, R2
and generate formula http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121040
33/

student will be able to Cylinder, cylinder liners
Describe with a sketch and
L1 b http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121040 T1, R2
33 explain function of cylinder 33/
liner
UNIT - III
At the end of section the Design of power screws : Design

34 L1 student will be able to e of screw T1, R1
Describe the terminology http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121051
of power screws 24/18

At the end of section the Square, ACME, Buttress screws

35 L4 e http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121051 T1, R2
Illustrate these types of
screws 24/18
At the end of section the Design of nut

36 L3 e http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121051 T1, R2
Calculate the sizes of nut
and screw 24/19
At the end of section the Compound screw ,differential

student will be able to screw, ball screw-possible failures
37-38 L1 Describe construction and e T1, R2
explain failure mechanism 24/19
Compound screw ,differential

At the end of section the screw, ball screw-possible failures
39 L1 student will be able to e T1, R2
know possible failures in http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121051
the screws and nuts. 24/19
UNIT-IV
Power Transmission systems,
pulleys: Transmission of power
40-42 Describe various types of c T1, R2
L1 by belt drives Rope drives
belt drives and
transmission power http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121051
24/30

student will be able to Transmission efficiencies.
Define efficiency of power T1, R3
43 L1 c http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121051
transmission and explain 24/30
factors effecting efficiency
At the end of section the Belts-Flat and V belts

44-45 L2 c http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121051 T1, R2
Calculate sizes of flat and
V-belt 24/30
At the end of section the Pulleys for belt and rope drives,
46-47 L3 student will be able to c T1, R2
materials
Distinguish different

pulleys http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121051
24/30
for belt and rope drives

Chain drives
48 L3 Calculate chain length and c http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121051 T1, R2
24/30
Speed ratios
UNIT-IV:
Spur Gear Drives: spur gears
49 L2 student will be able to d T1, R1
Explain loss of gearing http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
37/10
At the end of section the T1, R2

Describe load transmission
Load concentration factor-
50 L1 d
between gear teeth and dynamic load factor
Illustrate dynamic load http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061

factors 37/12
At the end of section the T1, R2

Compare the equations for Surface compressive strength-
51 L2 d bending strength
compressive and bending
strength 37/12
At the end of section the Design analysis of spur gear

52 L2 d http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061 T1, R2
Explain Procedure design
of spur gears 37/14
Estimation of center distance,

module and face width, check for
53-54 L2 d plastic deformation T1, R2
Discuss relationships
between these parameters
37/12

At the end of section the Check for dynamic and wear

Describe the governing Considerations
55 L1 d T1, R1
equation and find the http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
dynamic and wear strength 37/12
At the end of section the Helical Gear Drives:
56 L4 student will be able to d Helical gears T1, R3

Distinguish between the
two Gears http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
37/19
At the end of section the Load concentration factor-

student will be able to dynamic load factor
Describe load transmission
57 L1 d http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
between gear teeth and 37/20
illustrate dynamic load
factors T1, R2
At the end of section the Surface

58 L4 Compare the equations for d compressive strength-bending T1, R2
compressive and bending strength
strength http://nptel.ac.in/courses/

59-60 L2 Explain Procedure for c Design analysis of Helical
design of helical and bevel http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
gears 37/20 T1, R1
Estimation of center distance,

At the end of section the module and
student will be able to face width, check for plastic
61-62 L2 Discuss the relationships d T1, R2
deformation
between these parameters http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061
37/20

T1, R2

63-64 L1 student will be able to d Check for dynamic and wear
Describe the governing considerations
equation and find the http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1121061

dynamic and wear strength 37/20
X.MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Objective
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
I H S H H S H H S
II H S H S H S
III H H
IV H S H S H S
V H S H H S H H S
S=Supportive H=Highly Related
XI. MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
A B C D E F G H I J k L M
a H H H S H H

b H S S H H
c H H H S H H
d H S H
e H H S H S H H H
5. valuating /
6. reating /
Evaluation:
4. Analyzing / Synthesis :
Analysis :
Make
Builds a
judgments
Separates structure or
about the value
material or pattern from
3. Applicationing / of ideas or
concepts into diverse
Application: materials.
Blooms Taxonomy  component parts elements.
2. Comprehensioning /
so that its Put parts
Comprehension : Use a concept in a
1. Knowledgeing organizational together to
new situation or
/ Knowledge: structure may be Key Words: form a
Comprehending the unprompted use
understood. whole, with
meaning, translation, of an abstraction.
Recall or retrieve Distinguishes Agree, emphasis on
interpolation, and Applies what was
previous learned between facts Appraise, creating a
interpretation of learned in the
information. and inferences. new meaning
instructions and classroom into
Assess, Award, or structure.
problems. State a novel situations in
Course Outcomes Choose,
problem in one's own the work place.
Compare, Key Words:
Key Words: words. Key Words: Conclude,
Criteria, Adapt, Build,
Choose, Define, Analysis, Assume, Change,
Key Words:
Find, Categorize, Criticize,
Key Words:
Classify, Decide, Deduct, Choose,
Application, Build,
How, Label, List, Combine,
Classify, Compare, Choose, Defend,
Match, Name, Compare, Compile,
Contrast, Demonstrate, Determine,
Omit, Recall, Conclusion, Compose,
Explain, Extend, Construct, Disprove,
Relate, Select, Construct,
Illustrate, Infer, Develop, Estimate,
Show, Spell, Tell, Contrast, Create,
Interpret, Outline, Experiment, with, Evaluation,
What, When, Discover, Dissect,
Relate, Rephrase, Identify,
Where, Which, Distinguish, Delete,
Interview, Make Explain,
Who, Why Divide, Examine, Design,
Show, Summarize, use of, Model, Importance,
Function, Develop,
Translate Organize, Plan, Influence,
Inference, Discuss,
Select, Solve, Interpret,
Inspect, List, Elaborate,
Utilize Judge, Justify,
Motive, Estimate,
Mark, Measure,
Relationships,
Opinion,
Simplify, Survey, Formulate,
Perceive,
Take, part, in, Happen,
Prioritize,
Test For, Theme Imagine,
Prove, Rate,
Improve,
Recommend,
Invent, Make
Rule on, Select,

Support, value up,
Maximize,
Minimize,
Modify,
Original,
Originate,
Plan, Predict,
Propose,
Solution,
Solve,
Suppose,
Test, Theory
a. Ability to identify the

selection of journal and
roller bearing design
√ √
from data book.
b. Ability to
understand the
design of piston,
connecting rod and √ √
crankshaft based on
maximum bending
and twisting moment.
c. Awareness of the
basic means of
transmission system
commonly used like
belts and gears in √ √
mechanical
engineering
d. Awareness of the
Gear design against
static and dynamic √ √
loading along with
wear strength
e. Acquaintance with
the terminology,
geometry and basic
power screws √ √
concepts associated
with screws.

OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
UNIT – I
1. In a full journal bearing the angle of contact of the bearing with the journal is [D]
(a) 1200
(b) 180O
(c) 270O
(d) 360O
2. A sliding bearing which can support steady loads without any relative motion between the journal
and the bearing is called [D]
(a) Zero film bearing
(b) Boundary lubricated bearing
(c) Hydrodynamic lubricated bearing
(d)Hydrostatic lubricated bearing
3. In a boundary lubricated bearing, there is a............................... of lubricant between the journal

And the bearing. [B]
(a) Thick film
(b) Thin film
(c) Zero Film
(d) None of The Above
4. The property of bearing material which has ability to accommodate small particles of dust, grit
etc., without scoring the material of the journal, is called [C]
(a) Bondability
(b) Embeddability

(c) Conformability
(d) Fatigue strength
5. In thrust bearings, the load acts [B]
(a) Along the axis of rotation
(b) parallel to the axis of rotation
(c) Perpendicular to the axis of rotation
(d) In any direction
6. When the length of the journal is equal to diameter of the journal, then the bearing is said to be [A
]
(a) Short bearing
(b) Long bearing
(c) Medium bearing
(d) square bearing
7. When the bearing is subjected to large fluctuations of load and heavy impacts, the * bearing
Characteristic number should be ....................................................the bearing modulus. [C]
(a) 5 times
(b) 10 times
(c) 15 times
(d) 20 times
8. Teflon is used for the bearings because of [D]
(a) low coefficient of friction
(b) better heat dissipation
(c) smaller space consideration

9. When the shaft rotates in anticlockwise direction at slow speed in a bearing then it will [A]
(a) have contact at the lowest point of contact
(b) move towards the right of the bearing making metal to metal contact
(c) move towards the left of the bearing making metal to metal contact
(d) move towards the right of the bearing making no metal to metal contact
10. If Z = Absolute viscosity of the lubricant in kg/m-s, N = speed of the journal in r.p.m., and p
=bearing pressure in N/mm2 , then the bearing characteristic number is [ A ] (a)ZN/p
(b)Zp/N
(c)Z/pN
(d) pN/Z
11. In case of full journal bearing, the angle of contact of the bushing with the journal is [ D ]
(a) 600
(b) 900
(c) 1800
(d) 3600
12. In case of partial bearing, the angle of contact of the bushing with the journal is [C]
(a) 600
(b) more than 1800
(c) less than 1800
(d) 3600
13. In case of partial bearing, the angle of contact of the bushing with the journal is usually [ A ]

(a) 1200
(b) 1800
(c) 450
(d) 3600
14. For hydrodynamic lubricant [ B]
(a) There should be relative motion between the surfaces of the journal and the bearing and wedge
shaped clearance space
(b) There should be external source like pump to supply lubricant under pressure
(c) There should be elastic deformation of the parts in contact
(d) There should be metal to metal contact.
15. For hydrostatic lubricant [B ]
16. For elasto-hydrodynamic lubrication [ C]

17. Boundary lubricated bearing is [ B]
(a) Thick film bearing
(b) Thin film bearing
(c) hydrodynamic bearing
(d) hydrostatic bearing
18. In hydrodynamic bearing, hen the shaft begins to rotate clockise direction. [A]
(a) The journal climbs to the right side of the bearing without metal to metal contact
(b) The journal climbs to the left side of the bearing without metal to metal contact
(c) The journal sinks down to the bottom of the bearing
(d) The journal is at the center of the bearing
19) The rolling contact bearings are known as [D]
(a) Thick lubricated bearings
(b) Plastic bearings
(c) Thin lubricated bearings
(d) antifriction bearings
20)The bearing of medium series have capacity....................Over the light series. [C]
(a) 10 to 20%
(b) 20 to 30%
(c) 30 to 40%
(d) 40 to50%
UNIT - II

1. The cylinders are usually made of [A]
(a) cast iron or cast steel
(b) aluminium
(c) stainless steel
(d) copper
2. The length of the cylinder is usually taken as [D]
(a) equal to the length of piston
(b) equal to the length of stroke
(c) equal to the cylinder bore
(d) 1.5 times the length of stroke
3. The skirt of piston [ B]
(a) is used to withstand the pressure of gas in the cylinder
(b) acts as a bearing for the side thrust of the connecting rod
(c) is used to seal the cylinder in order to prevent leakage of the gas past the piston
4. The side thrust on the cylinder liner is usually taken as ........... of the maximum gas load [C]
(a)1/5
(b) 1/8
(c) 1/10
(d) 1/5
5. The length of the piston usually varies between [ A]

(a) D and 1.5 D
(b) 1.5 D and 2 D
(c)2D and 2.5 D
(d) 2.5 D and 3 D
where D = Diameter of the piston.
6. In designing a connecting rod, it is considered like ....... for buckling about X-axis. [B]
(a) both ends fixed
(b) both ends hinged
(c) one end fixed and the other end hinged
(d) one end fixed and the other end free
7. Which of the following statement is wrong for a connecting rod? [ D]
(a) The connecting rod will be equally strong in buckling about X-axis, if Ixx = 4 Iyy.
(b) If Ixx> 4 Iyy, the buckling will occur about Y-axis.
(c) If Ixx< 4Iyy,the buckling will occur about X-axis.
(d) The most suitable section for the connecting rod is T-section.
8. The crankshaft in an internal combustion engine [ C]
(a) is a disc which reciprocates in a cylinder
(b) is used to retain the working fluid and to guide the piston
(c) converts reciprocating motion of the piston into rotary motion and vice versa
9. The rocker arm is used to actuate the inlet and exhaust valves motion as directed by the [A]
(a) cam and follower

(b) crank
(c) crankshaft
(d) none of these
10. For high speed engines, a rocker arm of........... should be used. [ B]
(a) rectangular section
(b) I-section
(c) T-section
(d) circular
11. I.C. engine cylinder is made of [ A]
(a) cast iron
(b) plain carbon steel
(c) alloy steel
(d) copper
12.The ratio of length of stroke to cylinder bore (I/D) is usually [C]
(a) 1/2
(b) 5
(c) 1.5
(d) 1/4
13.Cylinder thickness is calculated on the basis of, [D]
(a) radial stress
(b) residual stress
(c) whipping stress

(d) circumferential hoop stress
14.The length of cylinder is taken as, [C]
(a) equal to cylinder diameter
(b) equal to length of stroke
(c) 1.15 times of stroke length
(d) 1.5 times length of piston.
15.Piston is made of [C]
(a) Alloy steel
(b) plain carbon steel
(c) cast iron
(d) brass
16.The function of piston skirt is [A]
(a) To provide bearing surface for side thrust
(b) to support gas load
(c) to support gudgeon pin
(d) to seal the cylinder and prevent leakage of oil piston
17.The ratio of side thrust on piston to maximum gas force on piston head is, [D]
(a) 1
(b) 0.5
(c) 0.25
(d) 0.1

18.For buckling consideration, the end conditions of connecting rod in plane of motion are, [B]
(a) one end is free and the other fixed
(b) both ends are hinged
(c) both ends are fixed
(d) one end is fixed and the other hinged
19.The condition for connecting rod to be equally stron in plane of motion (XX) and a plane
perpendicular to plane motion (YY) is, [B]
(a) Ixx = Iyy
(b) Ixx = 4 Iyy
(c) 4 Ixx = Iyy
(d) Ixx = 2 Iyy
20.Connecting rod is made of, [B]
(a) aluminium
(b) medium carbon steel
(c) cast iron
(d) babbits
UNIT - III
1. Which of the following screw thread is adopted for power transmission in either direction? [ B ]
(a) Acme threads
(b) Square threads
(c) Buttress threads
(d) Multiple threads

2. Multiple threads are used to secure [B]
(a) low efficiency
(b) high efficiency
(c) high load lifting capacity
(d) high mechanical advantage
3. Screws used for power transmission should have [B]
(a) low efficiency
(b) high efficiency
(c) very fine threads
(d) strong teeth
4. A screw jack has square threads and the lead angle of the thread is α. The screw jack will be self-
locking when the coefficient of friction (μ) is [A]
(a) μ > tan α
(b) μ = sin α
(c) μ = cot α
(d) μ = cosec α
5. To ensure self locking in a screw jack, it is essential that the helix angle is [B]
(a) larger than friction angle
(b) smaller than friction angle
(c) equal to friction angle
(d) such as to give maximum efficiency in lifting
6. A screw is said to be self locking screw, if its efficiency is [A]
(a) less than 50%

(b) more than 50%
(c) equal to 50%
(d) none of these
7. A screw is said to be over hauling screw, if its efficiency is [B]
(a) less than 50%
(b) more than 50%
(c) equal to 50%
(d) none of these
8. While designing a screw in a screw jack against buckling failure, the end conditions for the screw
are taken as [D]
(a) both ends fixed
(b) both ends hinged
(c) one end fixed and other end hinged
(d) one end fixed and other end free.
9. The load cup of a screw jack is made separate from the head of the spindle to [D]
(a) enhance the load carrying capacity of the jack
(b) reduce the effort needed for lifting the working load
(c) reduce the value of frictional torque required to be countered for lifting the load
(d) prevent the rotation of load being lifted
10. Which of the following screw thread is used for jacks, vices and clamps? [A]
(a) Square threads
(b) trapezoidal threads
(c) buttress threads

(d) acme threads
11. Which of the following screw thread is used transmitting power in either direction? [D]
(a) Square threads
(d) a and b
12. Which of the following screw thread is used transmitting force in one direction? [C ]
(a) Square threads
(d) V threads
13. Which of the following screw thread is adaptable to split type nut? [B]
(a) Square threads
(d) V threads
14. Which of the following screw thread is stronger than other threads? [C]
(a) Square threads
(d) V threads

15. Which of the following screw thread is used for lead screw of lathe? [B]
(a) Square threads
(d) V threads
16. Multiple threads are used for? [A]
(a) high efficiency
(b) high mechanical advantages
(c) low efficiency for self locking
(d) high load carrying capacity
17. Power screws for transmission of power should have? [A]
(a) high efficiency
(b) low efficiency
(c) low efficiency for self locking
(d) over hauling characteristic
18. For self locking screw [A]
(a) α > ∅
(b) α < ∅
(c) μ < tan α
(d) μ = Cosec α
where α = helix angle ∅ = friction angle μ = coefficient of friction
19. For overhauling screw? [B]

(a) ∅ > α
(b) ∅ < α
(c) ∅ = α
where α = helix angle ∅ = friction angle
20. A screw is said to be self locking if its efficiency is [C]
(a) equal to 50%
(b) more than 50%
(c) less than 50%
UNIT - IV
1. The material suitable for the belts used in agricultural equipments is [B]
(a) cotton
(b) rubber
(c) leather
(d) balata gum
2. The power transmitted by means of a belt depends upon [D]
(a) velocity of the belt
(b) tension under which the belt is placed on the pulleys
(c) arc of contact between the belt and the smaller pulley

3. When the speed of belt increases, [D]
(a) the coefficient of friction between the belt and pulley increases
(b) the coefficient of friction between the belt and pulley decreases
(c) the power transmitted will decrease
(d) the power transmitted will increase
4. The tension in the slack side of the belt is ............ the tension in the tight side of the belt. [ B ]
(a) equal to
(b) less than
(c) greater than
(d)None of The Above
5. In a flat belt drive, the belt can be subjected to a maximum tension (T) and centrifugal tension
(TC). [ C ]
The condition for transmission of maximum power is given by
(a) T = TC
(b) T = 2 TC
(c) T = 3 TC
(d) C 3 = TT
6. When a belt drive is transmitting maximum power, [D]
(a) effective tension is equal to the centrifugal tension
(b) effective tension is half of the centrifugal tension
(c) driving tension in slack side is equal to the centrifugal tension
(d) driving tension in tight side is twice the centrifugal tension
7. All stresses produced in a belt are [B]
(a) compressive stresses

(b) tensile stresses
(c) both tensile and compressive stresses
(d) shear stresses
8. For maximum power, the velocity of the belt will be [C]
(a)Tm
(b)2Tm
(c)3Tm
(d) Tm/3
9. The centrifugal tension in the belt [ C]
(a) increases the power transmitted
(b) decreases the power transmitted
(c) has no effect on the power transmitted
(d) is equal to maximum tension on the belt
10. The included angle for the V-belt is usually [B]
(a) 20° – 30°
(b) 30° – 40°
(c) 40° – 60°
(d) 60° – 80°
11. The groove angle of the pulley for V-belt drive is usually [ C]
(a) 20° – 25°
(b) 25° – 32°
(c) 32° – 38°

(d) 38° – 45°
12. A V-belt designated by A-914-50 denotes [A]
(a) a standard belt
(b) an oversize belt
(c) an undersize belt
(d) none of these
13. The wire ropes make contact at [ A]
(a) bottom of groove of the pulley
(b) sides of groove of the pulley
(c) sides and bottom of groove of the pulley
(d) any where in the groove of the pulley
14. The power transmitted by belt drive depends upon [D]
a) Belt velocity
b) initial belt tension
c) arc of contact
d) all of the above
15. The suitable material for belt in agriculture machinery is [B]
(a) Leather
(b) rubber
(c) cotton duck
(d) balata gum

16. The suitable material for belt used in floor mill is [C]
(a) Leather
(b) rubber
(c) canvas or cotton duck
(d) balata gum
17. When the belt speed increases [C]
(a) Power transmitted increases
(b) Power transmitted decreases
(c) Power transmitted increases to a maximum values and then decreases
(d) Power transmitted remains the same
18. The creep in the belt is due to [C]
(a) Effect of temperature on belt
(b) material of belt
(c) unequal extensions in the belt due to tight and slack side tensions
(d) stresses beyond elastic limit of belt material
19. The coefficient of friction in belt drive depends upon [C]
(a) Material of belt
(b) material of pulley
(c) material of belt and pulley
(d) belt velocity
20. Which is positive drive? [C]
(a) Flat belt drive

(b) V belt drive
(c) crossed belt drive
(d) timing belt
UNIT - V
1. The size of gear is usually specified by [B]
(a) pressure angle
(b) pitch circle diameter
(c) circular pitch
(d) diametral pitch
2. A spur gear with pitch circle diameter D has number of teeth T. The module m is defined as [A]
(a) m = d / T
(b) m = T / D
(c) m = π D / T
(d) m = D.T
3. The product of the diametral pitch and circular pitch is equal to [C]
(a)1
(b)1/π
(c) π

(d) π × No. of teeth
4. The backlash for spur gears depends upon [D]
(a) module
(b) pitch line velocity
(c) tooth profile
(d) both (a) and (b)
5. The contact ratio for gears is [C]
(a) zero
(b) less than one
(c) greater than one
(d) none of these
6. If the centre distance of the mating gears having involute teeth is increased, then the pressure
angle [A]
(a) increases
(b) decreases
(c) remains unchanged
(d) none of these
7. The form factor of a spur gear tooth depends upon [D]
(a) circular pitch only
(b) pressure angle only
(c) number of teeth and circular pitch
(d) number of teeth and the system of teeth

8. Lewis equation in spur gears is used to find the [C]
(a) tensile stress in bending
(b) shear stress
(c) compressive stress in bending
(d) fatigue stress
9. Lewis equation in spur gears is applied [D]
(a) only to the pinion
(b) only to the gear
(c) to stronger of the pinion or gear
(d) to weaker of the pinion or gear
10. When the axes of two shafts are parallel, use [D]
(a) crossed helical gears
(b) bevel
(c) worm gears
(d) spur or helical gear
11. When the axes of two shafts are perpendicular and intersecting, use [B]
(a) spur gears
(b) bevel gears
(c) worm gears
(d) helical gears
12. When the axes of two shafts are perpendicular and non-intersecting, use [C]

(a) spur gears
(b) bevel gears
(c) worm gears
(d) helical gears
13. When the axes of two shafts are non-parallel and intersecting, use [B]
(a) helical gears
(b) crossed helical gears
(c) straight bevel gears
(d) spiral bevel gears
14. When the velocity ratio is high and space is limited, use [C]
(a) spur gears
(b) bevel gears
(c) worm gears
(d) helical gears
15. Which of the following type of gears are free from axial thrust? [A]
(a) herringbone gears
(b) bevel gears
(c) worm gears
(d) helical gears
16. Which of the following type of gears are used for noiseless operation? [D]
(a) spur gears
(b) bevel gears

(c) worm gears
(d) helical gears
17. Which of the following type of gears provide maximum velocity ratio? [C]
(a) spur gears
(b) bevel gears
(c) worm gears
(d) helical gears
18. Cycloidal tooth gears are used in [C]
(a) automobile gearbox
(b) machine tool gearbox
(c) spring driven watches and clocks
(d) materials handling equipment
19. If T is the actual number of teeth on a helical gear and φ is the helix angle for the teeth, the
ormative number of teeth is written as [A]
(a) T sec3 φ
(b) T sec2 φ
(c) T/sec3φ
(d) T cosec φ
20. In helical gears, the distance between similar faces of adjacent teeth along a helix on the pitch
cylin-ders normal to the teeth, is called [A]
(a) normal pitch
(b) axial pitch
(c) diametral pitch

(d) module

TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:
S.No. UNIT-I BLOOMS COURSE

TAXONOMY OUTCOMES
SHORT QUESTIONS LEVEL
1 What is the difference between full journal & partical Synthesis a

journal bearings?
2 List the important physical characteristics of a good Comprehension a

bearing material?
3 Give a systematic design of the journal bearing: Application a
4 List the important physical characteristics of a good Comprehension a

bearing material?
5 What are the commonly used materials for sliding contact Knowledge a
bearings?
6 Define the following terms as applied to rolling contact Knowledge b

bearings: Basic static load rating & Static equivalent load.
7 How do you express the life of a bearing? What is an Knowledge b

average of median life?
8 Explain how the following factors influence the life of a Application b

bearing?
a. Load
b. Speed
c. Temperature
d.Reliability.
9 What are rolling contact bearings? Discuss their Application b

advantages over sliding contact bearings.
10 What are the types of rolling contact bearings. Synthesis b
UNIT – I
LONG QUESTIONS

1 A 3 kN load is supported by a journal bearing of 75mm Application c

diameter and 75mm long. Diametral clearance is 0.05mm
and the bearing is lubricated by an oil of 0.0207 Pa
viscocity at operating temperature. Determine the
maximum speed of rotation of bearing when it is capable
of dissipating 80 watts by heat transfer.
2 Design a suitable journal bearing for a centrifugal pump Application c

from the following available data:
Load on the bearing=13.5kN;
Diameter of the journal

=80mm; Speed=1440r.p.m;
Bearing characteristic number at the working temperature

(750C)=30;
3 A journal bearing is to be designed for a centrifugal pump Application a

for the following data:
Load on the journal=12kN; Diameter of the journal =
75mm;
Speed=1440 r.p.m;
Atmospheric temperature of the oil = 160C;
Operating temperature of the oil=600C;

absolute viscosity of oil at 600C=0.023kg/m-s.
4 A full journal bearing of 50mm diameter & 100mm long Application a

has a bearing pressure of 1.4N/mm2. The speed of the
journal is 900rpm & the ratio of journal diameter to the
diametral clearance is 1000. The bearings is lubricated
with oil whose absolute viscosity at the operating
temperature of 750c may be taken as 0.11kg/m-s. The
room temperature 350c. find the amount of artificial
cooling required.
5 The rolling contact ball bearings are to be selected to knowledge b

support the overhung countershaft. The shaft speed is
720r.p.m. The bearings are to have 99% reliability
corresponding to a life of 24000 hours. The bearing is
subjected to an equivalent radial load of 1kN. Consider
life adjustment factors for operating condition and

material as 0.9 and 0.85 respectively. Find the basic

dynamic load rating of the bearing from manufacture’s
catalogue, specified at 90% reliability.
6 A single row deep groove ball bearing at 2000 r.p.m. is Synthesis b

acted by a 10kN radial load and 8kn thrust load. The
bearing is subjected to a light shock load and the outer
ring is rotating. Determine the rating life of the
7 A ball bearing subjected to a radial load of 5kN is Knowledge b

expected to have a life of 8000 hours at 1450r.p.m. with a
reliability of 99% . Calculate the dynamic load capacity
of the bearing so that it can be selected from the
manufacturer’s catalogue based
on a reliability of 90%?
8 A Shaft rotating at constant speed is subjected to variable Knowledge b

load. The bearings supporting the shaft are subjected to
stationary equivalent radial load of 3 kN for 10 per cent
of time, 2 kN for 20 per cent of time, 1 kN for 30 per cent
of time and no load for remaining time of cycle. If the
total life expected for the bearing is 20 x 106 revolutions
at 95 per cent reliability, calculate dynamic load rating of
the ball bearing.
9 A ball bearing is operating on a work cycle consisting of Knowledge b

three parts-a radial load of 3000N at 1440rpm for one
quarter cycle, a radial load of 5000N at 720rpm for one
half cycle, and radial load of 2500N at 1440rpm for the
remaining cycle. The expected life of the bearing is
1000hr. Calculate the dynamic load carrying capacity of
the bearing.
10 Design a suitable journal bearing for a centrifugal pump Application c

from the following available data:
Load on the bearing=13.5kN;
Diameter of the journal =80mm;
Speed=1440r.p.m;
Bearing characteristic number at the working temperature

(750C)=30;
UNIT-II

SHORT QUESTIONS
1 Discuss the design of piston for an internal combustion Remember b

engine.
2 What is the function of a connecting rod of an internal Knowledge a

combustion engine?
3 Under what force, the big and end bolts and caps are Application c
designed?
4 What are the various types of liners? Knowledge a
5 Explain briefly the design procedure of connecting rod. Analysis d
6 What are the forces that act on crank shaft? Knowledge a
7 What are the two most usual cases of failure of the crank Analysis d
shaft?
8 Name the materials used for crank shaft. Remember c
9 What is the difference between centre and overhung crank Knowledge a

shaft?
10 What are the advantages of cylinder liners? Comprehension e
UNIT – II
LONG QUESTIONS
1 Design a plain carbon steel centre crankshaft for a single Knowledge b

acting four stroke single cylinder engine for the following
data: Bore = 400 mm, Stroke = 600 mm; Engine speed
=200 r.p.m; Mean effective pressure = 0.5 N/mm2;
Maximum
combustion pressure =2.5 N/mm2; Weight of flywheel
used as a pulley = 50kN; Total belt pull = 6.5kN. When
the crank has turned through 350 from the top dead
centre, the pressure on the piston is 1N/mm2 and the
torque on the crank is maximum. The ratio of the
connecting rod length to the crank radius is 5. Assume
any other data required for the design.
2 A four stroke diesel engine has the following Knowledge b

specifications: Brake power = 5kW;

Speed=1200r.p.m;
indicated mean effective pressure =0.35 N/mm2;
Mechanical efficiency=80%.
Determine
1. Bore and length

of the cylinder,
2. Thickness of the cylinder head; and
3. Size of studs for the cylinder head.
3 Design a centre crank shaft when the crank is at the dead Knowledge b
centre for a single acting four stroke single cylinder
engine for the following given data: Assume any other
missing data.
Piston diameter = 400mm
Stroke = 600mm
Speed = 200 rev/min
I.M.E.P = 0.5Mpa
Maximum combustion Pressure = 2.5Mpa
Gas pressure at the maximum torque = 1 MPa at 350
crank angle Ratio of length of connecting rod to crank
radius = 5
Weight of flywheel used as a pulley = 5.0KN Total belt
pull = 6.5N.
a. Design of the crank pin
b. Design of the left hand crank web.
4 Design high speed petrol engine connecting rod, Application b
given:

Stroke length = 138mm
Length of the connecting rod=310mm
Rated rpm of the engine =1500

Compression ratio = 4:1
Weight of reciprocating parts per cylinder = 1.8kg
Speed = 2500
Maximum explosion pressure = 2.45Mpa

Bearing pressure for big end = 7MPa
Bearing pressure for small end = 14MPa

Connecting rod should be of I-section and be made of
forged steel, the proportions being depth h=5t, width =4t,
where is the flange and web thickness.
Determine:
a. Dimensions of the crank pin & piston pin
b. Size of the bolts for securing the big end cap.
5 A Connecting rod is required to be designed for a high Application c

speed, four stroke I.C. engine. The following data are
available.
Diameter of piston = 88mm;
Mass of reciprocating
parts=1.6kg;
Length of connecting rod (centre to centre)=300 mm;
Stroke = 125 mm;
R.P.M=2200 (when developing 50kW);
Possible overspeed=3000r.p.m;
Compression ratio = 6.8:1 (approximately);
Probale maximum explosion pressure (assumed shortly

after dead centre,
say at about 30) = 3.5N/mm2.
Draw fully dimensioned drawings of the connecting rod
showing the provision for the lubrication.
6 a) What is the function of a crank shaft? Knowledge e

(b) Explain the different stresses induced in crank pin.
(c) Explain the different stresses induced in crank Web. Analysis
(d) How crank shaft bearings are lubricated? Analysis
Analysis
7 The following data is given for the cap and bolts of the Application e
big end of the connecting rod: Engine speed =
1800 rpm; length of the connecting rod = 350mm; length
of stroke = 175mm; mass of reciprocating
parts = 2.5 Kg; length of crank pin = 76mm; diameter of

the crank pin = 58mm; permissible tensile

stress for bolts = 60N/mm2; permissible bending stress
for cap = 80N/mm2. Thickness of the bearing
bush = 3mm. Calculate the nominal diameter of bolts and
thickness cap for the big end.
8 Determine the dimensions of small and big end bearings Application e

of the connecting rod for a diesel engine
with the following data:Cylinder bore = 100mm;
maximum gas pressure = 4MPa; (l/d) ratio for piston
pin bearing = 2; (l/d) ratio for crank pin bearing = 1.3;
Allowable bearing pressure for piston pin
bearing = 12MPa; Allowable bearing pressure for crank
pin bearing = 7.5MPa.
9 The cylinder of a 4-stroke diesel engine has the following Application e

specifications:
Cylinder bore = 150mm; maximum gas pressure =
3.5MPa; Allowable tensile stress = 40N/mm2.
Poisson’s ratio = 0.25. Determine the thickness of the
cylinder wall. Also calculate the apparent and
net circumferential and longitudinal stresses in the
cylinder wall.
10 he cylinder of a 4-stroke diesel engine has the following Application e

specifications: Brake power = 5 KW; speed
= 600 rpm; indicated mean effective pressure = 0.5MPa
Make suitable assumptions and calculate (i)
bore and length of the cylinder liner. (ii) Thickness of the
cylinder liner and cylinder head. (iii) Size,
number and pitch of studs.
UNIT – III
SHORT QUESTIONS
1 Discuss the various types of power threads. Give at least knowledge a

two
practical applications for each type.
2 Discuss advantages and Disadvantage OF POWER Comprehension d

THREADS
3 Write Design of screw jack? Synthesis c

4 Describe construction of mechanical screw jack? Synthesis c
5 Differentiate between differential screw and compound Analysis c

screw?
6 What are the parameters you consider in the design of Knowledge a

beds, slide ways
7 What is the criterion for designing machine tool Knowledge a

elements?
8 What are the requirements of spindle supports? Knowledge a
9 What is compound screw? Knowledge a
10 What is differential screw? Remember a
UNIT – III
LONG QUESTIONS
1 Explain design procedure for finding various dimensions Synthesis c

of
parts of screw jack?
2 A power screw having double start square thread of Application e

32mm
nominal dia and 5mm pitch is acted upon by an axial load
of
12KN. The inner and outer diameter of screw collar
surfaces are 20mm and 50mm respectively. Coefficient of
thread friction and collar friction may be assumed as 0.15
and 0.2 respectively screw rotates at 24rpm. Assume
uniform
condition permissible thread bearing pressure is 6 Mpa.
Permissible shear stress across threads of nut and screw is
30 Mpa. Determine torque required to rotate the screw
and
stress induced in the screw?
3 A power screw having double start square thread of Application e

32mm
nominal dia and 5mm pitch is acted upon by an axial load
of
12KN the inner and outer diameter of screw collar
surfaces are 20mm and 50mm respectively. Coefficient

of thread friction and collar friction may be assumed as

0.15
and 0.2 respectively. Screw rotates at 24rpm. Assume
uniform
condition permissible thread bearing pressure is 6Mpa.
Permissible shear stress across threads of nut and screw is
30Mpa. Determine torque to rotate the screw and stress
induced
in the screw?
4 An electric motor driven power screw moves a nut in a Application e

horizontal plane against a force of 75KN at a speed of
300mm/min. The screw has a single square thread of
6mm
pitch on a motor diameter of 40mm. The coefficient of
friction at screw thread is 0.1. Estimate power of the
motor?
5 The lead screw of a lathe has Acme threads of 50mm Application e

outside
diameter and 8mm pitch. The screw must exert an axial
pressure of 2500N in order to drive the tool carriage. The
thrust is carried on a collar 110mm outside diameter and
55mm
inside diameter and the lead screw rotates at 30rpm
Determine.
i. The power required to drive the
screw; and ii. The efficiency of the
lead screw.
Assume a coefficient of friction of 0.15 for the screw and
0.12 for the collar.
6 Describe clearly how the materials are selected from the Knowledge a
design of strength and rigidity point of view
in designing machine tool elements.
7 Derive an expression for the torque required for lifting Analysis c

and lowering the load in case of power screw.
8 A 50 KN capacity screw jack consists of a square Application e

threaded steel screw meshing with a bronze nut.
The nominal diameter is 60mm and pitch is 9mm. the
permissible bearing pressure at the threads is
10N/mm2. Calculate (i) The length of the nut and (ii) the

transverse shear stress in the nut.
9 What do you understand by overhauling of screw and self Remember d

locking of threads and where it is
necessary?
10 Design and draw screw jack for lifting a safe load 300kN Application d
through a maximum lift of 700mm. The
elastic strength of the material of the screw may be taken
as 240MPa in compression and 160MPa in
shear. The nut is to be made of phosphor bronze for
which the elastic strength in tension,
compression and shear are respectively 130, 115 and
100MPa. Bearing pressure between the
threads of the screw and the nut may be taken as 18
N/mm2 . Safe crushing stress for the material of
the body is 100MPa. Coefficient of friction for the screw
as well as collar may be taken as 0.15.
UNIT – IV
SHORT QUESTIONS
1 Discuss the different types of belts and their material used Application e
for power transmission.
2 Under what circumstances a fibre rope and a wire rope is Synthesis, c

Synthesis, 4
used?
3 What are the advantages of a wire rope over fibre rope? Synthesis, c
4 Sketch the cross-section of a V-belt and label its Synthesis,

important parts.
5 What are the advantages and disadvantages of V-belt Remember c

drive over flat belt drive?
6 Discuss the uses and construction of wire ropes. How are Knowledge a
wire-rope ends fastened ?
7 Explain, with the help of neat sketches, the types of Knowledge a

various flat belt drives.
8 Discuss the various important parameters necessary for Analysis c

the selection of a particular drive for power

transmission.
9 What are the factors upon which the coefficient of friction Analysis c
between the belt and the pulley depends?
10 List and discuss briefly the factors that control the power Remember d
transmission capacity of a belt.
UNIT – IV
LONG QUESTIONS
1 An overhung pulley transmits 35kW at 240rpm. The belt Comprehension c

drive
is vertical & the angle of wrap may be taken as 1800. The
distance of the pulley centre line from the nearest bearing
is
350rpm. μ =0.25.
The section of the arm may be taken as elliptical, the
major
axis being twice the minor axis. The following stress may
be taken for design purpose:
Shaft & Key: Tension & Compression-80MPa;
Shear-50MPa Belt: Tension-2.5MPa
Pulley rim: Tension-
4.5MPa Pulley
arms: Tension-
15MPa Determine:
a. Diameter of
the pulley b.
Diameter of the
shaft
2 A V-belt drive system transmits 100 kW at 475r.p.m. the Comprehension d

belt has a mass of 0.6kg/m. The maximum permissible
tension
in the belt is 900N. The groove angle is 380 and the angle
of
contact is 1600. Find minimum number of belts and
pulley
diameter. The coefficient of friction between belt and
pulley is
0.2.

3 Design a roller chain to transmit power from a 20kW knowledge d

motor to a reciprocating pump. The pump is to operate
continuously 24 hours per day. The speed of the motor is
600
r.p.m. and that of the pump is 200 r.p.m. Find 1. Number
of
teeth on each sprocket; 2. Pitch and width of the chain.
4 A rope drive is to transmit 250kW from a pulley of 1.2m Application d

diameter, running at a speed of 300rpm. The angle of lap
may be taken as π radians. The groove angle is 22.50. The
ropes to be used are 50mm in diameter. The mass of the
rope
is 1.3kg per meter length and each rope has a maximum
pull
of 2.2kN, the coefficient of friction between rope and
pulley
is 0.3. if the overhung of the pulley is 0.5m, suggest
suitable
size for the pulley shaft if it is made of steel with a shear
stress of 40MPa. Determine:
a. The number of ropes required.
b. Diameter for the pulley shaft
5 A Cl pulley transmits 20kW at a speed of 560rpm. The Application d

pulley overhangs the nearest bearing by 200mm.
Assuming the ratio of the belt tension as 2, determine
a. Pulley diameter
b. Shaft diameter.
6 A rope drive is to transmit 250kW from a pulley of 1.2m Comprehension d

diameter, running at a speed of 300 rpm. The angle of lap
may be taken as π radians. The groove half angle is 22.50.
The ropes to be used are 50mm in diameter. The mass of
the rope is 1.3 kg per meter length and each rope has a
maximum pull of 2.2kN, the coefficient of friction
between rope and pulley is 0.3. Determine the number of
ropes required. If the overhung of the pulley is 0.5m,
suggest suitable size for the pulley shaft if it is made of
steel with a shear stress of 40MPa
7 Design a belt drive pulley for transmitting 10kW at 180 knowledge d

rpm. The velocity of the

belt is not to exceed 10m/s, and the maximum tension is

not to exceed 15N/mm
width. The tension on the slack side is one half of that on
the tight side. Determine
all the principal dimensions of the pulley.
8 A V- belt drive is to be transmit 14.7 kW to a compressor. Application d

The motor speed is
1150rev/min and the compressor pulley runs at
400rev/min. Determine the size
and number of belts required.
9 A V- belt is to transmit 20 kW from a 250 mm pitch Comprehension d

diameter sheave to a 900
mm diameter pulley. The centre distance between the two
shafts is 1000 mm. The
groove angle is 400 and the coefficient of friction
between the belt and the sheave
and also between the belt and the flat pulley is 0.2. The
cross-section of the belt is
40 mm wide at the top, 20 mm wide at the bottom and 25
mm deep. The density
of the belt is 1000 kg/m3 and the allowable tension per
belt is 1000 N. Find the
number of belts required.
10 A compressor receives power from a motor rated at 30 knowledge d

kW at 22 rpm by means of
V-belts. The pulley diameters are 300 mm and 750 mm.
Centre distance is 1.4 m.
Determine the number of belts required.
UNIT – V Application d
SHORT QUESTIONS
1 With the neat sketch explain the Axial and normal pitch Synthesis c
of helical gear.
2 Define the term back lash. Remember b
3 What are the forms of gear tooth profile? Knowledge c

4 What is helix angle? knowledge a
5 When bevel gears are used? Application d
6 Define the following terms: (a) Cone distance, (b) Face Remember b
angle.
7 Name the different applications of worm gear. Knowledge a
8 What are commonly used materials for worm and wheel? knowledge a
9 What is a crown gear? Application e
10 What is a herringbone gear? Where is it used? Knowledge b
UNIT – V
LONG QUESTIONS
1 A pair of straight teeth spur gears, having 20° involute Application e

full depth teeth is to
transmit 12 kW at 300 r.p.m. of the pinion. The speed

ratio is 3 : 1. The allowable static stresses for
gear of cast iron and pinion of steel are 60 MPa and 105
MPa respectively. Assume the following:
Number of teeth of pinion = 16; Face width = 14 times

module; Velocity factor (Cv ) = 4.5
4.5 + v ,
v being the pitch line velocity in m / s; and tooth form

factor (y) = – 0.912 0.154
No. of teeth
Determine the module, face width and pitch diameter of

gears. Check the gears for wear; given
σes = 600 MPa; EP = 200 kN/mm2 and EG = 100

kN/mm2. Sketch the gears.
2 A motor shaft rotating at 1500 r.p.m. has to transmit 15 Application e

kW to a low speed shaft with a speed reduction of 3:1.
The teeth are 1 ° 14 /2 involute with 25 teeth on the
pinion. Both the pinion and gear are made of steel with a

maximum safe stress of 200 MPa. A safe stress of 40

MPa may be taken for the shaft on which the gear is
mounted and for the key. Design a spur gear drive to suit
the above conditions. Also sketch the spur gear drive.
Assume starting torque to be 25% higher than the running
torque
3 A reciprocating compressor is to be connected to an Application e

electric motor with the help of spur gears. The distance
between the shafts is to be 500mm. The speed of the
electric
motor is 900rpm and the speed of the compressor shaft is
desired to be 200rpm the torque to be transmitted is
5000N-m.
Taking starting torque as 25% more than the normal
torque,
Determine,
i. Module and face width of the gears using 200 stub
teeth, and
Knowledge,
Application
5
ii.Number of teeth and pitch circle diameter of each gear.
Assume suitable values of velocity factor
4 A pair of helical gears are to transmit 15 kW. The teeth Application e

are 20° stub in diametral plane and have a helix angle of
45°. The pinion runs at 10 000 r.p.m. and has 80 mm
pitch diameter. The gear has 320 mm pitch diameter. If
the gears are made of cast steel having allowable static
strength of 100 MPa; determine a suitable module and
face width from static strength considerations and check
the gears for wear, given σes = 618 MPa.
5 A helical cast steel gear with 30° helix angle has to Application e
transmit 35 kW at 1500 r.p.m. If the gear has 24 teeth,
determine the necessary module, pitch diameter and face
width for 20° full depth teeth. The static stress for cast
steel may be taken as 56 MPa. The width of face may be
taken as 3 times the normal pitch. What would be the end
thrust on the gear? The tooth factor for 20° full depth
involute gear may be taken as E . . , 0 912 0 154 T −

where TE represents the equivalent number of teeth.
6 A pair of mating carefully cut spur gears have 200 FDI Analysis e
of 4 mm module.
Number of teeth on pinion and gear are 38 and 115
respectively. Face width is 40mm. pinion and gear are
made of
steel with core hardness of 200 BHN and surface
hardness of
300 BHN. Calculate safe power that can be transmitted
when
pinion is to rotated at 1200 rpm.
7 A power screw having double start square threads of Application e

25mm
nominal diameter and 5mm pitch is acted upon by an
axial
load of 10KN. The outer and inner diameters of screw
collar are 50mm and 20mm respectively. The coefficient
of
threaded friction and collar friction may assumed as 0.2
and
0.15 respectively. The screw rotates at 12rpm. Assuming
uniform wear condition at the collar and allowable
threaded
bearing pressure of 5.8N/mm2, Find
i. The torque required to rotate
the screw. ii. Stress in the screw.
8 A pair of helical gears with 30° helix angle is used to Application e

transmit 15 kW at 10 000 r.p.m. of the pinion. The
velocity ratio is 4 : 1. Both the gears are to be made of
hardened steel of static strength 100 N/mm2. The gears
are 20° stub and the pinion is to have 24 teeth. The face
width may be taken as 14 times the module. Find the
module and face width from the standpoint of strength
and check the gears for wear
A pair of helical gears consist of a 20 teeth pinion Application e

meshing with a 100 teeth gear. The pinion rotates at 720
r.p.m. The normal pressure angle is 20° while the helix
angle is 25°. The face width is 40 mm and the normal
module is 4 mm. The pinion as well as gear are made of

steel having ultimate strength of 600 MPa and heat

treated to a surface hardness of 300 B.H.N. The service
factor and factor of safety are 1.5 and 2 respectively.
Assume that the velocity factor accounts for the dynamic
load and calculate the power transmitting capacity of the
gears
10 A reciprocating compressor is to be connected to an Application e

electric motor with the help of spur gears. The distance
between the shafts is to be 500 mm. The speed of the
electric motor is 900 r.p.m. and the speed of the
compressor shaft is desired to be 200 r.p.m. The torque, to
be transmitted is 5000 N-m. Taking starting torque as
25% more than the normal torque, determine : 1. Module
and face width of the gears using 20 degrees stub teeth,
and 2. Number of teeth and pitch circle diameter of each
gear. Assume suitable values of velocity factor and Lewis
factor.

ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:
UNIT – I
SHORT QUESTIONS
S.No. Questions Blooms Taxonomy Course

Level
Outcome
1 Write a short note on the lubricants used in sliding Understand a

contact bearing.
2 write a short note on viscosity and viscosity index. Understand a
3 What are the types of journal bearings depending upon Remember b

the nature of contact?
4 State the two advantages of rolling contact bearing over Analysis b

sliding contact bearing.
5 How to designate the ball bearings? Explain Analysis a
6 Write short note on sommerfeld number in journal Understand a

bearing.
7 State the two advantages of rolling contact bearing over Analysis c

sliding contact bearing.
8 Explain the influence factors for the life of bearing. Knowledge c
9 How to designate the ball bearings? Explain Analysis d
10 Explain the classifications of rolling contact bearing? Knowledge d
UNIT – I
LONG QUESTIONS
1 A).What are the rolling contact bearings? Discuss their Remember a

advantages over sliding contact bearings.
B).A single row deep groove ball bearing No. 6002 is Knowledge c
subjected to an axial thrust of 1000 N and a radial load of 2200
N. Find the expected life that 50% of the bearings will
complete under this condition.

2 A journal bearing with a diameter of 200mm and length Application d

150mm carries a load of 20kN, when the journal speed is
150r.p.m.The diametral clearance ratio is 0.0015.If possible,
the bearing is to operate at 350C ambient temperature without
external cooling with a maximum oil temperature of 900C. If
external cooling is required, it is to be as little as possible to
minimize the required oil flow rate and heat exchanger size.
(a) What type of oil do you recommend? (b) Will the bearing
operate without external cooling? (c) If the bearing operates
without external cooling, determine the operating oil
temperature. (d) If the bearing operates with external cooling,
determine the amount of oil in kg/min required to carry away
the excess heat generated over heat dissipated, when the oil
temperature rises from 850 C to 900 C , when passing through
the bearing.
3 A rolling contact ball bearing is to be selected to support an Application e

overhung countershaft. The shaft speed is 720r.p.m.The
bearing is to have 99% reliability corresponding to a life of
24000 hours. The bearing is subjected to an equivalent radial
load of 1kN.Consider life adjustment factors for operating
condition and material as 0.9 and 0.85 respectively. Find the
basic dynamic load rating of the bearing from manufacturer's
catalogue, specified at 90% reliability.
4 Design a journal bearing for centrifugal pump from the Application b

following data. Load on the journal = 20 kN Speed of the
journal = 1000 rpm Type of oil SAE 10 for which absolute
viscosity at 55o C = 19 centipoises Ambient temperature of oil
= 15:5o C Maximum bearing pressure for the pump = 1.5
N/mm2 Calculate also the mass of the lubricating oil required
for artificial cooling to rise in temperature of the oil be limited
to 100 C. Heat dissipation coefficient = 10KN/m2 / o C.
5 A full journal bearing of 50mm diameter and 100mm long has Application c
a bearing pressure of l.4N/mm2 .Thespeed of the journal is
900rpm and the ratio of journal diameter to the diametric
clearance is 1000. The bearing is lubricated with oil, whose
absolute viscosity at the operating temperature of 75°C may be
taken as 0.011 kg/m-s. The room temperature is 350C.Find
(1)The amount of artificial cooling required. (2)The mass of
lubricating oil required, if the difference between the outlet
andinlettemperature of the oil is 10°C. Take specific heat of oil

as 1850J/Kg/0C.
6 Select a bearing for a 45mm diameter shaft rotates at 500rpm. Knowledge d

Due to a bevelgear mounted on the shaft, the bearing will have
to withstand a 4500N radialload and a 2500N thrust load. The
life of the bearing expected to be least6000hr.
7 A 150mm diameter shaft supporting a load of 10KN has a Analysis a

speed of 1500rpm.The shaft run in whose bearing length is 1.5
times the shaft diameter. If the diametric clearance of bearing
is 0.15mm and the absolute viscosity of the oil at the operating
temperature is 0.011 Kg/m-s.Find the power wasted in friction.
8 A 407 radial ball bearing ,with inner race rotation, has a 12 Application a
seconds work cycle as
mentioned below:
For 3 seconds For 9 seconds
Fr=5kN Fr=3.5kN
Fa=2kN Fa=0
Speed =900 r.p.m Speed =1200 r.p.m
Light shock steady load, If the basic dynamic capacity of the
bearing is 42500N, determine the expected average life of the
bearing .Take X=0.56 and Y=1.43.
9 The radial reaction on a bearing is 9000 N. It also carries a Knowledge b

thrust of 5000N. The speed of the shaft is 1000 rpm. The outer
ring stationary. Expected average life of bearing is about
25,000 hours. The load on the bearing is smooth; the service is
8 hours/day. Select,
i. Suitable roller bearing
ii. What is the rated 90% life of selected bearing?
iii. Compute the probability of the selected bearing surviving
25,000 hours

10 Design a journal bearing for centrifugal pump from the Application b

following data.
Load on the journal = 20 kN
Speed of the journal = 900 rpm
Type of oil SAE 10 for which absolute viscosity at 55C = 17
centipoises
Ambient temperature of oil = 15.5C
Maximum bearing pressure for the pump = 1.5 N/mm2
Calculate also the mass of the lubricating oil required for
artificial cooling to rise in
temperature of the oil be limited to 10C.
Heat dissipation coefficient = 12.2 KN/m2/C.
UNIT – II
SHORT QUESTIONS
1 Explain the principal parts of an Engine. Knowledge a
2 Define the indicated power and brake power? Knowledge a
3 Mention the different type of stresses acting in IC Engine Analysis a

cylinder.
4 Write a short note on piston parts used in IC Engine. Understand b
5 Explain the classification of piston rings? Knowledge b
6 What are the causes of piston failure? Remember c
7 What are the forces acting on the connecting rod? Remember c
8 The ‘I’ section of the connecting rod is used for high speed Analysis c
engines. Explain?
9 Explain the different type of crankshafts used in IC Engine? Knowledge c
10 What is the Function of a Crankshaft in an Engine? Remember d
UNIT – II
LONG QUESTIONS

1 Design and draw a trunk type of piston for a single cylinder

four-stroke diesel .
a
Engine running at 1000 rpm. Other data available are:
Maximum explosion pressure = 3.5 MN/m2

Application
Mean effective pressure = 0.65 MN/m2
Diameter of piston = 150 mm
Stroke length = 200 mm
Connecting rod length = 450 mm
bsfc = 0.27 kg/kWh
2 Design a piston for a four stroke diesel engine consuming 0.3 Application a
kg of fuel per kW of power per hour and produces a break
mean effective pressure of 0.7 N/mm2. The maximum gas
pressure inside the cylinder is 5 N/mm2 at a speed of 3500
rpm. The cylinder diameter is required to be 300 mm with
stroke 1.5 times the diameter. The piston may have 4
compression rings and an oil ring. The following data can be
used for design: Higher calorific value of fuel = 46 x 103
kJ/kg; Temperature at the piston center = 700 K; Temperature
at the piston edge = 475 K; Heat conductivity factor = 46.6
W/m/K; Heat conducted through top = 5% of heat produced;
Permissible tensile strength for the material of piston = 27
N/mm2; Pressure between rings and piston = 0.04 N/mm2;
Permissible tensile stress in rings = 80 N/mm2; Permissible
pressure on piston barrel = 0.4 N/mm2; Permissible pressure
on piston pin = 15 N/mm2; permissible stress in piston pin= 85
N/mm2. Any other data required for the design may be
assumed.

3 The following data refer to a 4-stroke single cylinder vertical

engine
Stroke=150mm
Speed of the engine=1200 r.p.m

Analysis b
Weight of the reciprocating parts = 45N
Design stress for the material used = 80N/sq.mm
Design bearing stress=10N/sq.mn
Design stress for bolts=35N/sq.mm
Design a suitable connecting rod and check for stresses due to

inertia.
4 The following data refer to a 4-stroke single cylinder vertical

engine Piston diameter = 125mm
b
Stroke=150mm
Speed of the engine=1200 r.p.m

Analysis
Weight of the reciprocating parts = 45N
Design stress for the material used = 80N/sq.mm
Design bearing stress=10N/sq.mn
Design stress for bolts=35N/sq.mm

inertia.
5 Determine the dimensions of an I-Section connecting rod for a Knowledge d

petrol engine from the following data: Diameter of the piston
= 110 mm; Mass of the reciprocating parts = 2 kg; Length of
the connecting rod from center to center = 325 mm; Stroke
length = 150 mm; R.P.M = 1500 with possible over speed of
2500; Compression ratio = 4:1; Maximum explosion pressure
= 2.5 N/mm2.

6 Design piston head and piston barrel for aluminum alloy Application e
piston with two compression rings and one oil ring for a petrol
engine of following particulars:
Cylinder diameter = 0.1 m
Peak gas pressure = 3.2 MPa.
Mean effective pressure = 0.8 MPa
Average side thrust = 2400 N
Skirt bearing pressure = 0.22 MPa
Bending stress in piston crown = 36 MPa
Crown temperature difference = 700C
Heat dissipated thorough crown = 157 kJ/m2s
Allowable radial pressure = 0.04 MPa
Bending Stress in rings = 90 MPa
Heat conductivity = 160 W/m/0C.
7 The following data refer to a 4-stroke single cylinder vertical Analysis e

engine
Piston diameter = 125 mm
Stroke = 150 mm
Speed of the engine = 1200 r.p.m.
Weight of the reciprocating parts = 45 N
Design stress for the material used = 80 N/sq. mm
Design bearing stress = 10 N/sq.mm
Design stress for bolts = 35 N/sq.mm
inertia.
8 A four-stroke internal combustion engine has the following Knowledge e

specifications:
Brake power=7.5 kW
Stroke=125 mm
Maximum gas pressure = 3.5 N/mm2
Indicated mean effective pressure=0.35 N/mm2
Mechanical efficiency = 80%
Speed=1000 rpm
Determine the dimensions of the cylinder, if the length of the
stroke is 1.4 times
the bore of the cylinder; when the permissible stresses for the
cylinder head and
stud materials are 45 MPa and 65 MPa respectively.

9 Design the cylinder and cylinder liner of a four stroke diesel Knowledge e
engine which has the following specification:
Maximum gas pressure=3500 kN/m2, break power=6.5 kW at
800 rpm, average IMEP=525 kN/m2,
Mechanical efficiency=78%, allowable strength of cylinder
material=75 N/mm2, allowable strength of
cylinder liner material=130 N/mm2, allowable strength of bolt
material=75 N/mm2, increase in
temperature=1300 c.
10 Design a trunk type CI piston for an IC engine having a Application a

diameter of 100 mm and a length of 150 mm The maximum
pressure is 35 Mpa maximum permissible tensions for CI for-
the design head thickness is 30 Mpa and for the piston pin
material is 45Mpa. Bearing for the piston should not exceed 20
Mpa.
UNIT – III
SHORT QUESTIONS
1 What are the applications of power screws? Remember c
2 What are the types of threads for power screw? Remember c
3 Why V threads are not used in power screws? Analysis c
How does the helix angle influence on efficiency of square

4 Knowledge e
threaded screw?
5 Write a short note on ball screws. Understand e
6 What are the types of machine tools ?state their applications? Remember e
7 What are the hydrodynamic slide-ways? Remember e
8 What are the requirements of spindle supports? Remember d
9 What is self locking? What is the condition for self locking? Remember d

Why the efficiency of self locking square threaded screws is

10 Analysis e
less than 50%?
UNIT – III
LONG QUESTIONS
A Double threaded power screw ,used for lifting the load ,has
a nominal diameter of 30mm and pitch of 5 mm. The
1 coefficient of friction at the screw threads is 0.16,neglecting Comprehension e
the collar friction ,calculate
a) efficiency of the screw with square threads

b) efficiency with ACME threads
A screw jack carries a load of 20kN. Assuming the coefficient
of friction between the screw and nut as 0.15, design the screw
and nut. Neglect collar friction and column action. The
permissible compressive and shear stresses in the screw should
not exceed 40MPa and 25MPa respectively. The shear stress
2 in the nut should not exceed 20MPa.The bearing pressure in Analysis e
the nut is 12MPa. Also determine the effort required at the
handle of 250mm length, in order to raise and lower the load.
What will be the efficiency of the screwjack?
A power screw having double start threads of 25mm nominal

diameter and 5 mm pitch is acted upon by an axial load of
10kN. The outer and inner diameters of screw collar are 50
and 20mm respectively. The coefficient of thread friction and
collar friction may be assumed as 0.2 and 0.15 respectively.
3 The screw rotates at 12rpm. Assuming uniform wear condition Application e
at the collar and allowable thread bearing pressure of 5.8
N/mm2 and:
(a) The torque required to rotate the screw.

(b) The stress in the screw and
The number of threads of nut in engagement.
a).With help of figures ,discuss the various types of protecting

devices for sideways
4 b).What are the various forces acting on the drilling machine e
spindle? Explain the procedure for designing the drilling
machine spindle.

A triple, square threaded power screw, used in a screw jack,

has a nominal diameter of 50mm and a pitch of 6mm.The
length of the nut is 42mm.The screw jack is used to lift the
load of 8KN.The coefficient of friction at the threads is 0.15,
and the collar friction is negligible. Determine
5 Analysis d
(a) The principle shear stress in the screw body,

(b) The transverse shear stress induced in the screw
and nut threads, and
The bearing pressure induced on the thread surface.
A power screw having double start threads of 25mm nominal

diameter and 5 mm pitch is acted upon by an axial load of
10kN. The outer and inner diameters of screw collar are 50
and 20mm respectively. The coefficient of thread friction and
collar friction may be assumed as 0.2 and 0.15 respectively.
6 The screw rotates at 12rpm. Assuming uniform wear condition Analysis d
at the collar and allowable thread bearing pressure of 5.8
N/mm2 and:
(a) The torque required to rotate the screw.
(b) The stress in the screw and
(c) The number of threads of nut in engagement.
a)Show that the efficiency of self locking screws is less than

50%. Knowledge
7 d
b)How does the helix angle influence on the efficiency of Synthesis
square threaded screw?
A double threaded power screw, used for lifting the load, has a
nominal diameter of 32mm and pitch of 6mm. The coefficient
of friction at the screw threads is 0.12.Neglecting collar
8 Evaluation c
friction, determine
(a) Efficiency of the screw with square threads,
(b) Efficiency with the ACME threads.

The screw of a press has square threads and is 60 mm nominal

diameter. The maximum unsupported length is 40 mm. The
screw is made of 25C4 steel and the nut is of phosphor bronze.
Determine the capacity of the press and length of the nut. If
9 Knowledge d
the coefficient of friction for the threads is 0.15 and 0.14 for
the thrust collar, determine the necessary torque, taking
outside and inside diameter of thrust collar to be 100mm and
30 mm respectively.
A double-threaded power screw is used to a raise a load of

5KN. The nominal diameter of 60 mm and pitch of 9mm. The
coefficient of friction at the screw threads is 0.15. The threads
10 are of ACME threads (2ϴ = 290). Neglecting collar friction, Application e
calculate: (i) The torque required to raise the load (ii) The
torque required to lower the load and (iii)efficiency of screw
thread for lifting load.
UNIT – IV
SHORT QUESTIONS
Discuss about the various types of belt drives with neat

1 Comprehension a
sketches?
What are the salient features in the design procedure for the
2 Comprehension e
belts?
3 How do you classify the chain drives? Comprehension e
4 Name the type of stresses induced in the wire? Application c
5 Name the type of stresses induced in the wire? Application c
6 How V-Belt Designated Remember a
7 When we prefer a V-belt to a flat belt Remember a
8 Define pitch length and Initial tension of V-Belt Knowledge a
9 What is the difference between V-belt and Flat belt Comprehension c
10 Briefly explain about initial tension in belts. Comprehension c

UNIT – IV
LONG QUESTIONS
1 A belt, 100 x 10mm is transmitting power at 15m/s. the angle Application B

of contact on the driver (smaller) pulley is 1560, if the
permissible stress for the belt material is 2N/mm2; determine
the power that can be transmitted at
this speed. Tale the density of leather as 1000kg/m3 and
coefficient of friction as 0.25. Calculate the maximum
power that can be transmitted.
2 Design a belt pulley for transmitting 10kW at 180 rpm. The Synthesis B
velocity of the belt is not to exceed 10m/s and the maximum
tension is not to exceed 15N/mm width. The tension on the
slack side is one half that on the tight side. Determine all the
principle dimensions of the pulley.
3 A bucket elevator is to be driven by a gear and roller chain Application B

drive gear motor=5kW;
Speed of gear motor=100 rev/min; Load=even,
Centre distance = 1220 mm.
Elevator will operate 16-24 hrs per day. Select the chain.
4 A roller chain operating under steady load conditions transmits C

4kW from a shaft rotating at 600rev/min to one operating at Knowledge
750rev/min.
i. Determine the chain required using at least 15 teeth in
sprockets.
ii. Determine the sprocket pitch diameters.

iii. Determine the shortest advisable centre distance.
iv. Determine the number of links of chain required.
5 Design a belt drive pulley for transmitting 10kW at 180 rpm. Application, c
The velocity of the belt is not to exceed Comprehension
10m/s, and the maximum tension is not to exceed 15N/mm
width. The tension on the slack is one half of that on the tight
side. Determine:
a .Width of the pulley
b. Diameter of the pulley

6 Power of 60kW at 730rpm.from an electric motor is to be Analysis d

transmitted to a compressor shaft at 300rpm.by V-belt.
Approximate larger pulley diameter is 1500mm. approximate
centre distance is 1650mm. Overload factor is 1.5. Design the
V-belt.
7 Select a suitable V-Belt and design the drive for a wet grinder. Evaluation d
Power is available from a 1.5kW motor at 750rpm. Drum
speed is to be about 100rpm. Drive to be compact.
8 Select a suitable wire rope from 6x19 group to lift a maximum Evaluation e
load of 8kN. Maximum lift is 30m. The bucket weight is
1.5kN. The maximum lifting speed is 2 m/s. Factor of safety.
9 A compressor receives poer from a motor rated at 30kW at Application e

22rps by means of V-belts. The driving Pulley diameter is
300mm and driven pulley s 750mm. Centre distance is 1.4m.
Select suitable belts for the above drive and indicate relevant
dimensions in a sketch.
10 a). Design a chain drive to actuate a compressor from 15kW Application e

electric motor running at 1000rpm, the compressor speed
being 350rpm. The maximum center distance is 500mm. The Knowledge
compressor operates 16hours per day. The chain tension may
be adjusted by shifting the motor on slides.
b). Sketch and describe any three configurations of belt drives.
UNIT – V
SHORT QUESTIONS
1 State the two important reasons for adopting involutes curves Knowledge a
for a gear tooth profile.
2 At what occasions nonmetallic gears are employed. Synthesis c
3 What preliminary design considerations should be, adopted, Remember c

When selecting gear drive?
4 What is interference in gears? How can you overcome it? Remember a
5 In what ways helical gears are differed from spur gears? Remember a

6 What is a herringbone gear? Where they are used? Knowledge a
7 Explain the following terms used in helical gears : (a) Helix Remember d
angle; (b) normal pitch; and (c) axial pitch.
8 Define formative or virtual number of teeth on a helical gear. Remember d

Derive the expression used to obtain its value
9 Write the expressions for static strength, limiting wear load Remember d
and dynamic load for helical gears and explain the various
terms used therein
10 How the shaft and arms for spur gears are designed ? Knowledge e
UNIT – V
LONG QUESTIONS
1 The following particulars of a single reduction spur gear are Application e

given :
Gear ratio = 10 : 1; Distance between centres = 660 mm

approximately; Pinion transmits 500
kW at 1800 r.p.m.; Involute teeth of standard proportions

(addendum = m) with pressure angle of
22.5°; Permissible normal pressure between teeth = 175 N per

mm of width. Find :
1. The nearest standard module if no interference is to occur;
2. The number of teeth on each wheel;
3. The necessary width of the pinion; and
4. The load on the bearings of the wheels due to power

transmitted
2 A bronze spur pinion rotating at 600 r.p.m. drives a cast iron Application e
spur gear at a transmission ratio of 4 : 1. The allowable static
stresses for the bronze pinion and cast iron gear are 84 MPa
and 105 MPa respectively. The pinion has 16 standard 20° full
depth involute teeth of module 8 mm. The face width of both
the gears is 90 mm. Find the power that can be transmitted
from the standpoint of strength.

3 A single stage helical gear reducer is to receive power from a Analysis d

1440 r.p.m., 25 kW induction motor. The gear tooth profile is
involute full depth with 20° normal pressure angle. The helix
angle is 23°, number of teeth on pinion is 20 and the gear ratio
is 3. Both the gears are made of steel with allowable beam
stress of 90 MPa and hardness 250 B.H.N. (a) Design the
gears for 20% overload carrying capacity from standpoint of
bending strength and wear. (b) If the incremental dynamic load
of 8 kN is estimated in tangential plane, what will be the safe
power transmitted by the pair at the same speed?
4 A pair of helical gears with 30° helix angle is used to transmit Knowledge d
15 kW at 10 000 r.p.m. of the pinion. The velocity ratio is 4 :
1. Both the gears are to be made of hardened steel of static
strength 100 N/mm2. The gears are 20° stub and the pinion is
to have 24 teeth. The face width may be taken as 14 times the
module. Find the module and face width from the standpoint
of strength and check the gears for wear.
5 Design a pair of helical gears for transmitting 22 kW. The Knowledge d

speed of the driver gear is 1800 r.p.m. and that of driven gear
is 600 r.p.m. The helix angle is 30° and profile is
corresponding to 20° full depth system. The driver gear has 24
teeth. Both the gears are made of cast steel with allowable
static stress as 50 MPa. Assume the face width parallel to axis
as 4 times the circular pitch and the overhang for each gear as
150 mm. The allowable shear stress for the shaft material may
be taken as 50 MPa. The form factor may be taken as 0.154 –
0.912 / TE, where TE is the equivalent number of teeth. The
velocity factor may be taken as , 350 /350 v , where v is pitch
line velocity in m / min. The gears are required to be designed
only against bending failure of the teeth under dynamic
condition
6 It is required to design a pair of spur gear speed reducer for a Application c

compressor running at 250rpm driven by a 7.5KW, 1000rpm
electric motor. The center distance between the axes of the
gear shafts should be exactly 250mm. The starting torque of
the motor can be assumed to be 150% of the rated torque. The
gears are made of carbon steel 50C4 (Ultimate tensile stress=
700N/mm2).The pressure angle is 200. The factor of safety is
2.Design the gears, specify their dimensions and suggest

surface hardness.
7 Why dynamic load is induced in the gear teeth? Explain the Synthesis c
procedure of designing for dynamic load using Buckingham
equation.
8 Determine the proper pitch, module, face width, number of Knowledge c

teeth and outside diameter of a pair of 200 involute full depth
spur gears to transmit 112.5 kW from a pinion running at 750
rpm to a gear running at 140rpm. The service is intermittent
with light shocks. Use Lewis equation.
9 In a spur gear drive, the diameter of pinion is 100mm and the Application d
centre distance 200mm. The power to be transmitted is 5.4kW
at 800 rpm of pinion. Using 20 full depth teeth and material
for pinion is steel with permissible static stress of 200MPa and
for gear a steel with a permissible static bending stress of
150MPa, determine the necessary module and width of the
teeth using Lewis equation only.
10 A pair of spur gear is to be designed to transmit 15 kW. Pinion Application d

has 24 teeth runs at 250 rpm. Velocity ratio is 2.8:1. Assume
pinion is made by alloy steel has design compressive stress
950 N/mm2, design bending stress 320 N/mm2 and hardness
number 280. Assume wheel is made by C 45 steel has design
compressive stress 500 N/mm2, design bending stress 140
N/mm2 and hardness number 175.

13.0 BASICS OF THERMODYNAMICS (OPEN ELECTIVE-I) (A2ME26)
Course Title BASICS OF THERMODYNAMICS
Course Code A2ME26

Regulation R16
Course Structure
3 1 0 3
Course Coordinator Mr. Bridjesh P, Assoc. Professor
Team of Instructors Mr. S. Girish, Mr. Siva Kumar
COURSE OVERVIEW:
Thermodynamics is the field of physics that deals with the relationship between heat and work in a
substance during a thermodynamic process. Specifically, thermodynamics focuses largely on how a
heat transfer is related to various energy changes within a physical system undergoing a
thermodynamic process. Such processes usually result in work being done by the system and are
guided by the laws of thermodynamics viz., Laws of Thermodynamics: Zeroth Law of
Thermodynamics-Two systems each in thermal equilibrium with a third system are in thermal
equilibrium to each other. First Law of Thermodynamics - The change in the energy of a system is
the amount of energy added to the system minus the energy spent doing work. Second Law of
Thermodynamics - It is impossible for a process to have as its sole result the transfer of heat from a
cooler body to a hotter one. Third Law of Thermodynamics - It is impossible to reduce any system to
absolute zero in a finite series of operations. This means that a perfectly efficient heat engine cannot
be created. Power cycles and refrigeration cycle based on thermodynamic system is studied.
13.2 PREREQUISITES:

UG 3 4 Physics, Maths
13.3 COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:

a) Marks Distributions (Traditional Evaluation methods)

Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks
There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each
midterm examination consists of one objective 75 100
paper, one subjective paper and four assignments.
The objective paper is for 10 marks and

subjective paper is for 10 marks, with duration of

1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for objective and
60 minutes for subjective paper). Objective paper
is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice questions,
fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper
contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit)
of which, the student has to answer 2 questions,
each question carrying 5 marks. First midterm
examination shall be conducted for 2.5 units of
syllabus and second midterm examination shall
be conducted for another 2.5 units. 5 marks are
allocated for Assignments. First two assignments
should be submitted before the conduct of the
first mid, and the second two assignments should
be submitted before the conduct of the second
mid. The total marks secured by the student in
each midterm examination are evaluated for 25
marks, and the average of the two midterm
examinations shall be taken as the final marks
secured by each candidate.
b) Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing

Able to understand basics of Assignments
a thermodynamics and analyze first law of Midterm and University
thermodynamics examinations
Assignments
b Analyze second law of thermodynamics Midterm and University
examinations
Assignments
Able to apply the properties of steam and
c Midterm and University
analyze the properties of gaseous mixtures
examinations
Assignments
Design an air conditioning system for
d Midterm and University
domestic purpose
examinations
Assignments
Apply and design an air conditioning
e Midterm and University
system for domestic purpose
examinations

TOTAL 25


TOTAL 25
TOTAL
5 EXTERNAL Examination 3 hours 75
GRAND TOTAL 100
COURSE OBJECTIVES: V
Blooms
S.No Course Objectives Course Outcomes
Level
To understand the basic concepts of
An ability to determine the heat,
thermodynamics, heat, work in
work in various flow & non-flow
1 various flow & non-flow processes BL1
processes and describe the first law
and laws of thermodynamics.
of thermodynamics.
To explain about second law of
An ability to describe the second
thermodynamics and the concepts of
law of thermodynamics and
2 entropy availability in various BL2
entropy availability in various
processes.
processes
To calculate properties of pure
substances using steam tables and An ability to calculate the properties
3 determine the perfect gases in various of the perfect gases in various BL3
processes. processes
To understand the concepts of mixture Evaluate the properties of gaseous

of gases and the property values mixtures and Solve the properties of
4 BL4
during any process. combinations of different gaseous
mixtures
An ability to illustrate the working
of different types of cycles and their
To describe the working of different
performance Choose a
5 types of cycles and their performance. BL5
thermodynamic cycle for a given
mechanical machine and Classify the
thermodynamic cycles.
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)
VII. HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:
Proficiency assessed
Program Outcomes Level Bloom’s Level
by
Solving Gate and text
A foundations, to real-world problems S Apply
book problems
(fundamental engineering analysis

examinations skills)
An ability to design, analyze and interpret data, as Remember

Solving Gate and text
B well as to analyze and interpret data. H Understand
book problems
(information retrieval skills) Apply
system, process, component, or program to meet Assignment & Gate Design
C H
desired needs, within realistic constraints questions Create
(Creative Skills)
Graduates will demonstrate an ability to visualize
and work on laboratory and multidisciplinary
D S Mini & Micro projects Create
tasks individually or as a member with in teams
(team work)
An ability to demonstrate skills to use the
techniques modern engineering tools software and
Micro projects models / Analyze
E equipment necessary to analyze computer S
Gate questions Evaluate
engineering problems
(engineering problem solving skills)
An understanding of professional, social and Understand
F N ---------
ethical responsibilities (professional integrity) Adopt
An ability to recognize the global issues like
green initiatives and alternate energy sources and
Micro projects models / Design
G to take technology to villages and to recognize the N
Gate questions Create
rural requirements.(Engineering application
skills)
The broad education necessary to analyze the
local and global impact of engineering solutions Assignment & Gate Analyze
H N
in a global economic, environmental and social questions Evaluate
context
Graduate will develop confidence for self-
education and acquire new technology in the
I computing discipline and ability and practice for H Class test & seminar Evaluate
multi-disciplinary tasks as a member within the
teams
J To communicate effectively N Seminars Organize
An ability to use techniques, skills, and modern
Class test & Group Solve
K engineering tools necessary for engineering N
activity in class room Analyze
practice
Graduates are able to participate and succeed in
competitive examinations like GATE, TOEFL,
L S GATE Develop
GRE, GMAT etc.,
(Continuing education)
The use of current application software and the
design and use of operating systems and the
Text book problems as Evaluate
M analysis design testing and documentation of N
part of Assignments Solve
computer programs for the use in computer
science and engineering technologies

An ability to setup an enterprise ( Employment

N S Placements Develop
skills)

VIII. SYLLABUS:
Lec. Topics to be Blooms Teaching

Unit no Session objectives
S.no No covered level methodology
By the End of the

session student will
understand basic L2
Chalk & talk
INTRODUC concepts of
https://www.youtub
TION: Basic thermodynamics
1 L1 e.com/watch?v=EK
Concepts: By the End of the
I08Y1-uTg
System session student will be
duration: 03:41
able to differentiate L4
basic properties of a
thermodynamic system
By the End of the
session student will be
Control
able to understand L2 Chalk & talk
Volume,
Control volume, https://www.youtub
Surrounding,
2 L2 boundaries of system. e.com/watch?v=Viq
Boundaries,
By the End of the amNPAeiY
Types of
session student will be duration: 02:20
Systems L4
able to differentiate
types of systems.
By the End of the
I
L2
able to understand Chalk & talk
Macroscopic
concept of continuum https://www.youtub
and
3 L3 By the End of the e.com/watch?v=gD
Microscopic
session student will be 6FRreuDow
viewpoints
able to compare L5 duration:0440
macroscopic and
microscopic view points
Thermodyna By the End of the Chalk & talk
mic session student will be https://www.youtub
4 L4 L3
Equilibrium, able to apply thermal e.com/watch?v=-
State, equilibrium to real life 7NVJ811E_0

Property, By the End of the duration: 02:35

Process, session student will be
Cycle, able to estimate
L5
properties of
Thermodynamic
systems.
By the End of the
Quasi static
able to differentiate L4
Process, Chalk & talk
Quasi static Process and
Irreversible https://www.youtub
Rapid process
5 L5 Process, e.com/watch?v=j_6
By the End of the
Causes of JxoL8qD4
Irreversibilit duration: 03:48
able to Differentiate L3
y
Irreversible Process and
reversible process.
By the End of the
able to Visualize L6
Chalk & talk
various flow and non-
various flow https://www.youtub
flow process
6 L6 and non- e.com/watch?v=0O
By the End of the
flow process D0mOT-dKU
duration:04:44
able to Calculate work L3
done in flow and no
flow process.
By the End of the
Energy in
able to Analyze Energy L4
State and in
in State and Energy in Chalk & talk
Transition,
Transition https://www.youtub
Types, Work
7 L7 By the End of the e.com/watch?v=aL
and Heat,
session student will be T0T5z7mjE
Point and
able to judge whether duration: 03:34
Path L5
Work and Heat are
function
Point and Path
functions.
By the End of the
Zeroth Law able to apply Zeroth
L3
of Law of Chalk & talk
Thermodyna Thermodynamics in real https://www.youtub
8 L8 mics, life e.com/watch?v=-
Concept of By the End of the 42JmVBdlM4
quality of session student will be duration: 04:04
Temperature able to analyze L4
Concept of quality of
Temperature

By the End of the

Principles of able to understand L2
Chalk & talk
Thermometr Principles of
https://www.youtub
y, Const. Thermometry
9 L9 e.com/watch?v=kG
Volume gas By the End of the
xul4EW-R4
Thermomete session student will be
duration: 05:20
r able to estimate L5
temperatures in
different thermometers
By the End of the
L3
able to differentiate Chalk & talk
Scales of
Scales of Temperature https://www.youtub
Temperature
10 L10 By the End of the e.com/watch?v=85y
Ideal Gas
session student will be 5ignSoHM
Scale
able to Solve L6 duration:04: 48
problems on Ideal Gas
Scale
By the End of the
L2 Chalk & talk
able to understand
https://www.youtub
Joule’s Joule’s Experiment
11 L11 e.com/watch?v=5y
Experiments By the End of the
OhSIAIPRE
L4 duration: 04:26
able to analyze Joule’s
Experiment
By the End of the
L2
able to understand First Chalk & talk
First law of law of Thermodynamics https://www.youtub
12 L12 Thermodyna By the End of the e.com/watch?v=3lra
mics session student will be kjtd1hU
able to apply first law L3 duration: 02:42
of thermodynamics in a
cycle
By the End of the
L2 Chalk & talk
able to understand
PMMI, First https://www.youtub
PMMI
13 L13 law applied e.com/watch?v=dG
By the End of the
to a Process PnxLSgnUI
L3 duration 04:28
able to apply First law
to a Process
By the End of the Chalk & talk
applied to a session student will be https://www.youtub
14 L14 L2
flow system able to Understand e.com/watch?v=Wp
different flow systems. 4x0KmNEC8

By the End of the duration: 04:35

L3
able to apply First law
to a flow system
By the End of the
able to understand L2
Chalk & talk
Steady Flow Energy
Steady Flow https://www.youtub
Equation
15 L15 Energy e.com/watch?v=Njj
By the End of the
Equation 3tno43Zs
duration: 04:07
able to Apply steady L3
flow energy equation to
different equipment’s
SESSION PLANNER/SYLLABUS COVERAGE – UNIT: II
LIMITA At the end of the session the student will be

TIONS able to give real life examples of thermal L1
OF THE reservoir Chalk &
16 L16 FIRST Talk
At the end of the session the student will be
LAW:
able to Understand the Limitations of first L2
Thermal
law of thermodynamics
Reservoir
Heat
At the end of the session the student will be https://www.
Engine, L3
able to Calculate efficiency of heat engine youtube.com
Heat
/watch?v=D
pump,
17 L17 HUwFuHuC
Paramete
At the end of the session the student will be dw
rs of L4
able to estimate the COP of heat pump duration:
performa
04:36
nce
Second
able to Understand the second law of L2 youtube.com
Law of
thermodynamics /watch?v=G
Thermod
18 L18 _QylbQLSO
ynamics, At the end of the session the student will be
A
Kelvin able to Apply the second law of L3
duration:
Planck thermodynamics
04:29
Clausius
able to Understand the second law of L2 youtube.com
Statemen
thermodynamics ( Clausius) /watch?v=D
ts and
19 L19 C1agDxB2T
their At the end of the session the student will be
Y
Equivale able to identify the equivalence of Clausius L3
duration:
nce and Kelvin statements
01:33


Corollari able to Analyze the corollaries of second L5 youtube.com
es, PMM law /watch?v=Y
20 L20 of 9nOV7u8Y4
Second At the end of the session the student will be A
L5
kind able to Judge the existence of PMM duration:
02:55
Carnot’s At the end of the session the student will be
L1 https://www.
principle, able to Able to label the Carnot cycle youtube.com
Carnot
/watch?v=kJl
21 L21 cycle and At the end of the session the student will be mRT4E6R0
its able to Judge why Carnot cycle isn’t real L5 duration:02:
specialtie cycle 37
s
Thermod At the end of the session the student will be

L2
ynamic able to understand various temp. scales
22 L22 scale of Chalk & talk
Temperat At the end of the session the student will be
ure L6
able to construct temperature scales

L3
Problems able to calculate the efficiency of engines
23 L23 on heat At the end of the session the student will be Chalk & talk
engines able to calculate the unknown temp of L3
source or sink
At the end of the session the student will be Chalk & talk
able to differentiate reversible and L5 https://www.
irreversible cycle youtube.com
Clausius
/watch?v=M
24 L24 Inequalit
At the end of the session the student will be wU_Xm8SF
y
able to Apply Clausius Inequality to various L3 Yw
cycles duration:
04:32
Entropy, L2 https://www.
able to understand the existence of Entropy
Principle youtube.com
25 L25 of At the end of the session the student will be /watch?v=gg
Entropy able to Analyze the causes of entropy L4 -dlrbXxzI
Increase increase duration:
05:20
able to Understand what is availability and L2 https://www.
Availabil
irreversibility youtube.com
ity and
26 L26 /watch?v=j_
Irreversib At the end of the session the student will be
6JxoL8qD4
ility able to Calculate available and un available L3
duration:
energy in system
03:43


Thermod able to Understand various thermodynamic L2
27 L27 ynamic potentials of a system Chalk & talk
Potentials At the end of the session the student will be
L6
able to Develop thermodynamic potentials
Gibbs able to Understand Gibbs and Helmholtz L2 https://www.
and functions youtube.com
28 L28 Helmholt /watch?v=hu
z KBuShAa1w
able to Calculate thermodynamic properties L3
Functions duration:
using Gibbs & Helmholtz functions
06:00
L2
able to Understand Maxwell’s functions
Maxwell
29 L29 At the end of the session the student will be Chalk & talk
Relations
able to Calculate thermodynamic properties L3
using Maxwell’s relations
Elementa At the end of the session the student will be Chalk & talk
ry able to Understand the absolute values of L2 https://www.
Treatmen entropy at 0K youtube.com
t of the /watch?v=4q
30 L30
Third At the end of the session the student will be G5BdUkfYI
Law of able to Analyze why entropy is constant at L4 duration:
Thermod 0K 02:00
ynamics Applications
SESSION PLANNER/SYLLABUS COVERAGE – UNIT: III
PURE At the end of the session the

SUBS student will be able to L1
TANC understand Pure substances
Chalk & Talk
ES: P-
https://www.youtube.co
V-T- At the end of the session the
31 L31 m/watch?v=hRAivhX79
surface student will be able to Build P-
6s
s, T-S V-T diagrams for L3
duration : 03:20
and h-s homogeneous and non-
diagra homogeneous substances
III
ms
At the end of the session the
Phase
Transf L1 Chalk & Talk
Understand the Phase
ormati https://www.youtube.co
transformations of water
32 L32 ons, m/watch?v=hRAivhX79
Mollie 6s
student will be able to Examine
r L4 duration : 03:20
the thermodynamic property
Charts
values on Mollier charts

Triple At the end of the session the

point student will be able to Recall L1
at the triple point values of water
critical Chalk & Talk
state https://www.youtube.co
33 L33 propert At the end of the session the m/watch?v=hRAivhX79
ies student will be able to Solve 6s
L6
during problems on change of phase duration : 03:20
change of water
of
phase
Drynes
student will be able to Chalk & Talk
s L1
Understand the dryness https://www.youtube.co
Fractio
34 L34 fraction m/watch?v=ZKVs0Fvfg
n.
At the end of the session the P4
Mollie
student will be able to Solve L6 duration: 05:43
r charts
problems on dryness fraction
Variou student will be able to
L1
s Understand the thermodynamic
Therm processes of pure substances
35 L35 odyna At the end of the session the Chalk & Talk
mic student will be able to Develop
proces relations for various L6
ses thermodynamic processes for
water
At the end of the session the Chalk & Talk
student will be able to Recall L1 https://www.youtube.co
energy
the forms of energy transfer m/watch?v=xUNoA-
Transf
fh4JM
er,
36 L36 duration: 02:11
Steam At the end of the session the
Calori student will be able to Analyze L4
m/watch?v=WtIG3zWa
metry dryness fraction in steam
TK8
duration: 03:25
PERF At the end of the session the
ECT student will be able to L1
Chalk & Talk
GAS Understand gas laws
LAWS
37 L37 m/watch?v=lSHpqUYv
: At the end of the session the
9-M
Equati student will be able to Apply L3
duration: 04:38
on of gas laws for ideal gases
State
specifi At the end of the session the
c and student will be able to Recall
38 L38 L1 Chalk & Talk
Univer gas constants for Ideal and real
sal Gas gases

consta At the end of the session the

nts student will be able to Solve L6
problems on mixture of gases
Throttl At the end of the session the
ing student will be able to
L1 Chalk & Talk
Proces Understand the Throttling
ses, process
39 L39 m/watch?v=GUE1cr9N
Free At the end of the session the
XNw
Expans student will be able to
L4 duration: 01:30
ionPro Compare Throttling and Free
cesses expansion process
Deviati At the end of the session the
ons student will be able to
L1
from Understand the deviations from
perfect perfect gas model. Chalk & Talk
Gas https://www.youtube.co
40 L40 Model, At the end of the session the m/watch?v=MDUkyxx
Vander student will be able to Solve KA8k
Waals for the thermodynamic L6 duration : 05:59
Equati property values using
on of Vanderwaal’s equation
State

the student will be able
L2
to Understand mole
fraction of gases
MIXTURE
S OF
PERFECT
41 L41 to Solve for mole L6 Chalk & Talk
GASES:
fraction of gaseous
Mole
mixtures
Fraction
L4
IV to Analyze gravimetric
and volumetric analysis
Chalk & Talk
L2 https://www.y
Dalton’s to Understand Dalton’s
outube.com/w
Law of law
43 L43 atch?v=RqffP
partial At the end of the session
YOoxd8
pressure the student will be able
L3 duration :
to apply Dalton’s law
04:47
for gaseous mixtures
Avogadro’ At the end of the session Chalk & Talk
44 L44 L2
s Laws of the student will be able https://www.y

additive to Understand outube.com/w

volumes Avogadro’s law atch?v=rtWc
At the end of the session VX1k0pg
the student will be able duration:
L3 02:01
to Apply Avogadro’s
law
to Identify difference L2
between mole fraction
Mole and mass fraction
45 L45 Chalk & Talk
fraction At the end of the session
to Solve for mole L6
fraction for gaseous
mixtures
L2
to Understand volume
Volume
fraction
fraction
46 L46 At the end of the session Chalk & Talk
and partial
pressure
to Solve for volume L6
fraction of gaseous
mixtures
L2
Equivalent to Understand gas
Gas const constant
and At the end of the session
47 L47 Chalk & Talk
Molecular the student will be able
Internal to Solve for gas
L6
Energy constant and internal
energy of gaseous
mixtures
the student will be able L2
to Understand enthalpy
Enthalpy, At the end of the session
48 L48 Chalk & Talk
sp. Heats the student will be able
to solve for enthalpy L6
and specific heats for
gaseous mixtures
Entropy of At the end of the session
49 L49 Mixture of the student will be able L2 Chalk & Talk
perfect to Understand entropy

Gases At the end of the session

L6
to Solve for entropy of
gaseous mixtures
L2
Entropy of to Understand Entropy
Vapour, of air
50 L50 Chalk & Talk
Atmospher At the end of the session
ic air the student will be able
L6
to Solve for entropy of
air
TOPICS
UNI LECT Bloo TEACHING DATE DATE
TO BE SESSION
S.N T URE ms METHODO PLAN CONDU
COVER OBJECTIVES
O NO NO Level LOGY NED CTED
ED
At the end of the

session the student Chalk & Talk
L2
will be able to https://www.y
POWER Understand otto cycle outube.com/w
51 L51 CYCLES: At the end of the atch?v=kQTZ
Otto cycle session the student V77CWpY
will be able to Solve L6 duration:
for efficiency of Otto 02:04
cycle
At the end of the
session the student
Chalk & Talk
V will be able to L2
https://www.y
Understand diesel
outube.com/w
Diesel cycle
52 L52 atch?v=yu_3Z
Cycle At the end of the
BhpNH8
session the student
duration:
will be able to Solve L6
02:20
for MEP of diesel
cycle
At the end of the
Dual
session the student
53 L53 Combusti L2 Chalk & Talk
will be able to
on cycle
Understand dual cycle

At the end of the

session the student
will be able to Solve
L6
for performance
parameters in dual
cycle
At the end of the
session the student
will be able to Chalk & Talk
Descriptio L2
Understand P-V and https://www.y
n and
T-S diagram for outube.com/w
representa
54 L54 cycles atch?v=kQTZ
tion on P-
At the end of the V77CWpY
V and T-S
session the student duration:
diagram
will be able to Create L6 02:04
P-V and T-S diagram
for modified cycles
At the end of the
session the student
will be able to L2
Thermal
Understand the
Efficiency
efficiency of cycles
55 L55 on Air Chalk & Talk
At the end of the
standard
session the student
basis
will be able to Predict L6
efficiency of
thermodynamic cycle
At the end of the
session the student
Mean will be able to L2
Effective Understand the
Pressures effective pressure
56 L56 Chalk & Talk
on Air At the end of the
standard session the student
basis will be able to Solve L6
for MEP of
thermodynamic cycle
At the end of the
session the student
will be able to Chalk & Talk
L2
Understand the cycle https://www.y
compariso in terms of operating outube.com/w
57 L57 n of parameters atch?v=qMG3
Cycles At the end of the 1yfx-DQ
session the student duration :
will be able to L6 04:29
Compare various
cycles

At the end of the

session the student
Chalk & Talk
will be able to L2
https://www.y
Introducti Understand Brayton
outube.com/w
on to cycle
58 L58 atch?v=m4kv
Brayton At the end of the
SLlxAaI
cycle session the student
duration:
will be able to Solve L6
01:20
for efficiency of
Brayton cycle
At the end of the

session the student Chalk & Talk
will be able to L2 https://www.y
Understand Bell outube.com/w
Bell coleman cycle atch?v=WUT
59 L59 Coleman P_GiQH2w
cycle At the end of the duration:
session the student 07:16
will be able to Solve GATE related
L6 video
for Performance
parameters of Bell
coleman cycle
13.7 Syllabus
UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION: Basic Concepts: System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe,
Types of Systems, Macroscopic and Microscopic viewpoints, Concept of Continuum,
Thermodynamic Equilibrium, State, Property, Process, Cycle, Reversibility, Quasi static Process,
Irreversible Process, Causes of Irreversibility, various flow and non flow process Energy in State
and in Transition, Types, Work and Heat, Point and Path function. Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics,
Concept of quality of Temperature, Principles of Thermometry, Reference Points, Const. Volume
gas Thermometer, Scales of Temperature, Ideal Gas Scale, PMMI - Joule’s Experiments, First law
of Thermodynamics, Corollaries First law applied to a Process, applied to a flow system, Steady
Flow Energy Equation.
UNIT - II
LIMITATIONS OF THE FIRST LAW: Thermal Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat pump, Parameters
of performance, Second Law of Thermodynamics, Kelvin Planck and Clausius Statements and their
Equivalence / Corollaries, PMM of Second kind, Carnot’s principle, Carnot cycle and its specialties,
Thermodynamic scale of Temperature, Clausius Inequality, Entropy, Principle of Entropy Increase,
Availability and Irreversibility, Thermodynamic Potentials, Gibbs and Helmholtz Functions,
Maxwell Relations, Elementary Treatment of the Third Law of Thermodynamics.
UNIT - III
PURE SUBSTANCES: P-V-T- surfaces, T-S and h-s diagrams, Mollier Charts, Phase
Transformations, Triple point at critical state properties during change of phase, Dryness Fraction.
Mollier charts, Various Thermodynamic processes and energy Transfer, Steam Calorimetry.

PERFECT GAS LAWS: Equation of State, specific and Universal Gas constants, Throttling and
Free Expansion Processes, Deviations from perfect Gas Model, Vander Waals Equation of State.
UNIT - IV
MIXTURES OF PERFECT GASES: Mole Fraction, Mass friction Gravimetric and volumetric
Analysis, Dalton’s Law of partial pressure, Avogadro’s Laws of additive volumes, Mole fraction ,
Volume fraction and partial pressure, Equivalent Gas const and Molecular Internal Energy,
Enthalpy, sp. Heats and Entropy of Mixture of perfect Gases and Vapour, Atmospheric air.
UNIT - V
POWER CYCLES: Otto, Diesel, Dual Combustion cycles, Description and representation on P-V
and T-S diagram, Thermal Efficiency, Mean Effective Pressures on Air standard basis, comparison
of Cycles. Introduction to Brayton cycle and Bell Coleman cycle.
TEXT BOOKS
1. P. K. Nag (2008), Engineering Thermodynamics, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
India.
2. Yunus Cengel, Boles (2011), Thermodynamics - An Engineering Approach, 7th edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, India.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. J. B. Jones, R. E. Dugan (2009), Engineering Thermodynamics, 1st edition, Prentice Hall of
India Learning, New Delhi, India.
2. Y. V. C. Rao (2009), An introduction to Thermodynamics, Revised Edition, Universities Press,
Hyderabad, India.
3. K. Ramakrishna (2011), Engineering Thermodynamics, 2nd edition, Anuradha Publishers,
India.

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Objectives
I S S H S S S
II H H S H S S S
III S H H H S S S
IV S H S S S S S
V H H S S S S S S


PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
a S S H S S S
b H H S H S S S
c S H H H S S S
d S H S S S S S
e H H S S S S S S

13.10 MAPPING OF BLOOMS TAXONOMY WITH COURSE OUTCOMES
6. Creating /
5. Evaluating /
Synthesis :
Evaluation:
4. Analyzing / Builds a structure
Make judgments
Analysis : or pattern from
about the value of
Separates material diverse elements.
ideas or
3. Applying / or concepts into Put parts together
2. Understanding materials.
Application: component parts to form a whole,
Blooms Taxonomy  / Comprehension
Use a concept in so that its with emphasis on
: Key Words:
a new situation or organizational creating a new
1. Remembering Comprehending Agree, Appraise,
unprompted use structure may be meaning or
/ Knowledge: the meaning, Assess, Award,
of an abstraction. understood. structure.
Recall or retrieve translation, Choose,
Applies what was Distinguishes
previous learned interpolation, and Compare,
learned in the between facts and Key Words:
information. interpretation of Conclude,
classroom into inferences. Adapt, Build,
instructions and Criteria,
novel situations Change,
Key Words: problems. State a Criticize, Decide,
Course Outcomes in the work place. Key Words: Choose, Combine,
Choose, Define, problem in one's Deduct, Defend,
Analyze, Assume, Compile,
Find, own words. Determine,
Key Words: Categorize, Compose,
How, Label, List, Disprove,
Apply, Build, Classify, Construct, Create,
Match, Name, Key Words: Estimate,
Choose, Compare, Delete, Design,
Omit, Recall, Classify, Compare, Evaluate,
Construct, Conclusion, Develop, Discuss,
Relate, Select, Contrast, Explain,
Develop, Contrast, Elaborate,
Show, Spell, Tell, Demonstrate, Importance,
Experiment, Discover, Dissect, Estimate,
What, When, Explain, Extend, Influence,
with, Identify, Distinguish, Formulate,
Where, Which, Illustrate, Infer, Interpret, Judge,
Interview, Make Divide, Examine, Happen, Imagine,
Who, Why Interpret, Outline, Justify, Mark,
use of, Model, Function, Improve, Invent,
Relate, Rephrase, Measure,
Organize, Plan, Inference, Inspect, Make up,
Show, Summarize, Opinion,
Select, Solve, List, Motive, Maximize,
Translate Perceive,
Utilize Relationships, Minimize,
Prioritize, Prove,
Simplify, Survey, Modify, Original,
Rate,
Take, part, in, Originate, Plan,
Recommend,
Test For, Theme Predict, Propose,
Rule on, Select,
Solution, Solve,
Support, value
Suppose, Test,

Theory
1.Demonstrate knowledge
of energy transfer and
work done and heat
equation in different
processes, power cycles
√ √ √
and thermodynamic laws.
2.Demonstrate knowledge
of ability to identify &
apply fundamentals to
solve problems like system
properties, amount of work
transfer and heat during
various processes, steam
√ √
properties at different
temperatures and pressures
using steam tables.
3.Demonstrate their
knowledge & ability to
design the thermal related
components in various
fields of energy transfer
√ √ √
equipments.
4.An ability to design a

system, component or
process to meet desired
needs within realistic √ √ √
constraints such as
economic, environmental,

social, political, ethical,

and safety
manufacturability and
sustainability related
thermal fields like I.C
engines, different types of
power plants etc.
5.The ability to use

modern engineering tools,
software and equipment to
analyze energy transfer in
√ √ √
required applications.
6.A knowledge of impact
of engineering solutions on
the society and also on
contemporary issues
related to different types of
√ √ √
power cycles.
7.A recognition of the

need for, and an ability to
engage in self education
and life-long learning.
√ √

OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
UNIT – I
1. A definite area or space where some thermodynamic process takes place is known as [A]
(a) thermodynamic system
(b) thermodynamic cycle
(c) thermodynamic process
(d) thermodynamic law.
2. An open system is one in which [C]

(a) heat and work cross the boundary of the system, but the mass of the working substance does not
(b) mass of working substance crosses the boundary of the system but the heat and work do not
(c) both the heat and work as well as mass of the working substances cross the boundary of the
system
(d) neither the heat and work nor the mass of the working substances cross the boundary of the
system.
3. An isolated system [C]

(a) is a specified region where transfer of energy and/or mass take place
(b) is a region of constant mass and only energy is allowed to cross the boundaries
(c) cannot transfer either energy or mass to or from the surroundings
(d) is one in which mass within the system is not necessarily constant
4. In an extensive property of a thermodynamic system [D]

(a) extensive heat is transferred
(b) extensive work is done
(c) extensive energy is utilised
5. Which of the following is an intensive property of a thermodynamic system ? [B]

(a) Volume (b) Temperature
(c) Mass (d) Energy.
6. Which of the following is the extensive property of a thermodynamic system ? [B]

(a) Pressure
(b) Volume
(c) Temperature
(d) Density.
7. When two bodies are in thermal equilibrium with a third body they are also in thermal equilibrium
with each other. This statement is called [A]
(a) Zeroth law of thermodynamics
(b) First law of thermodynamics
(c) Second law of thermodynamics
(d) Kelvin Planck’s law.
8. The temperature at which the volume of a gas becomes zero is called [B]
(a) absolute scale of temperature
(b) absolute zero temperature

(c) absolute temperature

9. The value of one bar (in SI units) is equal to [D]

(a) 100 N/m2
(b) 1000 N/m2
(c) 1 × 104 N/m2
(d) 1 × 105 N/m2
10. The absolute zero pressure will be [A]

(a) when molecular momentum of the system becomes zero
(b) at sea level
(c) at the temperature of – 273 K
(d) under vacuum conditions
11. Absolute zero temperature is taken as [A]

(a) – 273°C
(b) 273°C
(c) 237°C
(d) – 373°C.
12. Which of the following is correct ? [A]

(a) Absolute pressure = gauge pressure + atmospheric pressure
(b) Gauge pressure = absolute pressure + atmospheric pressure
(c) Atmospheric pressure = absolute pressure + gauge pressure
(d) Absolute pressure = gauge pressure – atmospheric pressure.
13. The unit of energy in SI units is [A]

(a) Joule (J)
(b) Joule metre (Jm)
(c) Watt (W)
(d) Joule/metre (J/m).
14. One watt is equal to [A]

(a) 1 Nm/s (b) 1 N/min
(c) 10 N/s (d) 100 Nm/s
15. One joule (J) is equal to [A]

(a) 1 Nm
(b) kNm
(d) 10 Nm/s
(d) 10 kNm/s.
16. The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1 kg of water through
1°C is called [C]
(a) specific heat at constant volume
(b) specific heat at constant pressure
(c) kilo calorie

17. The heating and expanding of a gas is called [B]

(a) thermodynamic system
(b) thermodynamic cycle
(c) thermodynamic process
(d) thermodynamic law.
18. A series of operations, which take place in a certain order and restore the initial condition is
known as [C]
(a) reversible cycle
(b) irreversible cycle
(c) thermodynamic cycle
19. The condition for the reversibility of a cycle is [D]

(a) the pressure and temperature of the working substance must not differ, appreciably, from those of
the surroundings at any stage in the process
(b) all the processes, taking place in the cycle of operation, must be extremely slow
(c) the working parts of the engine must be friction free
20. In an irreversible process, there is a [A]

(a) loss of heat
(b) no loss of heat
(c) gain of heat
(d) no gain of heat.
UNIT – II
1. Second law of thermodynamics defines [D]
(a) heat (b) work
(c) enthalpy
(d) entropy
(e) internal energy.
2. For a reversible adiabatic process, the change in entropy is [A]

(a) zero
(b) minimum
(c) maximum
(d) infinite
3. For any reversible process, the change in entropy of the system and surroundings is [A]
(a) zero
(b) unity
(c) negative
(d) positive
4. For any irreversible process the net entropy change is [B]
(a) zero
(b) positive

(c) negative
(d) infinite
5. The processes of a Carnot cycle are [D]

(a) two adiabatic and two constant volume
(b) one constant volume and one constant pressure and two isentropics
(c) two adiabatics and two isothermals
(d) two isothermals and two isentropics.
6. Isentropic flow is [D]

(a) irreversible adiabatic flow
(b) ideal fluid flow
(c) perfect gas flow
(d) reversible adiabatic flow.
7. In a Carnot engine, when the working substance gives heat to the sink [B]
(a) the temperature of the sink increases
(b) the temperature of the sink remains the same
(c) the temperature of the source decreases
(d) the temperatures of both the sink and the source decrease
8. If the temperature of the source is increased, the efficiency of the Carnot engine [B]
(a) decreases
(b) increases
(c) does not change
(d) will be equal to the efficiency of a practical engine
9. The efficiency of an ideal Carnot engine depends on [D]

(a) working substance
(b) on the temperature of the source only
(c) on the temperature of the sink only
(d) on the temperatures of both the source and the sink
10. In a reversible cycle, the entropy of the system [C]

(a) increases (b) decreases
(c) does not change (d) first increases and then decreases
11. A frictionless heat engine can be 100% efficient only if its exhaust temperature is [D]
(a) equal to its input temperature (b) less than its input temperature
(c) 0°C (d) 0°K
12. Kelvin-Planck’s law deals with [D]

(a) conservation of energy (b) conservation of heat (c) conservation of mass
(d) conversion of heat into work
13. Which of the following statements is correct according to Clausius statement of second law of
thermodynamics ? [B]
(a) It is impossible to transfer heat from a body at a lower temperature to a body at a higher

temperature
(b) It is impossible to transfer heat from a body at a lower temperature to a body at a higher
temperature, without the aid of an external source.
(c) It is possible to transfer heat from a body at a lower temperature to a body at a higher temperature
by using refrigeration cycle
(d) None of the above.
14. According to Kelvin-Planck’s statement of second law of thermodynamics [D]

(a) It is impossible to construct an engine working on a cyclic process, whose sole purpose is to
convert heat energy into work
(b) It is possible to construct an engine working on a cyclic process, whose sole purpose is to convert
the heat energy into work
(c) It is impossible to construct a device which while working in a cyclic process produces no effect
other than the transfer of heat from a colder body to a hotter body
(d) None of the above.
15. The property of a working substance which increases or decreases as the heat is supplied or
removed in a reversible manner is known as [C]
(a) enthalpy
(b) internal energy
(c) entropy
(d) external energy.
16. The entropy may be expressed as a function of [A]

(a) pressure and temperature
(b) temperature and volume
(c) heat and work
17. The change of entropy, when heat is absorbed by the gas is [A]
(a) positive
(b) negative
(c) positive or negative.
(d) none
18. Which of the following statements is correct ? [D]
(a) The increase in entropy is obtained from a given quantity of heat at a low temperature
(b) The change in entropy may be regarded as a measure of the rate of the availability of heat for
transformation into work
(c) The entropy represents the maximum amount of work obtainable per degree drop in temperature
(d) All of the above.
19. The condition for the reversibility of a cycle is [D]

(a) the pressure and temperature of working substance must not differ, appreciably from those of the
surroundings at any stage in the process
(b) all the processes taking place in the cycle of operation, must be extremely slow
(c) the working parts of the engine must be friction free
(d) all of the above.
20. In an irreversible process there is a [A]

(a) loss of heat

(b) no loss of work
(c) gain of heat
(d) no gain of heat.
UNIT – III
1. Choose the correct answer [D]
(a) Specific volume of water decreases on freezing
(b) Boiling point of water decreases with increasing pressure
(c) Specific volume of CO2 increases on freezing
(d) Freezing temperature of water decreases with increasing pressure.
2. Choose the correct answer [A]

(a) The slope of vapourisation curve is always negative
(b) The slope of vapourisation curve is always positive
(c) The slope of sublimation curve in negative for all pure substances
(d) The slope of fusion curve is positive for all pure substances.
3. Choose the correct answer [B]

(a) The process of passing from liquid to vapour is condensation
(b) An isothermal line is also a constant pressure line during wet region
(c) Pressure and temperature are independent during phase change
(d) The term dryness fraction is used to describe the fraction by mass of liquid in the mixture of
liquid water and water vapour.
4. The latent heat of vapourisation at critical point is [C]

(a) less than zero
(b) greater than zero
(c) equal to zero
5. Choose the correct answer [D]

(a) Critical point involves equilibrium of solid and vapour phases
(b) Critical point involves equilibrium of solid and liquid phases
(c) Critical point involves equilibrium of solid, liquid and vapour phases
(d) Triple point involves equilibrium of solid, liquid and vapour phases.
6. With the increase in pressure [B]

(a) boiling point of water increases and enthalpy of evaporation increases
(b) boiling point of water increases and enthalpy of evaporation decreases
(c) boiling point of water decreases and enthalpy of evaporation increases.
7. With increase in pressure [B]

(a) enthalpy of dry saturated steam increases
(b) enthalpy of dry saturated steam decreases
(c) enthalpy of dry saturated steam remains same
(d) enthalpy of dry saturated steam first increases and then decreases.

8. Dryness fraction of steam is defined as [C]

(a) mass of water vapour in suspension/(mass of water vapour in suspension + mass of dry steam)
(b) mass of dry steam/mass of water vapour in suspension
(c) mass of dry steam/(mass of dry steam + mass of water vapour in suspension)
(d) mass of water vapour in suspension/mass of dry steam.
9. The specific volume of water when heated at 0°C [B]

(a) first increases and then decreases
(b) first decreases and then increases
(c) increases steadily
(d) decreases steadily.
10. Only throttling calorimeter is used for measuring [B]

(a) very low dryness fraction up to 0.7
(b) very high dryness fraction up to 0.98
(c) dryness fraction of only low pressure steam
(d) dryness fraction of only high pressure steam.
11. choose the correct answer

(a) A perfect gas does not obey the law pv = RT [B]
(b) A perfect gas obeys the law pv = RT and has constant specific heat
(c) A perfect gas obeys the law pv = RT but have variable specific heat capacities.
12. Boyle’s law states that, when temperature is constant, the volume of a given mass of a perfect
gas [B]
(a) varies directly as the absolute pressure
(b) varies inversely as the absolute pressure
(c) varies as square of the absolute pressure
(d) does not vary with the absolute pressure.
13. Charle’s law states that if any gas is heated at constant pressure, its volume [A]
(a) changes directly as it absolute temperature
(b) changes inversely as its absolute temperature
(c) changes as square of the absolute temperature
(d) does not change with absolute temperature.
14. The equation of the state per kg of a perfect gas is given by, where p, v, R and T are the pressure,
volume, characteristic gas constant and temperature of the gas respectively. [B]
(a) p2v = RT
(b) pv = RT
(c) pv2 = RT
(d) p2v2 = RT.
15. The equation of state of an ideal gas is a relationship between the variables : [C]
(a) pressure and volume
(b) pressure and temperature
(c) pressure, volume and temperature

16. Joule’s law states that the specific internal energy of a gas depends only on [C]
(a) the pressure of the gas
(b) the volume of the gas
(c) the temperature of the gas
17. In an ideal gas the partial pressure of a component is [B]

(a) inversely proportional to the square of the mole fraction
(b) directly proportional to the mole fraction
(c) inversely proportional to the mole fraction
(d) equal to the mole fraction.
18. The value of the universal gas constant is [D]

(a) 8.314 J/kg K
(b) 83.14 kJ/kg K
(c) 848 kJ/kg K
(d) 8.314 kJ/kg K.
19. Mole fraction of a component of gas mixture is equal to, where, f = Volume fraction, and
p = Pressure of the mixture. [C]
(a) 1/f
(b) f2
(c) f
(d) f/p
20. In a gaseous mixture the specific volume of each component is given by, where, V = Volume of
the mixture, Vi = Volume of the ith component, m = Mass of mixture, and mi = Mass of the ith
component. [C]
(a) V/m
(b) Vi/mi
(c) V/mi
UNIT IV
1. The Clausius-Clapeyron equation is given by: [B]
(a)(dT/dP)sat= (hfg/T vfg)
(b) (dP/dT)sat = (hfg/T vfg)
(c) (dP/dv)sat= (vfg/T hfg)
(d) (dv/dP)sat = (Thfg/ vfg)
2. Which of the following variables controls the physical properties of a perfect gas [ D ]
(a) pressure
(b)temperature
(c) volume
(d)all of the above
3. The statement that molecular weights of all gases occupy the same volume is known as [ A]
(a)Avogadro’s hypothesis
(b)Dalton’s law

(c) Gas law

(d) Joule’s Law
4. During the adiabatic cooling of moist air ____ [D]

(a) dry-bulb temperature remains constant
(b) specific humidity remains constant
(c) Relative humidity remains constant
(d) specific enthalpy remains constant
5. Boyle's law states that when temperature is constant, the volume of a given mass of a perfect gas
[B]
(a) Varies directly as the absolute pressure
(b) varies inversely as the absolute pressure
(c) varies as square of the absolute pressure
(d) does not vary with the absolute pressure
6. Change of entropy depends upon [C]

(a)change of mass
(b)change of temperature
(c)change of heat
(d)change of specific heat
7. The ratio of molar specific heats for mono atomic gas is [C]
(a)1
(b)1.4
(c)1.67
(d)1.87
8. In mollier diagram the pressure lines are straight in the wet region, because [B]
(a)(dg/ds) is constant
(b)Tds is constant
(c) ds = constant
(d) dg is constant
9.With increase in temperature the specific heats for gases(except mono atomic)______ [A]
a) Increases
b)decreases
c)constant
d)zero
10.Relative C.O.P. is equal to _______ [A]

a)Actual C.O.P/Theoretical C.O.P
b) Actual C.O.P-Theoretical C.O.P
c) Actual C.O.P*Theoretical C.O.P
d) Actual C.O.P+Theoretical C.O.P
11. The specific heats of an ideal gas depend on its [A]

(a) Temperature
(b) Pressure

(c) Volume
(d) Molecular weight and structure
12. Which one of the following statements applicable to a perfect gas will also be true for an
irreversible process? (Symbols have the usual meanings). [C]
(a) dQ = du + pdV
(b) dQ = Tds
(c) Tds = du + pdV
13. The number of degrees of freedom for a diatomic molecule [D ]

(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
14. The ratio 𝐶𝑝/ for a gas with n degrees of freedom is equal to: [D]
(a) n + 1 (b) n – 1
(c) 2/n -1 (d) 1+2/n
15. The Clapeyron equation with usual notations is given by: [B]
(a) (𝑑𝑇/𝑑𝑃)𝑎𝑡 = h /𝑇𝑣
(b) (𝒅𝑷/ 𝒅𝑻) 𝒂 = h /𝑇𝑣
(c) (𝑑𝑇/𝑑𝑃)𝑎𝑡 = 𝑇 h /𝑣
(d) (𝑑𝑃/𝑑𝑇)𝑎𝑡 = 𝑇 h /𝑣
16. Clausius-Clapeyron equation gives the 'slope' of a curve in [C]

(a) p–v diagram
(b) p–h diagram
(c) p–T diagram
(d) T–S diagram
17. Number of components (C), phase (P) and degrees of freedom (F) are related by Gibbs-phase
rule as: [D]
(a) C – P – F = 2
(b) F – C – P = 2
(c) C + F – P = 2
(d) P + F – C = 2
18. As per Gibb's phase rule, if number of components is equal to 2 then the number of phases will
be: [C]
(a) ≤ 2
(b) ≤ 3
(c) ≤ 4
(d) ≤ 5
19. Gibb's phase rule is given by: [D]

(F = number of degrees of freedom; C = number of components; P = number of phases)
(a) F = C + P

(b) F = C + P – 2
(c) F = C – P – 2
(d) F = C – P + 2
20. Gibb's free energy 'c' is defined as: [A]

(a) G = H – TS
(b) G = U – TS
(c) G = U + pV
(d) G = H + TS
UNIT-V
1. For same compression ratio and for same heat added otto cycle is ___________efficient than
Diesel cycle [B]
(a)less
(b) more
(c)equally
(d) none
2. For same compression ratio the efficiency of dual combustion cycle is ______
Otto cycle [A]
(a)less than
(b)more than
(c)equal to
(d) none
3. Diesel cycle consists of following four processes _____ [C]

(a)two isothermals and two isentropics
(b) two isentropics and two constant volumes
(c) two isentropics and one constant volume and one constant pressure
(d) two isentropics and two constant pressures
4. For the same compression ratio and for same heat added ___ [A]
(a) Otto cycle is more efficient than Diesel cycle
(b) Diesel cycle is more efficient than Otto cycle
(c) both Otto and Diesel cycles are equally efficient
(d) none
5.Otto cycle consists of following four processes______ [B]

(a) Two isothermal and two isentropic
(b) two isentropic and two constant volume
(c) Two isentropic, one constant volume and one constant pressure
(d) Two isentropic and two constant pressure
6. The efficiency of Diesel cycle with decrease in cut off ____ [A]
(a) Increases
(b) decreases
(c) remains unaffected
(d) first increases and then decreases

7. Air standard efficiency of theoretical otto cycle [A]

(a)increases with increase in compression ration
(b) increases with increase in isentropic index of compression only
(c)does not depend upon the pressure ratio
(d)depends on the temperature after expansion
8. In an air compressor an after cooler is used to: [C]

(a)reduce volume of air
(b)remove impurities from air
(c)cool the air
(d)cause moisture and oil vapour to drop out

9. A heat engine is supplied heat at the ratio of 30,000 j/s and gives an output of 9kW.The thermal
efficiency of the engine is [A]
(a)30%
(b)33%
(c)40%
(d)50%
10.Work done in a free expansion process is: [A]

(a)zero
(b)always positive
(c)always negative
(d)non-zero quantity either positive or negative
11. In the expression of brake power BP= (2πnT/60),for a four stroke engine ‘n’ should be taken as:
[B]
(a)N
(b)N/2
(c)2N
(d)N/4
Where , N=speed of the crankshaft in rpm
12. The constant pressure gas turbine works on ___________cycle [D]

(A) Otto
(B) Joule
(C) stirling
(D) Brayton
13.Thermal power plant works on _________ [C]

(a) Carnot cycle
(b) Joules cycle
(c) Rankine cycle
(d) Otto cycle
14. Bell-Coleman cycle is a reversed ____ [B]

(a) Carnot cycle
(b) Joules cycle
(c) Rankine cycle
(d) Otto cycle
15. The constant pressure gas turbine works on the ____ [B]
(a) Reversed-Braytron cycle
(b) Braytron cycle
(c) Rankine cycle
(d) Otto cycle

16. Steam power plant works on______ cycle. [A]

a) Rankine
b) Otto
c) Carnot
d) Atkinson
17. According to ______law the specific c internal energy of a gas depends only on the temperature
of the gas and is independent of both pressure and volume. [C]
a) Atkinson
b) Turbo-jet
c)Joule’s
d) stirling
18. Dual cycle consists of_____ number of processes. [D]

a)two
b)four
c)one
d)five
19. The efficiency of RANKINE _______cycle is closer to that of Carnot cycle [A]
a)cycle
b)process
c)system
d)none
20. The ratio of actual cycle efficiency to that of the ideal cycle efficiency is called_____ [A]
a)Efficiency ratio b)COP ratio
c)power ratio d)speed ratio

TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - I
Tutorials
1 Define Closed System, Open System and Isolated System. Knowledge A
2 List some of the thermodynamics properties comprehension A
3 Explain the intensive and extensive properties. comprehension A
4 List the point functions and path functions. Knowledge A
5 Explain thermodynamic equilibrium. comprehension A
6 Describe thermodynamics cycle. comprehension A
7 Explain first law of thermodynamics. comprehension A
8 Define Zeroth law of thermodynamics. Knowledge A
9 List the differences between Open system and Closed system. Knowledge A
10 Define thermodynamic system, surrounding and universe. Knowledge A
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - I
Tutorials
1 Explain the Joule’s experiment with a neat sketch. Comprehension A

2 Give examples of closed, open and isolated systems. Comprehension A
3 Illustrate that heat and work are path functions. Analysis A
4 State and explain the zeroth law of thermodynamics. Knowledge A
5 State the limitations of first law of thermodynamics. Knowledge A
6 Explain the constant volume gas thermometer. Comprehension A
7 Differentiate open system and closed system. Analysis A
To a closed system 100 kJ of work is supplied. If the initial
volume is 0.5 m3 and pressure of a system changes as P = (8
8 Application A
– 4 V), where P is in bar and V is in m3, Compute the final
volume and pressure of the system.
9 PMM1 is impossible? Justify. Evaluation A
A stationary mass of gas is compressed without friction from
an initial state of 0.3 m3 and 0.105 MPa to a final state of
0.15 m3 and 0.105 MPa, the pressure remaining constant
10 Application A
during the process. There is a transfer of 37.6 kJ of heat from
the gas during the process. Calculate the change in internal
energy of the gas change?
Blooms Course
Sl.No Questions
Taxonomy Outcome

Level
UNIT - II
Tutorials
1 Define thermal energy reservoir. Knowledge B
2 Define heat engine and draw a neat sketch Knowledge B
3 Define heat pump and draw a neat sketch Knowledge B
4 Define refrigerator and draw a neat sketch Knowledge B
5 Define COP and write the equations for heat pump and
Knowledge B
refrigerator.
6 Define Kelvin Planck statement of II law of Thermodynamics. Knowledge B
7 Define Clausius statement of II law of Thermodynamics. Knowledge B
8 Define thermal efficiency of a heat engine cycle. Can this be
Knowledge B
100%.
9 List the processes in Carnot cycle. Knowledge B
10 State the Clausius inequality. Knowledge B
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - II
Tutorials
1 Differentiate the terms heat engine and heat pump. Analysis B
2 Explain the Carnot cycle with p-v diagram Comprehension B
Explain the equivalence of Kelvin Planck and Clausius
3 Comprehension B
statements of second law of thermodynamics.
4 Justify that entropy is a property of a system. Evaluation B
5 Explain the inequality of Clausius. Comprehension B
An inventor claims to have developed an engine that takes in
105 MJ at a temperature of 200 K, and delivers 15kWh of
6 Analysis B
mechanical work. Would you advise investing money to put
this engine in the market?
A reversible heat engine working between two thermal
reservoirs at 875 K and 315 K drives a reversible refrigerator
which operates between the same 315 K reservoir and a
7 reservoir at 260 K. The engine is supplied 2000 kJ of heat Application B
and the network output from the composite system is 350 kJ.
Calculate the heat transfer to the refrigerator and the new
heat interaction with the reservoir at 315 K temperature.
Using an engine of 30% thermal efficiency to drive a
refrigerator having a COP of 5, compute the heat input into
8 Application B
the engine for each MJ removed from the cold body by the
refrigerator?
A heat engine receives half of its heat supply at 1000 K and
9 half at 500 K while rejecting heat to a sink at 300 K. Application B
Compute the maximum possible thermal efficiency of this

heat engine?
A reversible heat engine operates between 875 K and 310 K
and deliver a reversible refrigerator operating between 310 K
10 and 255 K. The engine receives 2000 kJ of heat and new Application B
work output from the arrangement equals to 350 kJ.
Calculate the cooling effect of refrigerator.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - III
Tutorials
1 Define: critical point? Knowledge C
2 Define: pure substance? Knowledge C
3 Define: triple point of water. Knowledge C
4 Define: dryness fraction. Knowledge C
5 Draw the p-v diagram of pure substance water. Knowledge C
6 Draw the T-s diagram pure substance water . Knowledge C
7 Draw the p-v-T surface of the water. Knowledge C
8 Describe the Mollier chart. Knowledge C
9 List the methods of measurement of quality of steam. Knowledge C
10 Explain about Throttling and Free Expansion. Comprehension C
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
The volume of a high altitude chamber is 40m3.It is put into
operation by reducing pressure from 1bar to 0.4bar and
1 temperature from 250C to 50C.How many kg of air must be Application C
removed from the chamber during the process? Calculate the
mass as a volume measured at 1bar and 250C.
2 Draw the p-v-T surface diagram. Knowledge C
3 List the various dryness fraction measuring devices. Knowledge C
Determine dryness fraction of a wet steam of 5 kg, in which
4 Evaluation C
0.5 kg of water is present.
Determine the enthalpy of wet steam, if the pressure is 8 bar
5 Evaluation C
and 0.9 dryness.
Draw the isobaric lines and isothermal lines on Mollier chart
6 Knowledge C
(h-s diagram).
List the properties of dry saturated steam at 10 bar pressure
7 Knowledge C
using steam tables.
8 Explain the process of free expansion? Comprehension C
9 Explain the process of Throttling? Comprehension C
A reversible polytropic process begins with a fluid at
p1=10bar, T1=2000C and at p2=1bar, the exponent n has the
10 Application C
value 1.15. Calculate the final specific volume, the final
temperature and the heat transfer per kg of fluid, if the fluid

is air.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - IV
Tutorials
1 Define Mole fraction. Knowledge D
2 Define mass fraction Knowledge D
3 Define partial pressure of mixture of gases. Knowledge D
4 Define Dalton’s Law of partial pressure. Knowledge D
5 State Avagadro’s law. Knowledge D
6 State Boyles law Knowledge D
7 State Charles law Knowledge D
8 What is Gas constant Knowledge D
Write the procedure to find the entropy and specific heat of gaseous
9 Knowledge D
mixture
10 differentiate real gas and ideal gas Analysis D
Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No Outcome
Level
UNIT - IV
Tutorials
A Mixture of 2 kg Oxygen (M=32kg/kgmol) and 2kfg argon (m=40
Kg/kmd) is present in an insulated piston in cylinder arrangement at
100kpa, 300K. The piston now compresses the mixture to half of its
1 Application
initial volume. Calculate the final pressure, temperature and piston
work, assume c, for oxygen and argon for oxygen and argon as D
0.6618kj/kgk and 0.3122KJ/kgK respectively
Write the expression for Vander Wall’s equation and determine the
2 Knowledge D
constants?
A reversible polytropic process begins with a fluid at p1=10bar,
T1=2000C and at p2=1bar, the exponent n has the value 1.15. Application
3 D
Calculate the final specific volume, the final temperature and the
heat transfer per kg of fluid, if the fluid is air.
A constant volume of 0.3m3capacity contains 2kg of this gas at 50C.
Heat is transferred to the gas until the temperature is 1000C. Application
4 D
Calculate the work done, the heat transfer and changes in internal
energy, enthalpy and entropy?
Define mass fraction, mole fraction, volume fraction and partial
5 Knowledge D
pressure fraction of a constituent of a mixture of gases.
A tank having a volume of 0.6 m3, contains oxygen at 25o C and 480
6 kPa. Nitrogen is introduced into the tank without producing a change Evaluation D
in temperature until the pressure becomes 920 kPa. Determine the

mass of each gas and its partial volume.

7 Explain the Dalton’s law of partial pressure Comprehension D
A mixture of 6 kg of O2 and 9 kg of N2 has a pressure of 3 bar and a
temperature of 20oC. Determine for the mixture ( i ) the mole
8 Evaluation D
fraction of each component (ii) The molar mass (iii) Specific gas
constant (iv) the volume
A vessel of 6 m3 capacity contains two gases A and B in proportion
of 45 per cent and 55 per cent respectively at 30°C. If the value of R
9 for the gases is 0.288 kJ/kg K and 0.295 kJ/kg K and if the total Application D
weight of the mixture is 2 kg, calculate :(i) The partial pressure ; (ii)
The total pressure (iii) The mean value of R for the mixture
The pressure and temperature of mixture of 4 kg of O2 and 6 kg of N
are4 bar and 27°C respectively. For the mixture determine the
10 following :(i) The mole fraction of each component ; (ii) The Evaluation D
average molecular weight (iii) The specific gas constant ; (iv) The
volume and density (v) The partial pressures and partial volumes.
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - V
Tutorials
1 Draw the p-v and T-s diagram of Otto cycle. Knowledge E
2 Draw the p-v and T-s diagram of Diesel cycle. Knowledge E
3 Draw the p-v and T-s diagram of Dual cycle. Knowledge E
4 Draw the p-v and T-s diagram of Brayton cycle. Knowledge E
5 Draw the p-v and T-s diagram of Bell-Coleman cycle. Knowledge E
6 State the processes in Otto cycle Knowledge E
7 Distinguish between Otto, Diesel and Dual cycles Comprehension E
8 Write the expression for efficiency for Otto cycle Knowledge E
9 Write the expression for mean effective pressure for Diesel cycle Knowledge E
10 Write the expression for mean effective pressure for Brayton
Knowledge E
cycle
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - V
Tutorials
The swept volume of a diesel engine working on dual cycle is
0.0053 m3 and clearance volume is 0.00035m3. The maximum
pressure is 65 bar. Fuel injection ends at 5 percent of stroke. The
1 Evaluation E
temperature and pressure at the start of compression are 800C
and 0.9 bar. Determine the air standard efficiency of the cycle.
Take γ for air = 1.4
2 Describe Otto cycle with the help of P-V and T-S diagrams? Knowledge E

In a constant volume Otto cycle, the pressure at the end of

compression 15 times that at the start, the temperature of air at
the beginning of compression is 380C and maximum
3 Evaluation E
temperature attained in the cycle is 19500C. Determine i)
Compression ratio ii) Thermal efficiency of the cycle. iii) Work
done. Take γ for air = 1.4
4 Explain the Otto cycle with the help of P-V and T-S diagrams. Comprehension E
An engine working on Otto cycle is supplied with air at 0.1 M
Pa, 350C. The compression ratio is heat supplied is 2100kJ/kg.
5 Calculate the maximum pressure and temperature of cycle, Application E
cycle efficiency and Mean effective pressure. Take Cp =1.005,
Cv = 0.718, R= 0.287kJ/kg?
6 Explain dual cycle with the help of P-V and T-S diagrams. Comprehension E
A diesel engine has a clearance volume of 250 cm3 and a bore
and stroke of 15 cm and 20 cm respectively. The inlet
7 Application E
conditions are 100 kN/m2 and 200C.The maximum temperature
of the engine is 15000C Calculate thermal efficiency
8 Explain the Bell – Coleman cycle? Comprehension E
Compare Otto, Diesel and Dual cycle, for the same compression
9 Evaluation E
ratio and maximum temperature,
Derive thermal efficiency and mean effective pressure of a
10 Analysis E
diesel cycle

12.14 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - I
Assignments
1 Define thermodynamics process. Knowledge A

Label the thermodynamic system, boundary and surrounding of the
2 Knowledge A
give figure.
3 Draw the P-V diagram of Isobaric process. Knowledge A
4 List the modes of heat transfers. Knowledge A
5 Describe PMM I. Knowledge A
6 Sketch the control volume of nozzle and turbine. Knowledge A
7 Write the steady flow equation. Knowledge A
8 Define thermodynamic work. Knowledge A
9 Define thermometer and thermometry. Knowledge A
10 Draw the sign conventions of heat interaction and work interactions Knowledge A
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - I
Assignments
If a gas of volume 6000 cm3 and at pressure of 100 kPa is

compressed quasi-statically according to pV2 = constant until
1 Application A
the volume becomes 2000 cm3, compute the final pressure and
the work transfer.
Air flows steadily at the rate of 0.5 kg/s through an air
compressor, entering at 7 m/s velocity, 100 kPa pressure, and
0.95 m3/g volume, and leaving at 5 m/s, 700 kPa, and 0.19
2 m3/kg. The internal energy of the air leaving is 90 kJ/kg greater Application A
than that of the air entering. Cooling water in the compressor
jackets absorbs heat from the air at the rate of 58 kW. Compute
the rate of shaft work input to the air in kW.
In a steady flow apparatus, 135 kJ of work is done by each kg of
fluid. The specific volume of the fluid, pressure, and velocity at
the inlet are 0.37 m3/kg, 600 kPa, and 16 m/s. The inlet is 32 m
3 Evaluation A
above the floor, and the discharge pipe is at floor level. The
discharge conditions are 0.62 m3/kg, 100 kPa, and 270 m/s. The
total heat loss between the inlet and discharge is 9 kJ/kg of

fluid. In flowing through this apparatus, does the specific

internal energy increase or decrease, and justify?
Reproduce the displacement work in a polytropic process
4 Knowledge A
pVn=C.
5 Explain the quasi-static process with a neat sketch. Comprehension A
Gas from a bottle of compressed helium is used to inflate an
inelastic flexible balloon, originally folded completely flat to a
6 volume of 0.5 m3. If the barometer reads 760 mm of Hg, what is Knowledge A
the amount of work done upon the atmosphere by the balloon?
Sketch the system before and after the process.
A mass of 1.5 kg of air is compressed in a quasi-static process
from 0.1 MPa to 0.7 MPa for which pv = constant. The initial
7 Application A
density of air is 1.16 kg/ m3. Compute the work done by the
piston to compress the air.
8 Setup that the internal energy is a property of the system. Application A
A mass of 2.5 kg of air is compressed in a quasi static process
from 0.1 MPa to 0.7 MPa for which PV = constant. The initial
9 Application A
specific volume is 0.80 m3/kg. Compute the work done by the
piston to compress the air.
10 Differentiate the microscopic and macroscopic viewpoints. Analysis A
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - II
Assignments
1 Define mechanical energy reservoir Knowledge B

2 Define the term entropy Knowledge B
3 List some high grade energies and low grade energies. Knowledge B
4 Define the term available energy. Knowledge B
5 State Helmholtz function and Gibbs function? Knowledge B
6 List few Maxwell’s equations. Knowledge B
7 Write the Clausius-chaperon equation. Knowledge B
8 Define third law of thermodynamics. Knowledge B
9 Define dead state? Knowledge B
10 State the Carnot principles. Knowledge B

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - II
Assignments
1 Explain the Kelvin Planck and Clausius statements. Comprehension B
0.2 kg of air at 300 0C is heated reversibly at constant pressure to
2 2066 K. Calculate the available and unavailable energies of the Application B
heat added. Take T0 = 30 0C and cp = 1.004 kJ/kg K.
3 Explain the available energy referred to a cycle. Comprehension B
4 Explain the Maxwell’s equations. Comprehension B
5 Explain the Gibb’s and Helmholtz function Comprehension B
Two kg of air at 500 kPa, 80 0C expands adiabatically in a closed
system until its volume is doubled and its temperature becomes
equal to that of the surroundings which is at 100 kPa, 5 0C. For
this process, determine (a) the maximum work (b) the change in
6 Evaluation B
availability, and (c) the irreversibility. For air, take cv = 0.718
kJ/kg K, u = cv T where cv is constant, and pV = mRT where p
is pressure in kPa, V volume in m3 , m mass in kg, R a constant
equal to 0.287 kJ/kg K, and T temperature in K.
7 Explain Clausius-Claperyon equation. Comprehension B
A reversible power cycle is used to drive a reversible heat pump
cycle. The power cycle takes in Q1 heat units at T1 and rejects
8 Q2 at T2. The heat pump abstracts Q4 from the sink at T4 and Analysis B
discharges Q3 at T3. Develop an expression for the ratio of
Q4/Q1 in terms of the four temperatures.
9 Explain the Carnot’s theorem. Comprehension B
10 Explain the corollary of Carnot’s theorem. Comprehension B
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - III
Assignments
1 Define: critical point? Knowledge C

2 Define: pure substance? Knowledge C
3 Define: triple point of water. Knowledge C
4 Define: dryness fraction. Knowledge C
5 Draw the p-v diagram of pure substance water. Knowledge C
6 Draw the T-s diagram. Knowledge C
7 Draw the p-v-T surface of the water. Knowledge C
8 Describe the Mollier chart. Evaluation C
9 List the methods of measurement of quality of steam. Knowledge C
10 Explain Thermodynamic Potentials. Comprehension C

Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - III
Assignments
List the properties of dry saturated steam at 10 bar pressure
1 Knowledge C
using steam tables.
2 Draw the saturation curve on p-v and T-s diagrams for water. Knowledge C
3 Draw the Isobaric line on p-v and T-s diagram for water. Knowledge C
Compute the enthalpy and entropy of dry saturated steam at 5
4 Application C
bar using Mollier chart.
Determine the enthalpy of water to convert water at 200C to dry
5 Evaluation C
saturated steam at 1000C.
6 Explain the phase transformation of water. Comprehension C
7 Define latent heat. Knowledge C
List the enthalpy, entropy and specific volume of superheated
8 Knowledge C
vapor at 20 bar and 3000C.
9 State the Clausius – clapeyron equation. Knowledge C
10 Define sensible heating. Knowledge C
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - IV
Assignments
1 Differentiate between mole fraction and volume fraction Analysis D

2 Differentiate between mass fraction and mole fraction Analysis D
3 Explain in brief gravimetric analysis Comprehension D
4 Explain in brief volumetric analysis Comprehension D
Explain the procedure to calculate equivalent as constant for
5 Comprehension
gaseous mixture
6 Write the equation for entropy of mixture of perfect gases Knowledge D
7 Write the equation for enthalpy of mixture of perfect gases Knowledge D
8 Write the equation for specific heat of mixture of perfect gases Knowledge D
9 Distinguish between moisture and gas Comprehension D
Write the expression for equivalent molecular energy of mixture
10 Knowledge D
of gases
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - IV

Assignments
1 Write the equation of state and explain. Knowledge D
determine the final pressure, work done and change of internal
2 energy per kg of air at 2500C and 300kPa is compressed reversibly Evaluation D
and isothermally to 1/16th of its original volume.
calculate :(i) The partial pressure ; (ii) The total pressure ;(iii) The
mean value of R for the mixture of a vessel of 6 m3 capacity
contains two gases A and B in proportion of45 per cent and 55 per
3 Application D
cent respectively at 30°C. If the value of R for the gases is 0.288
kJ/kg K and 0.295 kJ/kg K and if the total weight of the mixture is 2
kg.
determine the (i) The mole fraction of each component (ii) The
average molecular weight (iii) The specific gas constant ; (iv) The
4 volume and density (v) The partial pressures and partial volumes of Evaluation D
mixture of 4 kg of O2 and 6 kg of N2 with pressure and temperature
of 4 bar and 27°C respectively.
4 kg of carbon dioxide at 40°C and 1.4 bar are mixed with 8 kg of
nitrogen at 160°C and 1.0 bar to form a mixture at a final pressure
of 0.7 bar. The process occurs
5 Application D
adiabatically in a steady flow apparatus. Calculate :
(i) The final temperature of the mixture ; (ii) The change in entropy.
Take value of Cp : for CO2 = 0.85 kJ/kg K and N2 = 1.04 kJ/kg K.
Determine :(i) The temperature of the equilibrium mixture; (ii) The
pressure of the mixture ; (iii) The change in entropy for each
component and total value of a tank of capacity 0.45 m3 is insulated
and is divided into two sections through a partition. One section
6 initially contains H2 at 3 bar and 130°C and has a volume of 0.3 m3 Evaluation D
and the other section initially holds N2 at 6 bar and 30°C. The gases
are then allowed to mix after removing the adiabatic partition.
Assume : Cv (N2 ) = 0.744 kJ/kg K, Cv (H2 ) = 10.352 kJ/kg.K
Cp (N2 ) = 1.041 kJ/kg K, Cp(H2 ) = 14.476 kJ/kg K.
A perfect gas mixture consists of 4 kg of N2 and 6 kg of CO2 at a
pressure of 4 bar and a temperature of 25°C. Calculate Cv and Cp of
the mixture. If the mixture is heated at constant volume to 50°C,
7 Application D
find the change in internal energy, enthalpy and entropy of the
mixture. Take : Cv (N2 ) = 0.745 kJ/kg K, Cv (CO2 ) = 0.653 kJ/kg
K cp(N2 ) = 1.041 kJ/kg K, cp(CO2 ) = 0.842 kJ/kg K.
An insulated vessel containing 1 mole of oxygen at a pressure of 2.5
bar
and a temperature of 293 K is connected through a valve to a second
insulated rigid vessel containing 2 mole nitrogen at a pressure of 1.5
bar and a temperature of 301 K. The valve is opened and adiabatic
8 Application D
mixing takes place. Assuming that oxygen and nitrogen are perfect
gases calculate the entropy change in the mixing process.
Assume the following specific heats at constant volume :
cv(O2 ) = 0.39 kJ/kg K
cv(N2 ) = 0.446 kJ/kg K.

Given that air consists of 21% oxygen and 79% nitrogen by volume.
Determine:
(i) The moles of nitrogen per mole of oxygen ;
9 Evaluation D
(ii) The partial pressure of oxygen and nitrogen if the total pressure
is atmosphere ;
(iii) The kg of nitrogen per kg of mixture.
Air (N2 = 77%, O2 = 23% by weight) at 25°C and 12 bar is
contained in a
vessel of capacity 0.6 m3. Some quantity of CO2 is forced into the
10 Application D
vessel so that the temperature remains at 25°C but the pressure rises
to 18 bar.
Calculate the masses of O2, N2 and CO2 in the cylinder
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - V
Assignments
1 Write the air standard efficiency equation for Diesel cycle. Knowledge E
2 Write the air standard efficiency equation for Dual cycle. Knowledge E
3 Write the air standard efficiency equation for Stirling cycle. Knowledge E
4 Write the air standard efficiency equation for Atkinson cycle. Knowledge E
5 Write the air standard efficiency equation for Lenoir cycle. Knowledge E
6 Define compression ratio. Knowledge E
Write the relation between compression ratio, expansion ratio and
7 Knowledge E
cut-off ratio.
8 Define expansion ratio. Knowledge E
Write the order of air standard efficiency of Otto, Diesel and Dual
9 Knowledge E
cycles based on same compression ratio.
10 Write the heat addition equation for Otto cycle. Knowledge E
Blooms
Course
Outcome
Level
UNIT - V
Assignments
1 An air standard dual cycle has a compression ratio of 18, and Comprehension E

compression begins at 1 bar 500C.The maximum pressure is 60

bar. The heat transferred to air at constant pressure is equal to
that at constant volume. Estimate
i. pressures and temperatures at cardinal points of the cycle
ii. cycle efficiency
iii. m.e.p of cycle. Cv =0.718 kj/kg k, Cp=1.005 kj/kg k.
The compression ratio in an air standard Otto cycle is 7.5. At the

beginning of compression process the pressure is120 kN/m2and
the temperature is 300 K. The heat added to the air per cycle is
1650 kJ/kg of air. Calculate.
2 Application E
(a) The pressures and the temperatures at the end of each
process of the cycle
(b) The thermal efficiency
(c) The m.e.p of the cycle;
An air standard diesel cycle has a compression ratio of 17. The
pressure at the beginning of compression stroke is 1 bar and the
3 temperature is 230C. The maximum temperature is 14300C. Evaluation E
Determine the thermal efficiency and the mean effective
pressure for this cycle.
Compare the air standard efficiencies of Otto cycle, diesel and
4 dual cycle based on same compression ratio with the help of p-v Evaluation E
diagram.
Compare the air standard efficiencies of Otto cycle, diesel and
5 dual cycle based on same maximum pressure and maximum Evaluation E
temperature with the help of p-v diagram.
6 Derive the air standard efficiency of Otto cycle. Creation E
7 Derive the air standard efficiency of Diesel cycle Creation E
8 Derive the air standard efficiency of Dual cycle Creation E
9 Derive the air standard efficiency of Brayton cycle Creation E
10 Derive the air standard efficiency of Bell-Coleman cycle Creation E

14.0 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING MATERIALS (OPEN ELECTIVE-I) (A10327)
14.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION

Course Code A10327
Course Title INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING MATERIALS
Course Structure
3 1 - 3
Course Coordinator Dr. L.Venugopal Professor
Team of Instructors Taj, T.N. Ravikanth
Metallurgy is a domain of materials science and engineering that studies the physical and chemical
behavior of metallic elements, their intermetallic compounds, and their mixtures, which are called
alloys. Metallurgy is also the technology of metals: the way in which science is applied to the
production of metals, and the engineering of metal components for use in products for consumers
and manufacturers. The production of metals involves the processing of ores to extract the metal
they contain, and the mixture of metals, sometimes with other elements, to produce alloys
14.2. PREREQUISITES
Level Credits Periods / Week Prerequisites
Engineering
Workshop Practice,
UG 4 5
production
technology
14.3. COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:

Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks
examination consists of one objective paper, one subjective
paper and four assignments. The objective
Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice questions,
fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper contains of 4 full
75 100
carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination shall be conducted
for 2.5 units of syllabus and second
marks are allocated for Assignments. First two assignments
conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments should
be submitted before the conduct of the second mid. The total
marks secured by the student in each midterm examination are
evaluated for 25 marks, and the average of the two midterm

examinations shall be taken as the final marks secured by each

candidate.

Able to analyze the performance factors in the
Assignments
a study of elementary treatment of metal
cutting.
Analyze various types of operations
Assignments
b performed on conventional machining
operations
Assignments
c performed on lathe, shaing, slotting, planer,
Assignments
d performed on grinding, lapping, super
fininshing etc.
e
14.4 EVALUATION METHOD

2 I Assignment 5
4 II Assignment 5
Total 75


Able to analyze the performance factors in the
Assignments
a study of elementary treatment of metal
cutting.
Assignments
b performed on conventional machining
operations
Assignments
c performed on lathe, shaing, slotting, planer,
Assignments
d performed on grinding, lapping, super
fininshing etc.
e

2 I Assignment 5
4 II Assignment 5
Total 75
14.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Applying different Materials for
engineering builds on the
foundation of materials science
and is concerned with the Students will be able to
design, fabrication, and optimal Apply the design
1 selection of engineering ,fabrication and optimal BL1
materials that must selection of engineering
simultaneously fulfill materials
dimensional, property, quality
control, and economic
requirements

Students will be able to

Knowledge of the fundamental Apply the knowledge based
2 science and engineering on the engineering BL 2
principles relevant to materials principles relevant to
materials
Understand the relationship Students will be able to

between nano/microstructure, understand and draw
3 different microstructure and BL 3
characterization, properties and
recognize the properties of
processing and design of materials
materials.
Analyzing and experimental Students will be able to
computational skills for a understand how to apply
4 professional career or graduate design and conduct BL 4
experiments, and to analyze
study in materials.
data

To understand and apply core understand able to apply
concepts in Materials Science to general math, science and
5 BL 5
solve engineering problems. engineering skills to the
solution of engineering
problems

To analyze the selection of Reconstruct and possess the
6 materials for design and skills and techniques BL 6
construction. necessary for modern
materials engineering
practice.
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)


Proficiency
Program Outcomes Level Blooms Level
assessed by
An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematical Applying and

A H Assignment
foundations and engineering theory in the modeling design. Evaluating
Assigning
An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to
B H Exercises Analyzing
analyze the concept.
An ability to design , implement, process the component to meet

Assigning
desired needs, within realistic constraints such as economic,
C S Exercises Creating
environmental, social, political, health and safety,
manufacturability, and sustainability (Creative Skills)
An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary teams Analyzing and
D N Mini Projects
(team work) Applying
An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate and use the

Analyzing and
E appropriate computing and engineering requirements for H Mini Projects
Evaluating
obtaining its solution (engineering problem solving skills)
An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and Assigning

F N Understanding
social issues and responsibilities (professional integrity) Exercises
An ability to communicate effectively both in writing and orally
G N ---
(speaking / writing skills)
The broad education necessary to analyze the local and global
H impact of computing and engineering solutions on individuals, N ---
organizations, and society (engineering impact assessment skills)
Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in
Remembering and
I continuing professional development and life-long learning H Discussions
Applying
(continuing education awareness)
J A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social awareness) N ---
An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary for
Assigning Applying and
K computing and engineering practice (practical engineering S
Exercises Analyzing
analysis skills)
An ability to apply design and development principles in the Understanding
L construction of mechanical engineering systems of varying S Discussions Applying
complexity And Creating
development by pursuing postgraduate studies or face competitive Remembering And
M S Discussions
examinations that offer challenging and rewarding careers in Creating
computing (successful career and immediate employment).

14.8. SYLLABUS
SYLLABUS
UNIT – I STRUCTURE OF METALS: Crystallography, Miller‘s indices, Packing Efficiency, Density
calculations. Grains and Grain Boundaries. Effect of grain size on the properties. Determination of grain size
by different methods. Constitution of Alloys: Necessity of alloying, Types of solid solutions, Hume - Rothery
rules, Intermediate alloy phases.
UNIT –II PHASE DIAGRAMS: Construction and interpretation of phase diagrams, Phase rule. Lever rule.
Binary phase Diagrams, Isomorphous, Eutectic and Eutectoid transformations with examples.
UNIT –III STEELS: Iron-Carbon Phase Diagram and Heat Treatment: Study of Fe-Fe3C phase diagram.
Construction of TTT diagrams. Annealing, Normalizing, Hardening and Tempering of steels, Hardenability.
Alloy steels.
UNIT –III CAST IRONS: Structure and properties of White Cast iron, Malleable Cast iron, Grey cast iron.
Engineering Materials-III: Non-ferrous Metals and Alloys: Structure and properties of copper and its alloys,
Aluminium and its alloys, Al-Cu phase diagram, Titanium and its alloys.
UNIT – IV CERAMICS, POLYMERS AND COMPOSITES: Crystalline ceramics, glasses, cermets:

structure, properties and applications. Classification, properties and applications of composites. Classification,
Properties and applications of Polymers.
TEXT BOOKS
1.V. Raghavan (2011), Material Science and Engineering: A first course, 5th edition, Prentice Hall of
India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.
2.Sidney H. Avener (2007,) Introduction to Physical Metallurgy, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw hill
education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.V. D. Kodgire (2006), Material Science and Metallurgy for engineers, 1st Edition, Everest, Pune,
India.
2.Pakirappa (2011), Metallurgy and Material Science, 5th Edition, DPH, Hyderabad, India.
3.Vanvlack, Lawrence (1998), Elements of Material Science and Engineering, 6th edition, Addison
Wesley, Massachusetts.
14.9. COURSE PLAN:
Unit Lecture Teaching

Topic Session Objectives
No. Number Methodology
At the end of the session, student
Chalk & Talk
can able to
https://www.yout
Introduction about  Know about different types of
1 L1 ube.com/watch?v
metallurgy metals
=8YqBzwMQeZs
 Understand the applications of
Time: 5min
material science
Bonds in solids, At the end of the session, student Chalk & Talk
2 L2 ionic bond, covalent can https://www.yout
bond, metallic bond ube.com/watch?v

 learn about different types of =Qf07-8Jhhpc

bonds Time: 5min
 able to correlate the properties
of the bonds
At the end of the session, student Chalk & Talk
can https://www.yout
3 L3 Crystallization  Understand difference between ube.com/watch?v
amorphous and crystals =noQwqUQ5S6s
 formation on different structures Time: 5min
Unit cell, crystal can https://www.yout
4 L4 and grain crystal  Understands unit cell structure ube.com/watch?v
systems of metals  classify difference between =8EUyrpNnvSc
crystal structure Time: 2min
Crystal structure Chalk & Talk
can
Body centered cubic, https://www.yout
 Understands types of crystal
5 L5 face centered cubic, ube.com/watch?v
structure
hexagonal centered =8EUyrpNnvSc
cubic.  Calculate the atomic packing
Time: 2min
efficiency
can able to https://www.yout
Grain and Grain
6 L6  Define grain ube.com/watch?v
boundary
 Analyze the grain boundary =EEkfuNpEai8
constraints Time: 2min
can able to Chalk & Talk
Effect of grain
 Understand about the effect of https://www.yout
boundary,
7 L7 grain boundary ube.com/watch?v
Determination of
grain size  Calculate grain size constraints =uG35D_euM-0
according to ASTM Time: 5min

Hall-petch equation, can able to
Alloy , https://www.yout
8 L8  Solve the problems using hall- ube.com/watch?v
classification of
petch equation =BhTppunyz_U
Alloys
 Classify the types of alloys Time: 4min
Necessity, solid At the end of the session, student
solutions, Metallic Chalk & Talk
can able to
solid solutions, https://www.yout
9 L9  Understand about solid ube.com/watch?v
Substitution solid solutions
=1rmNEa6dhHQ
solutions, interstitial  Classify theTypes of solid Time: 4min
solid solutions. solutions
Hume Rothery rules
10 L10 can able to https://www.yout
of solid solubility
 Figure out what is hume ube.com/watch?v

ruthery rules =5yW9YnOcEpg

 Understand its applications Time: 5min
can able to
Intermediate alloy  Analyse different phases of Chalk & Talk
11 L11
phase alloys
 Understand different stages in
alloy transformations
can able to
 Understand about Phonons, Chalk & Talk
12 L12 Electron compounds
Optoelectronic Materials
 Understand material
phenomena
Experimental At the end of the session, student Chalk & Talk
methods of can able to https://www.yout
13 L13 construction of  Construct equilibrium diagrams ube.com/watch?v
equilibrium  Identify the phases of the =GU6GXhjSYto
diagrams equilibrium Time: 4min
Equilibrium cooling  Apply different cooling ube.com/watch?v
14 L14
and heating of alloys procedure of alloys =AkZKNMOOe2
 Understand heati ng procedure Y
of alloys Time: 4min
can able to
Chalk & Talk
 Understand how the rule
applies to non-reactive multi- https://www.yout
15 L15 Gibb’s rule ube.com/watch?v
component heterogeneous
systems =L0-3WEokrWA
Time: 2min
 Apply foundations of the phase
rule
Chalk & Talk
can able to
 Determine the weight https://www.yout
16 Lever rule ube.com/watch?v
percentages at each phase
L16 =M3ujl75kdTA
 Calculate the phase diagrams of
Time: 2min
liquids
Coring miscibility
gaps Congruent
17 L17  Understand phases of alloys ube.com/watch?v
melting intermediate
phases  Remember different =aRG0_VlMnrs
transformation of phases Time: 1min
Binary Alloy At the end of the session, student Chalk & Talk
18 L18 Systems- can able to https://www.yout
Isomorphous alloy  Draw different types of alloy ube.com/watch?v

systems systems in binary phase =z16UtwexKnM

Understand Isomorphous alloy Time: 5min
systems
Chalk & Talk
can able to
Binary Alloy  Draw different types of alloy https://www.yout
Systems- Eutectic systems in binary
phase(eutectic system) =B_tKXY9ffUg
Time: 5min
 Understand eutectic alloy
can able to
 Draw different types of alloy Chalk & Talk
partial eutectic
20 L20 systems in binary phase(partial
systems
eutectic )
 Understand partial eutectic
system
Binary Alloy
21 L21  Understand different types of ube.com/watch?v
Systems- Peritectic
alloy systems =w_XhpYF-3b0
 Understand peritectic alloy Time: 5min
can able to
Transformations-  Know about occurrence of Chalk & Talk

22 L22
Eutectoid transformations
 Understand about the mixture
of materials

can able to
 Understand transformation of
Peritectoid alloy material from 2-solid phase to Chalk & Talk
23 L23
systems 3-solid phase
 Understand isothermal reaction
process

 Determine the stages of https://www.yout
Phase diagrams of
24 L24 solidification of metals ube.com/watch?v
cu-zn
Understand the different phases =c-HztY0WzEU
in solidification of different Time: 5min
metals
Chalk & Talk
25 L25 Introduction can able to
 Understand about steel

composition
 Know about different types of
steels
 Understand how steel was https://www.yout
Classification of
26 L26 classified into different ube.com/watch?v
steels
categories =3dmLCcCOc-0
 Know about the core standards Time: 5min
of steel
Chalk & Talk
can able to
Structure and https://www.yout
 Understand the structural
27 L27 properties of plain ube.com/watch?v
abilities of the carbon steel
carbon steels =VrBE7C3niK0
 Determine the properties of the
Time: 2min
carbon steel
Structure and can able to https://www.yout
28 L28 properties of Low  Understand the structural ube.com/watch?v
alloy steels abilities of the low alloy steel
=mdhFaiwp8Do
Time: 5min
low alloy steel
can able to
Structure and Chalk & Talk
properties of https://www.yout
abilities of the Hadfield
29 L29 Hadfield manganese ube.com/watch?v
manganese steel
steels, tool and die =Jj2yQc5xnAM
steels  Determine the properties of the
Time: 5min
H-Manganese steel

Chalk & Talk
can able to
30 L30 properties of White ube.com/watch?v
abilities of the white cast iron
Cast iron =epf4JiFwSCY
Time: 3min
white cast iron
Structure and  Understand the structural https://www.yout
31 L31 properties of abilities of the malleable cast ube.com/watch?v
Malleable Cast iron iron =ReqHbOoDOpE
 Determine the properties of the Time: 3min
malleable cast iron
Structure and At the end of the session, student Chalk & Talk
properties of can able to https://www.yout
32 L32
Spheriodal graphite  Understand the structural ube.com/watch?v
cast iron abilities of the Spheriodal =ReqHbOoDOpE

graphite cast iron Time: 3min

Spheriodal graphite cast iron
Chalk & Talk
can able to
33 L33  Understand the structural
properties of grey ube.com/watch?v
abilities of the grey cast iron
cast iron =8vhQo0kP2Qs
Time: 3min
grey cast iron
Chalk & Talk
EFFECT OF https://www.yout
can able to
34 L34 ALLOYING ube.com/watch?v
 Infer the effect of different
ELEMENTS =9LHDSB1n11k
alloying element.
Time: 4min
Chalk & Talk
can able to
 Gain knowledge about https://www.yout
35 L35 Annealing ube.com/watch?v
annealing
=GFVeYXJJndw
 Study the Characteristics of
Time: 4min
metals after annealing
Chalk & Talk
can able to
 Gain knowledge about https://www.yout
36 L36 Normalizing, ube.com/watch?v
Normalizing
=MugpDYs4LaA
 Characteristics of metals after
Time: 4min
Normalizing
can able to
Chalk & Talk
 Evaluate the specific
TTT diagrams, composition of material https://www.yout
Tempering  Understand how the
=sWcre4X8wkI
temperature is held
Time: 5min
constant during the
transformation
 Understand the metalworking https://www.yout
Hardening , process used to increase the ube.com/watch?v
38 L38
Hardenability, hardness of a metal. =qW0aUbTWtV
Understand the way to indicate a M
material's potential to be Time: 5min
hardened by thermal treatment
Age hardening
39 L39  Understand the technique used ube.com/watch?v
treatment
to increase the yield strength of =CmsfL0U8qWA
malleable materials Time: 2min


Cryogenic treatment
40 L40  Understand where the material ube.com/watch?v
of alloys
is cooled to very low =D3d0u9h1AY8
temperatures Time: 5min
can able to
Introduction ,  Identify the Metals do not Chalk & Talk
41 L41 nonferrous metals contain Iron
and alloys  Understand mixture of a
metal and another
element
Chalk & Talk
can able to
https://www.yout
Copper properties  Understand copper is a soft,
and its alloys malleable and ductile metal
=XN0LF2t-tf0
with very high thermal and
Time: 5min
electrical conductivity
can able to
 Understand about Aluminium Chalk & Talk
Structure and
alloy surfaces will develop a https://www.yout
properties of
43 L43 white, protective layer ube.com/watch?v
aluminum and its
of aluminium oxide if left =fa6KEwWY9HU
alloys
unprotected by anodizing Time: 3min
and/or correct painting
procedures
Structure and  Understand Titanium https://www.yout
properties of alloys are metals that contain a ube.com/watch?v
44 L44
Titanium and its mixture of titanium and
alloys other chemical elements. Such =Ck5SQYEInoA
alloys have very high tensile Time: 4min
strength and toughness
can able to
Introduction TO Chalk & Talk
 Understand ceramic is an
CERAMICS, https://www.yout
inorganic non-metallic solid
45 L45 Classification of ube.com/watch?v
made up of either metal or non-
Ceramic Materials, =0hI7wVDa9Ww
metal compounds that have
Crystalline Ceramics Time: 4min
been shaped and then hardened
by heating to high temperatures
Glasses- Properties At the end of the session, student
Chalk & Talk
46 L46 can able to
and Applications, Its https://www.yout
 Understand about uniform

StructureTypes of amorphous solid material ube.com/watch?v

Glasses, =XQuMeV2vJFs
Composition of Time: 4min
Glasses & their
Comparison
can able to
 Understand composite material Chalk & Talk
composed of ceramic (cer) and
Cermets and https://www.yout
metallic (met) materials
47 L47 Abrasives, Nano ube.com/watch?v
Understand a material, which is
Materials =XQuMeV2vJFs
often a mineral, that is used to
Time: 4min
shape or finish a workpiece
through rubbing which leads to
part of the workpiece
can able to
 Understand ceramic is an Chalk & Talk
Properties and inorganic non-metallic solid https://www.yout
48 L48 Applications of made up of either metal or non- ube.com/watch?v
CERAMICS metal compounds that have =XQuMeV2vJFs
been shaped and then hardened Time: 4min
by heating to high
temperatures.
Introduction to can able to
Chalk & Talk
composite materials,  Understand combination of a
Various methods of matrix and a reinforcement, https://www.yout
component which when combined gives
manufacture of properties superior to the =lXYKKDiCroM
composite properties of the individual Time: 5min
components.
Chalk & Talk
can able to
https://www.yout
Particulate  Apply the improvement of
Reinforced materials mechanical behavior depends
on strong bonding at the =haYuTANzzS8
matrix- particle interface Time: 5min
Fiber reinforced
51 L51  Apply and Understand different ube.com/watch?v
material
types of FRP’s =wsSocPgsbI8
 Applications of fibers Time: 5min
Metal ceramic can able to https://www.yout
52 L52
mixtures  Understand composite material ube.com/watch?v
with at least two constituent =iZb-y6Nrxeg

parts, one being Time: 3min

a metal necessarily, the other
material may be a
different metal or another
material
Chalk & Talk
can able to
Metal matrix https://www.yout
53 L53  Understand how a hybrid
composites ube.com/watch?v
composite can form
=iZb-y6Nrxeg
 Understand applications of Time: 3 min
MMC in real world
54 L54 c-c composites  Understand C-C composites ube.com/watch?v
 Applications of c-c composites =7Q5An-X-5yA
in real world Time: 5min
Polymers,
can able to
55 L55 application of
 Understand about polymers and
polymers
its applications
14.10 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT

OFPROGRAM OUTCOMES
Program Outcomes
I H S H
II H S
III H S
IV H S H
V H
VI H S

PROGRAM OUTCOMES
Course Program Outcomes

Outcomes A B C D E F G H I J K L M
I S H S H H S H H
II S H H H H S H H
III S H S H H S H H
IV S S S S S S S S

V S S H S
VI H S S S

3. Applying 4. Analyzing 5. 6. Creating

/ / Analysis : Evaluating / / Synthesis
2.
Application: Separates Evaluation: :
Understanding
Use a material or Make Builds a
/
concept in a concepts into judgments structure or
Comprehension
new component about the pattern
1. :
situation or parts so that value of from
Remembering Comprehending
Blooms Taxonomy / Knowledge: the unprompted its ideas or diverse
meaning,
use of an organizational materials. elements.
Recall or translation,
abstraction. structure may Put parts
retrieve interpolation,
Applies what be Key Words: together to
previous and
was learned understood. Agree, form a
learned interpretation of
in the Distinguishes
Appraise, whole, with
information. instructions and
classroom between facts
Assess, emphasis
problems. State
into novel and Award, on creating
Key Words: a problem in
situations in inferences. Choose, a new
Choose, one's own
the work Compare, meaning or
Define, Find, words.
place. Key Words: Conclude, structure.
How, Label,
Analyze, Criteria,
List, Match, Key Words:
Key Words: Assume, Criticize, Key
Name, Omit, Classify,
Apply, Categorize, Decide, Words:
Recall, Relate, Compare,
Build, Classify, Deduct, Adapt,
Select, Show, Contrast,
Choose, Compare, Defend, Build,
Spell, Tell, Demonstrate,
Course Outcomes What, When, Explain, Extend, Construct, Conclusion, Determine, Change,
Develop, Contrast, Disprove, Choose,
Where, Illustrate, Infer,
Experiment, Discover, Estimate, Combine,
Which, Who, Interpret,
with, Dissect, Evaluate, Compile,
Why Outline, Relate,
Identify, Distinguish, Explain, Compose,
Rephrase,
Interview, Divide, Importance, Construct,
Show,
Make use of, Examine, Influence, Create,
Summarize,
Model, Function, Interpret, Delete,
Translate
Organize, Inference, Judge, Design,
Plan, Select, Inspect, List, Justify, Develop,

Solve, Motive, Mark, Discuss,

Utilize Relationships, Measure, Elaborate,
Simplify, Opinion, Estimate,
Survey, Take, Perceive, Formulate,
part, in, Test Prioritize, Happen,
For, Theme Prove, Rate, Imagine,
Recommend, Improve,
Rule on, Invent,
Select, Make up,
Support, Maximize,
value Minimize,
Modify,
Original,
Originate,
Plan,
Predict,
Propose,
Solution,
Solve,
Suppose,
Test,
Theory
1. An ability to
apply knowledge of
mathematics,
science and
engineering, to √ √ √
understand
different materials
and their properties.

2.An ability to
design a system,
component or
process to meet
desired needs
within, realistic
constraints such as
economic , safety,
√ √ √
manufacturability
and sustainability
etc.., while
selecting a material
to manufacture the
designed
components.
3 An ability to
identify the phases
and their
interrelationship in √ √ √
different alloy
systems.
4.A recognition of
the need for, and an
ability to engage in
lifelong learning
with the concepts
of composite,
√ √ √
ceramic and nano
materials for
practical
applications.

OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
UNIT-I
1. Particles that most effects material properties _______ [D]
(a) Neutrons (b) Protons (c) Electrons (d) Valence electrons
2. Atomic packing factor is _____ [C]

(a) Distance between two adjacent atoms (b) Projected area fraction of atoms on a plane
(c) Volume fraction of atoms in cell (d) none
3. Which of the following crystal structures is having with all sides unequal and no
angles are right [C]
a) Triclinic b) Rombohedral c) Triagonal d) Monoclinic
4. Which of the following is added to cast iron to increase fluidity and graphitizing: [A]
a) Sulphur b) Silicon c) Phosphorus d) Manganese
5. Any material that exhibits only a short-range order of atoms or ions is a/an ___ material
[C]
(a) Amorphous (b) crystalline (c) a&b (d) none
6. _____ is/are imperfections, or defects, in a crystalline material [B]

(a) point defects (b) line defects or dislocations (c) surface defects (d) a, b& c
7. In a crystal, line imperfection is called [C]

a) Freckle defect b) Scotty defect c) edge dislocation d) none
8. The metallic structure of mild steel is [B]

a) Cubic b) BCC c) FCC d) hexagonal closed packed
9. In a crystal, line imperfection is called [C]

a) Frankel defect b) Scotty defect c) edge dislocation d) Surface dislocation
10. Paramagnetic alpha iron changes to gamma iron at [B]

a)770o C b) 9100 C c) 14400 C d) 15390C
11. The crystal structure of gamma iron is [B]

a) BCC b) FCC c) hexagonal closed packed d) cubic structure
12. Not a Hume-Ruthery condition: [C]

(a) Crystal structure of each element of solid solution must be the same.
(b) Size of atoms of each two elements must not differ by more than 15%.
(c) Elements should form compounds with each other.
(d) Elements should have the same valence.
13. Gibbs phase rule for general system:

[D]
a) P+F=C-1 b) P+F=C+1 c) P+F=C-2 d) P+F=C+2

14. According to Hume-Rothery which of the following is not a factor to influence the solubility
of solid solutions
[C]
a) Valence electrons b) Type of Crystal c) Size of atom or molecule d) Atomicity
15. The family of Miller indices for crystal planes is represented by ____ type of parentheses.
[B]
a) ( ) b) { } c) <> d) [ ]
16. _______ are types of alloys

[C]
a)Single-phase alloys (b) multiple-phase alloys (c) a &b (d) none
17. A phase has the ___characteristics [A]

(a) The same structure or atomic arrangement throughout
(b) Roughly the same composition and properties throughout
(c) A definite interface between the phase and any surrounding or Adjoining phases
(d) a, b & c
18. How steels are primarily designated? [A]

a) According to tensile strength b) According to carbon content
c) According to alloying elements d) According to iron content
19. Which of the following is a non destructive test [A]

a) Impact b) charpy c) radiography d) tensile
20. Alloys of magnesium are [A]

a) Easy to machine b) magnetic c) light d) prone to corrosion
UNIT-II
1. The boundary line between (liquid solid) and (solid) regions must be part of _________.[B]
(a) Solves (b) Solidus (c) Liquid us (d) Tie-line
2. An invariant reaction that produces a solid up on cooling two liquids: [D]

(a) Eutectic (b) Peritectic (c) Monotectic (d) Syntectic
3. Eutectoid product in Fe-C system is called [A]

(a) Pearlite (b) Bainite (c) Ledeburite (d) Spheroidite
4. Ferrite + cementite in equal proportions in alternate layers is called [C]

a) Marten site b) Ledeburite c) Pearlite d) Zeolite
5. Which of the following is not a name of nodular cast iron; [A]

a) Speroidal graphitic b) spherulitic c) ductile d) chilled
6. Which of the following crystal structures is not having with all sides equal and all angles are right
angles [C]

a) Triclinic b) Simple Cubic c) Triagonal d) Monoclinic
7. ________ is the Eutectic product in Fe-C system [A]

(a) Pearlite (b) Bainite (c) Ledeburite (d) Spheroidite
8. ___ is a three-phase reaction in which two solids combine to form a third solid on cooling. [B]
(a) Peritectic (b) Peritectoid (c) Precipitate (d) a, b& c
9. _____ is a three-phase, invariant reaction in which one liquid phase solidifies to produce
two solid phases [A]
(a) Eutectic (b) Eutectoid (c) a& b (d) None
10. Lead is widely used in [A]

a) Storage batteries b) transformers c) switch gear d) none
11. Eutectoid steel contains the following percentage of carbon [A]

a) 0.02% b)0.3% c)063% d)0.8%
12. In nitriding steel components, the following atmosphere is generally used in the furnace [A]
a) Carbon b) inert c) nascent hydrogen d) ammonia
13. Euctiod steels have the structure of [A]

a)Pearlite alone b)ferrite and pearlite c)Cementite and pearlite d) ferrite and cementite
14. Gibbs phase rule for general system is given by the equation ______ [A]
15. Using _____ rule relative amounts of phases in a region can be deduced [B]
(a) Phase rule (b) Lever rule (c) a& b (d) None
16. Alloying element that promote graphitisation is [C]
a) chromium b) vanadium c) silicon d) cobalt
17. the alloy system representing solid solution type is [A]

a) copper-nickel b) copper-aluminium c) copper-silver d) copper- chromium
18. the alloy system representing interstitial solid solution is

[D]
a) copper-nickel b) copper-aluminium c) gold-silver d) iron-carbon
19. Euctiod steels have the structure of [A]
a)Pearlite alone b)ferrite and pearlite c)Cementite and pearlite d) ferrite and cementite
20.Lead is widely used in [A]

a) Storage batteries b) transformers c) switch gear d) none
UNIT-III
1. _______ are types of alloys [C]
a)Single-phase alloys (b) multiple-phase alloys (c) a &b (d) none

2. A phase has the ___characteristics [A]

(a) The same structure or atomic arrangement throughout
(b) Roughly the same composition and properties throughout
(c) A definite interface between the phase and any surrounding or Adjoining phases
(d) a, b & c
3. How steels are primarily designated?

[A]
a) According to tensile strength b) According to carbon content
c) According to alloying elements d) According to iron content
4. Which of the following is a non destructive test [A]

5. Alloying element that promote graphitisation is

[C]
6. the alloy system representing solid solution type is

[A]
7. the alloy system representing interstitial solid solution is ` [D]

a) copper-nickel b) copper-aluminium c) gold-silver d) iron-carbon
8. Usually stronger constituent of a composite is `[A]

a)Matrix (b) Reinforcement (c) Both are of equal strength (d) Can’t define
9. Longitudinal strength of fiber reinforced composite is mainly influenced by [A]

(a) Fiber strength
(b) Fiber orientation (c) Fiber volume fraction (d) Fiber length
10. __________ is/are the characteristic properties of composite materials [A]
(a) High strength-to- weight and stiffness-to-weight ratios
(b) good fatigue properties and toughness
(c) Anisotropic properties in many cases (d) a, b, & c

11. Which of the following metals are most commonly used as the matrix material in fiber-
reinforced? Metal–matrix composites? [A]
(a) Titanium (b) copper (c) iron (d) none
13. Alloys of magnesium are [A]
a) Easy to machine b) magnetic c) light d) prone to corrosion
14. is/are the characteristic properties of composite materials [A]

15.Longitudinal strength of fiber reinforced composite is mainly influenced by [A]

(a) Fiber strength
16.Usually stronger constituent of a composite is [A]

17.The alloy system representing solid solution type is [A]

18.Longitudinal strength of fiber reinforced composite is mainly influenced by [A]

(a) Fiber strength
19.Alloying element that promote graphitisation is [C]
20.In which of the following cast irons the carbon is found combined form [B]
a)White b) malleable c)gray d) nodular
UNIT-IV
1. Growth occurs by [C]
(a) Diffusion controlled individual movement of atoms
(b) Diffusion-less collective movement of atoms
(c) Both
(d) None
2. The % of carbon in gray cast iron usually varies between [C]

(a) 0.8-2 (b) 2-2.6 (c) 2.5-4 (d) 4-6.5
3. Austenite + cementite in equal proportions in alternate layers is called _____ [B]

a) Martensite b) Ledeburite c) Pearlite d) Zeolite
4. In which of the following cast irons the carbon is found combined form [B]
a)White b) malleable c)gray d) nodular

5. The bond formed by equal sharing of the electrons but contributed by one of the atoms is called
a) Covalent b) Dative bond c) Electrovalent Bond d) Metallic Bond [A]
6. The temperature below which all liquid has completely solidified is ________ [A]
(a) Solidus temperature (b) Liquidus temperature (c) a & b (d) none
7. _____ is used for making cutting tools [A]

(a) High carbon steel (b) white cast iron (c) grey cast iron (d) a, b& c
8. Which of the following process is not generally used for steels? [A]
a) Nitriding b) cyaniding c) age hardening d) induction hardening
9. Presence of Sulphur in cast iron [C]

a) Promotes oxidation b) retards fluidity
c) Promotes brittleness d) all of the above
10. Paramagnetic alpha iron changes to gamma iron as [A]

a) 7700C b) 9100C c) 14400C d)15390C
11. An grey cost iron, carbon is present [C]

a) Cementite b) free carbon c) flakes d) spheroids
12. Grey cast iron always usually welded by [A]

a) Gas welding b) arc welding c) Resistance welding d) thermit welding
13.In an Annealing Process, cooling is done in [A]
a)Air b) furnace c) oil d) water
14)-------------- is not a ceramic material [B]

a) Glass b) Bakelite c) clay d) aluminum oxide
15) The imperfection in the crystal structure of metal is called [A]

a) Dislocation b) slip c) fracture d) impurity
16) Usually stronger constituent of a composite is [A]

17) Which of the following is a non destructive test [A]

18 )Alloying element that promote graphitisation is [C]
19) In nitriding steel components, the following atmosphere is generally used in the furnace [A]
20) _____ is a three-phase, invariant reaction in which one liquid phase solidifies to produce
two solid phases [A]
(a) Eutectic (b) Eutectoid (c) a& b (d) None
UNIT-V

1. Crystal structure of copper is [D]

a) BCC b) HCP c) SC d) FCC
2. Combination of metals and ceramic is called [B]

a) Composite b) cermet c) alloy d) none
3. In an Annealing Process, cooling is done in [A]

a)Air b) furnace c) oil d) water
4. __________ is not a characteristic property of ceramic material [A]

(a) high temperature stability (b) high mechanical strength
(c) low elongation (d) low hardness
5. Which of the following items is not made of a ceramic material? [A]

(a) Ferrite (b) insulators (c) magnets (d) Reinforcing bar for cement concrete
6. Which of the following ceramics are commonly used as abrasives in grinding wheels? [D]
(a) Silicon dioxide (b) calcium oxide (c) carbon monoxide (d) silicon carbide
7. _______ is an inorganic, nonmetallic material which cools to a rigid solid without crystallization
A)Silicon carbide (b) glass (c) calcium oxide (d) silicon dioxide [B]
8. -------------- is not a ceramic material [B]

a) Glass b) Bakelite c) clay d) aluminum oxide
9. Which of the following is amorphous material? [D]

a) Lead b) brass c) glass d) silver
10. Gibbs phase rule is given by the equation [C]

a) F= C+n-P b) f= C+n+P c) f= C+2n-P d) f= C+n-2P
11.In nodular iron graphite is present in the form of [D]

a) Cementite b) free carbon c) flakes d) spheroids
12. The imperfection in the crystal structure of metal is called [A]

a) Dislocation b) slip c) fracture d) impurity
13. A process by which, continuous reinforcing fibers are accurately positioned in the
predetermined pattern to a hallow shape is [C]
a) Injection moulding b) filament winding
c) extrusion d) Compression moulding
14. Composite materials are classified based on [C]

(a) Type of matrix (b) Size-and-shape of reinforcement (c) Both (d) None
15. Usually stronger constituent of a composite is [A]

16. Longitudinal strength of fiber reinforced composite is mainly influenced by [A]

(a) Fiber strength (b) Fiber orientation (c) Fiber volume fraction (d) Fiber length

18. Which of the following metals are most commonly used as the matrix material in fiber-
reinforced? Metal–matrix composites? [A]
(a) Titanium (b) copper (c) iron (d) none
19. The percentage of zinc in Muntz metal is about [A]

a) 20 b) 30 c) 40 d) 15
20. _______ is an inorganic, nonmetallic material which cools to a rigid solid without
crystallization
a)Silicon carbide (b) glass (c) calcium oxide (d) silicon dioxide [B]
TUTORIAL QUESTIONS
Blooms
Course
Sl.no Questions Taxonomy
outcomes
level
Unit 1
Short answer questions
1. Define crystal structure? Application b
Explain the difference between crystalline and
2. comprehension d
noncrystalline?
3. Briefly explain about space lattice? Application b
4. Define solid solution? comprehension d
5. Define interstitial solid solution? knowledge a
6. Define subtitutional solid solution? Apply b
Difference interstitial and subtitutional solid
7. knowledge a
solutions?
8. Describe the rules of Humerothery? comprehension d
9. Discuss the crystal defects ? comprehension d
10. Briefly explain about FCC,BCC? knowledge a
Blooms
Course
outcomes
level
Unit 1
long answer questions
Diffrenece between crystalline and Non Crystelline
1. Application b
structures and Explain?
2. Explain about different types of crystal structures? Application b
a) Discuss the effect of grain boundaries on the
3. properties of metal/alloys? Application b
b) What is ASTM grain size number? Calculate the

number of grains per square millimeter when

number of equivalent grains observed at 200x was
62.
a) What is the importance of grain size in steel?
How do you determine grain size of the given steel?
4. b) Explain why grains are stronger than grain Application b
boundaries at high temperature and grain boundaries
are stronger than grain at room temperatures?
a) Define grain and grain boundary? How does the
presence of grain boundary Affect the physical and
mechanical properties of metals?
5. b) What is the effect of heating rate and cooling rate Application b
steel on grain growth and properties of steel
(consider heating to Austenite zone and cooling
from the same zone)?
a)Explain electron cloud. What is role of electron
6. cloud in metallic bond? Application b
b) Describe the binding of atoms in metals.
Write a short note on
a) Metallic bonding
7. b) Space lattice and unit cell comprehension b
c) Coordination number and atomic packing factor
d) Crystal structure
Explain the characteristic features of the following
8. with examples Application b
a) Metallic bond b) Ionic bond c) Covalent bond
a) what are the two kinds of solid materials? Glass
is not considering as true solid. Why?
b) How is metallic bond similar to both ionic and
9. covalent bond? Application b
c) Ionic solids are bad conductors of electricity but
an aqueous or fused solution of them conducts
electricity. Why?
a) Explain the governing rules for the formation of
substitutional solid solutions.
10. Application b
b) Differentiate between intermetallic compounds
and intermediate alloy phases.
Blooms
Course
outcomes
level
Unit 2
1. Define Phase? knowledge a
2. Define Lever Rule? Application b
3. Define Unary Phase rule? knowledge a
4. Explain about Binary Phase? Application b
5. Explain the transformations? knowledge a

6. Explain Different types of phases? knowledge a

7. Explain about cooling Curve? knowledge a
Explain different methods of construction of phase
8. knowledge a
diagram?
9. Draw the cooling curve for pure phase alloy? Application b
10. Draw FE-C Phase Diagram? Analysis d
Blooms
Course
outcomes
level
Unit 2
a) List the different experimental methods for
construction of a phase diagram and
Explain any one of them
1 b) What are the invariant reactions in iron- iron carbide Application b
equilibrium diagram?
Explain them.
a) One solid phase on heating through an invariant

temperature becomes two solid phases. What is the
2 invariant reaction? Application b
b) Define, a phase, a component and degree of freedom,
invariant reaction.
a) what is the role of size factor effect in changing the
3 nature of equilibrium diagram Application b
b) What is mean t miscibility gap?
a) What is phase rule? What is the difference between
the normal and the phase for metal systems?
4 Application b
b) Differentiate between equilibrium diagram and phase
diagram?
a) Discuss various methods used for drawing phase
diagrams.
5 b) Explain complete mutual solubility can occur between knowledge a
the two components of substitutional solid solutions but
not for an interstitial solid solution
a) What are tool steels? Classify them, and mention their
applications.
6 knowledge a
b) Discuss the properties and applications of
i) Hadfield Manganese steels
Describe briefly with a neat diagram the construction
7 Application b
and working of a ‘Blast furnace’.
write short on the following with neat sketches
8 Application b
a) Eutectoid reaction b) eutectic reaction
write short notes on the following
9 Application b
a) Lever rule b) Phase rule
10 Draw Fe- C phase diagram and label all the phases. Application b

Describe the phase changes during solidification of Fe-

0.45% C alloy.
Blooms
Course
outcomes
level
Unit 3
1. Define Cast Iron? comprehension c
2. What are the properties of Cast Iron? knowledge a
3. What are different types of Cast Iron? knowledge a
4. Explain about White Cast Iron? comprehension c
5. Explain about Grey Cast Iron? knowledge a
6. Explain about Nodular Cast Iron? knowledge a
7. Explain about Malleable Cast Iron? comprehension c
8. Define coupling with its types? knowledge a
9. What are the applications of cast Iron? knowledge a
10. Explain the Properties of White Cast Iron? comprehension c
Sl.no Questions Blooms Course

Taxonomy outcomes
level
Unit 3
1. State and describe various factors effecting the
knowledge a
properties of cast iron?
2. a) state and describe various factors effecting the
properties of cast iron
Application b
b) Distinguish between white heart and black hea
malleable iron.
3. Explain why
a) S.G Iron is stronger and tougher than gray iron with
Application b
same matrix.
b) N i- hard has high wear resistance.
4. Distinguish between
a) Describe how does the strength of the cast iron va
with the matrix?
Application b
b) Describe how does the ductility vary with the shape
of the graphite in cast iron?
c) White cast iron and grey cast iron.
5. a) Explain the malleabilizing treatment given to white
cast iron? Sketch the typical microstructure of malleable
Application b
cast iron. Label the phases in it.
b) Write short notes on tool and die steels?

6. a)What is the purpose of adding head to Brass?

b) What is the most important property of copper?
Analysis d
c) What type of alloys are included under the classific
bronzes?
7. What are the characteristics of titanium that make
attractive for certain
engineering applications? Analysis d
b) Which elements are used to alloy with titanium.
c) Why are some of the titanium alloys heat – treatable
8. a) differentiate between the terms brass and bronze.
b) Why most of the copper-zinc alloys are not age
knowledge a
enable?
c) What is dezincification? How it is minimized?
9. a) discuss the effect on corrosion resistance of copper
increasing the following addition of
i) Zinc
ii) Tin
Analysis d
iii) Nickel
b) Why is muntz metal heat treatable? Describe a
typical heat treatment and the resulting
microstructure.
10. • A) Explain the outstanding properties of aluminum.
B) What is meant by anodizing? Analysis d
C) Explain the heat treatment of Al-Cu alloys

Taxonomy outcomes
level
Unit 4
1. Define Composite? knowledge a
2. Define methods of component manufacture of
knowledge a
composites, particle?
3. What is particle - reinforced materials knowledge a
4. What is fiber reinforced materials knowledge a
5. What is metal ceramic mixtures comprehension c
6. Define Composite Materials? Analysis d
7. Define MMC? comprehension c
8. Define CCC? Analysis d
9 Define metal matrix composites knowledge a
10 What are the applications of polymers? knowledge a

Taxonomy outcomes
level
Unit 4


1. a) what are ceramic materials? Why are they so importa
Analysis d
b) Discuss the mechanical behaviour of ceramic materials.
2. a) what are the attractive package of properties of ce
materials? Indicate
Analysis d
Advantages, disadvantages of ceramic matrix composit
b) Discuss any one important ceramic matrix composit
3. a) What are ceramics? Indicate their main characteristic
Application b
b) Discuss briefly classification of ceramic materials.
4. Briefly explain different methods of component
knowledge a
manufacture of composites, particle?
5. a) Discuss in detail about the Micro electromecha
systems (MEMS). Application b
b) Classify the ceramic based upon their applications.
6. Write short notes on
• MMC
• CMC comprehension c
• C- C
7 Write short notes on

a) Laminates (Laminated Composite Materials) Analysis d
b) Ceramics and applications
8 Write short notes on
• particle - reinforced materials
Analysis d
• fiber reinforced materials
• metal ceramic mixtures
9 (a) What is a cermet? Give the structure, properties
applications of any one cermet. Analysis d
(b) Discuss briey on abrasive materials.
ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

Taxonomy outcomes
level
Unit 1
1. Define crystal structure? comprehension c
Explain the difference between crystalline and
2. knowledge a
noncrystalline?
3. Briefly explain about space lattice? knowledge a
4. Define solid solution? Application b
5. Define interstitial solid solution? comprehension c
6. Define subtitutional solid solution? comprehension c
Difference interstitial and subtitutional solid
7. Remember I
solutions?
8. Describe the rules of Humerothery? Application b
9. Discuss the crystal defects ? comprehension c

10. Briefly explain about FCC,BCC? knowledge a

Taxonomy outcomes
level
Unit 1
Difference between crystalline and Non Crystalline
1. Application b
structures and Explain?
2. Explain about different types of crystal structures? Application b
a) Discuss the effect of grain boundaries on the
properties of metal/alloys?
3. b) What is ASTM grain size number? Calculate the Application b
number of grains per square millimeter when number
of equivalent grains observed at 200x was 62.
a) What is the importance of grain size in steel? How
do you determine grain size of the given steel?
4. b) Explain why grains are stronger than grain comprehension c
boundaries at high temperature and grain boundaries
are stronger than grain at room temperatures?
a) Define grain and grain boundary? How does the
presence of grain boundary Affect the physical and
mechanical properties of metals?
b) What is the effect of heating rate and cooling rate
5. comprehension c
steel on grain growth and properties of steel (consider
heating to Austenite zone and cooling from the same
zone)?
a)Explain electron cloud. What is role of electron

6. cloud in metallic bond? comprehension c
b) Describe the binding of atoms in metals.
Write a short note on
a) Metallic bonding
b) Space lattice and unit cell
7. comprehension c
c) Coordination number and atomic packing
factor
d) Crystal structure
Explain the characteristic features of the following
with examples
8. Remember d
a) Metallic bond b) Ionic bond c) Covalent
bond
a) what are the two kinds of solid materials? Glass is
not considering as true solid. Why?
b) How is metallic bond similar to both ionic and
9. covalent bond? Application a
c) Ionic solids are bad conductors of electricity but an
aqueous or fused solution of them conducts
electricity.

a) Explain the governing rules for the formation of

substitutional solid solutions.
10. Application a
b) Differentiate between intermetallic compounds
and intermediate alloy phases.

Taxonomy outcomes
level
Unit 2
Define Phase?
knowledge a
1.
2. Define Lever Rule? knowledge a
3. Define Unary Phase rule? knowledge a
4. Explain about Binary Phase? knowledge a
5. Explain the transformations? knowledge a
6. Explain Different types of phases? Analyze d
7. Explain about cooling Curve? comprehension c
Explain different methods of construction of phase
8. Application b
diagram?
9. Draw the cooling curve for pure phase alloy? comprehension c
10. Draw FE-C Phase Diagram? Application b

Taxonomy outcomes
level
Unit 2
a) List the different experimental methods for
construction of a phase diagram and
Explain any one of them
1. Application b
b) What are the invariant reactions in iron- iron
carbide equilibrium diagram?
Explain them.
a) One solid phase on heating through an invariant
temperature becomes two solid phases. What is the
2. invariant reaction? Application b
b) Define, a phase, a component and degree of
freedom, invariant reaction.
a) what is the role of size factor effect in changing
3. the nature of equilibrium diagram Application b
b) What is mean t miscibility gap?
a) What is phase rule? What is the difference
between the normal and the phase for metal
4. comprehension d
systems?
b) Differentiate between equilibrium diagram and phase

diagram?
a) Discuss various methods used for drawing phase
diagrams.
5. b) Explain complete mutual solubility can occur Application b
between the two components of substitutional solid
solutions but not for an interstitial solid solution
Explain the different methods of construction of pha
6. Application d
diagram
What is accomplished by normalizing?What is a
7. Evaluation c
TTT diagram
write short on the following with neat sketches
8. Application b
a) Eutectoid reaction b) eutectic reaction
write short notes on the following
9. Application b
a) Lever rule b) Phase rule
Draw Fe- C phase diagram and label all the phases.
10. Describe the phase changes during solidification of Application b
Fe-0.45% C alloy.

Taxonomy outcomes
level
Unit 3
Short long answer questions
1. Define Cast Iron? knowledge a
2. What are the properties of Cast Iron? knowledge a
3. What are different types of Cast Iron? knowledge a
4. Explain about White Cast Iron? Analysis d
5. Explain about Grey Cast Iron? Analysis d
6. Explain about Nodular Cast Iron? Application b
Explain about Mallaible Cast Iron? comprehensi
7. c
on
8. Define coupling with its types? Application b
What are the applications of cast Iron? comprehensi
9. c
on
10. Explain the Properties of White Cast Iron? Application b
Blooms
Course
outcomes
level
Unit 3
State and describe various factors effecting the properties
1 comprehension c
of cast iron?
a) state and describe various factors effecting the properties
2 of cast iron knowledge a
b) Distinguish between white heart and black heart malleable

iron.
Explain why
a) S.G Iron is stronger and tougher than gray iron with same
3 Analysis d
matrix.
b) N i- hard has high wear resistance.
Distinguish between
a) Describe how does the strength of the cast iron vary with
the matrix?
4 knowledge a
b) Describe how does the ductility vary with the shape of the
graphite in cast iron?
c) White cast iron and grey cast iron.
a) Explain the malleabilizing treatment given to white cast
iron?
5 Sketch the typical microstructure of malleable cast iron. Evaluation b
Label the phases in it.
b) Write short notes on tool and die steels?
a)What is the purpose of adding head to Brass?
b) What is the most important property of copper?
6 Application b
c) What type of alloys are included under the classification
bronzes?
What are the characteristics of titanium that makes it attracti
for certain
engineering applications?
7 Application b
b) Which elements are used to alloy with titanium.
c) Why are some of the titanium alloys heat – treatable?
a) differentiate between the terms brass and bronze.

8 b) Why most of the copper-zinc alloys are not age-hard ena comprehension c
c) What is dezincification? How it is minimized?
a) discuss the effect on corrosion resistance of copper when
increasing the following addition of
i) Zinc
9 ii) Tin knowledge a
iii) Nickel
b) Why is muntz metal heat treatable? Describe a typical
heat treatment and the resulting microstructure.
• A) Explain the outstanding properties of aluminum.
10 B) What is meant by anodizing? Analysis d
C) Explain the heat treatment of Al-Cu alloys

Blooms
Course
outcomes
level
Unit 4
1 Define Composite? knowledge a
Define methods of component manufacture of
2 knowledge a
composites, particle?
3 What is particle - reinforced materials knowledge a
4 What is fiber reinforced materials knowledge a
5 What is metal ceramic mixtures knowledge a
6 Define Composite Materials? knowledge a
7 Define MMC? comprehension c
8 Define CCC? knowledge a
Define metal matrix composites?
9 knowledge a
10 What are the applications of polymers? knowledge a

Taxonomy outcomes
level
Unit 4
a) what are ceramic materials? Why are they so important
1. b) Discuss the mechanical behaviour of ceramic materials.knowledge a
a) what are the attractive package of properties of ceramic

materials? Indicate
2. Advantages, disadvantages of ceramic matrix composites.knowledge a
b) Discuss any one important ceramic matrix composite.
a) What are ceramics? Indicate their main characteristics.

3. b) Discuss briefly classification of ceramic materials. Application b
Briefly explain different methods of component

4. Application b
manufacture of composites, particle?
a) Discuss in detail about the Micro electromechanical sy
5. (MEMS). Application b
b) Classify the ceramic based upon their applications.
Write short notes on
• MMC
6. • CMC Evaluation b
• C- C
7. Write short notes on knowledge a

a) Laminates (Laminated Composite Materials)

b) Ceramics and applications
Write short notes on
• particle - reinforced materials
8. • fiber reinforced materials knowledge d
• metal ceramic mixtures
(a) What is a cermet? Give the structure, properties and

9. applications of any one cermet. Application b
(b) Discuss briey on abrasive materials.
a) what are ceramic materials? Why are they so important
10.b) Discuss the mechanical behaviour of ceramic materials.Analysis d

15.0 THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB (A10328)
Course Title THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB

Course Code A50383
Regulation R 13
Course Structure
3 2
Course Coordinator Mr. K. Sandeep Kumar
Mr. K. Sandeep Kumar, Mrs.DurgaBhavani, Mr.Arun Reddy,
Team of Instructors
Mr.Bridjesh.P
COURSE OVERVIEW:
Analyze the operation and control of engines, power plants, pumps and compressors.
Emphasis on principles underlying performance characteristics of devices,
measurement techniques, interpretation of experimental data, and presentation of
results.
17.2 PREREQUISITES:
UG 2 3 Thermodynamics, IC engines

Marks Distributions (Traditional Evaluation methods)

Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks
midterm examination consists of one paper. For
experimental results 10 marks are allocated,
Record and Observation carries 5 marks each and
5 marks for Viva voce. First midterm
examination shall be conducted for 6 experiments
50 75
of syllabus and second midterm examination shall
be conducted for another 6 experiments The total
marks secured by the student in each midterm
examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the
average of the two midterm examinations shall be
taken as the final marks secured by each
candidate.


Able to draw the Valve and Port timing diagram Midterm and University
a
of 4-S and 2-S engines examinations
Able to analysethe performance of reciprocating Midterm and University
b
compressor. examinations
Able to analyse the performance of CI and SI Midterm and University
c
engines. examinations
Able to analyse the performance of VCR diesel Midterm and University
d
engine and multi cylinder petrol engine examinations
Able to assemble and disassemble the engine Midterm and University
e
examinations

1 I Mid Examination 3 hours 25
2 II Mid Examination 3 hours 25
Total 50

Blooms
S.No Course Objectives Course Outcomes
Level
I.To apply basic conservation a. An understanding of the basic
1 laws to understand the performance of pumps and BL 1
performance of energy compressors.
conversion systems
II.To make measurements b. An understanding of the
2 appropriate to the performance and emissions of BL 2
characterization of energy Diesel and spark ignition engines.
conversion systems.
c. An understanding of basic
III.To write reports describing
3 cogeneration principles. An BL 3
the performance of energy
understanding of good laboratory
conversion sstems.
practice.
d. An ability to prepare effective
IV.To give effective oral written reports on the performance
presentations on experimental of energy conversion systems.
4 characterization of energy e. An ability to prepare and present BL 4
conversion systems effective oral reports on the
performance of energy conversion
systems.
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

17.6HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:
Program Outcomes Level Proficiency assessed by

Midterm and University
A foundations, to real-world problems (fundamental S
examinations
engineering analysis examinations skills)
An ability to design, analyze and interpret data Midterm and University
B H
(information retrieval skills) of mechanical devices examinations
system, process, component, or program to meet
desired needs, within realistic constraints such as Midterm and University
C H
economic, environmental, social, political, health and examinations
safety, manufacturability, and sustainability
examinations(Creative Skills)
An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary
D S --
teams (team work)
An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate
E according to engineering requirements for obtaining S
examinations
its solution (engineering problem solving skills)
F security and social issues and responsibilities N --
An ability to communicate effectively both in writing
G N --
and global impact of engineering solutions on
H N --
individuals, organizations, and society (engineering
impact assessment skills)
Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage
I in continuing professional development and life-long H
examinations
learning (continuing education awareness)
J N --
awareness)
K necessary for engineering practice (practical N --
An ability to apply design and development principles
L in the construction of machinery for varying Midterm S
examinations
and complexity (software hardware interface)
M competitive examinations that offer challenging and N --
rewarding careers in computing (Successful career and

17.7 JNTUH Syllabus

1. Valve timing diagram / Port timing diagram
2. IC engine performance test for 4 stroke SI engine
3. IC engineperformance test for 2 stroke SI engine
4. IC engine Morseretardation motoring tests
5. IC engine heat balance –SI engine
6. IC engine economical speed teston SI engine
7. Determination of A/F Ratio and Volumetric Efficiency on IC Engines.
8. Heat balance test on diesel engine
9. Performance test on variable compression ratio engine
10. Volumetric efficiency of a reciprocating air compressor
11. Assembling and disassemblingIC engine
12. Study of boilers

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Objectives
I S H S H S H H
II S S H H S S
III H S H S S H S
IV S H S H H S S
V S S S S S S H

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
a S H S H S H H
b S S H H S S
c H S H S S H S
d S H S H H S S
e S S S S S S H

6.
Creating
/
5.
Synthesis
Evaluating
:
/
Builds a
4. Analyzing Evaluation:
Blooms 3. Applying structure
/ Analysis : Make
Taxonomy / or pattern
Separates judgments
 Application from
material or about the
: diverse
2. concepts into value of
Use a elements.
Understandin component ideas or
concept in a Put parts
g/ parts so that materials.
new together
Comprehensio its
situation or to form a
1. n: organization Key
unprompted whole,
Rememberin Comprehendin al structure Words:
Course use of an with
g/ g the meaning, may be Agree,
Outcomes abstraction. emphasis
Knowledge: translation, understood. Appraise,
Applies on
Recall or interpolation, Distinguishe Assess,
what was creating a
retrieve and s between Award,
learned in new
previous interpretation facts and Choose,
the meaning
learned of instructions inferences. Compare,
classroom or
information. and problems. Conclude,
into novel structure.
State a problem Key Words: Criteria,
situations in
Key Words: in one's own Analyze, Criticize,
the work Key
Choose, words. Assume, Decide,
place. Words:
Define, Find, Categorize, Deduct,
Adapt,
How, Label, Key Words: Classify, Defend,
Key Build,
List, Match, Classify, Compare, Determine,
Words: Change,
Name, Omit, Compare, Conclusion, Disprove,
Apply, Choose,
Recall, Contrast, Contrast, Estimate,
Build, Combine,
Relate, Demonstrate, Discover, Evaluate,
Choose, Compile,
Select, Show, Explain, Dissect, Explain,
Construct, Compose,
Spell, Tell, Extend, Distinguish, Importance,
Develop, Construct
What, When, Illustrate, Infer, Divide, Influence,
Experiment, , Create,
Where, Interpret, Examine, Interpret,
with, Delete,
Which, Who, Outline, Function, Judge,
Identify, Design,
Why Relate, Inference, Justify,
Interview, Develop,
Rephrase, Inspect, List, Mark,
Make use Discuss,
Show, Motive, Measure,
of, Model, Elaborate,
Summarize, Relationship Opinion,
Organize, Estimate,
Translate s, Simplify, Perceive,
Plan, Formulat
Survey, Prioritize,
Select, e,
Take, part, Prove, Rate,
Solve, Happen,
in, Test For, Recommen
Utilize Imagine,
Theme d, Rule on,
Improve,
Select,
Invent,
Support,
Make up,
value
Maximize
,
Minimize

, Modify,
Original,
Originate,
Plan,
Predict,
Propose,
Solution,
Solve,
Suppose,
Test,
Theory
An
understanding
of the basic
performance √ √ √
of pumps and
compressors.
An
understanding
of the
performance
and emissions √ √
of Diesel and
spark ignition
engines.
An
understanding
of basic √ √ √
cogeneration
principles.
An
understanding
of good √ √ √
laboratory
practice.
An ability
to prepare
effective
written
reports on
the √ √ √
performanc
e of energy
conversion
systems.
An ability to
prepare and
present
effective oral
reports on the √ √ √
performance
of energy
conversion

systems.

10.MACHINE TOOLS LAB - A10329
16.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION (Machine Tools Lab)
Course Title MACHINE TOOLS LAB

Course Code A10329
Regulation R-13
Course Structure
3 2
Course Coordinator Mr. P.Subramanyam
Team of Instructors Mr.G.Chandhra Mohan Reddy
COURSE OVERVIEW:
By the end of the course student will be able to perform Step turning and taper turning
using lathe machine, Thread cutting and knurling using lathe machine, Drilling and
step boring using lathe machine,drilling and Tapping using drilling machine, Length,
Depth, Diameter measuring using vernier calipers & micrometer. Bore measurement
using bore gauge Use of gear teeth caliper for checking the chordal addendum and
chordal height of spur gear. Angle and taper measurements using Bevel protractor,
Sine bar and slip gauges.
16.2 PREREQUISITES:

Engineering Workshop,
UG 2 3 Production technology,
Machine Drawing.


Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks

midterm examination consists of one paper. For
50 75


candidate.
Demonstrate knowledge of different

a Lab Experiments,
machine tools used in machine shop.
Hands on experience on lathe machine to

Lab Experiments, Mid Term
b perform turning, facing, threading
examinations, End Examinations
operations.
Perform step, taper turning, knurling and Lab Experiments, Mid Term
c
threading. examinations, End Examinations
Produce stepped surface using shaper and Lab Experiments, Mid Term
d
keyway using milling machine. examinations, End Examinations
Practical exposure on flat and cylindrical

e surface machining and finishing by milling
and grinding operations.
Perform to prepare tool angles by different Lab Experiments, Mid Term

f
machines. examinations, End Examinations

Total 50


I. An Understand about the a.Demonstrate knowledge
1 different machine tools used in of different machine tools BL 1
machine shop. used in machine shop.
b.Hands on experience on
II. Illustrate lathe machine to
2 lathe machine to perform BL 2
perform turning, facing,
turning, facing, threading
threading operations.
operations.
III.Conducting the experiments
c.Perform step, taper
3 on lathe operations like step, BL 3
turning, knurling and
taper turning, knurling and
threading.
threading.
IV.Conducting the experiments
on stepped surface using d. To gain and inspect the
4 shaper and keyway using skill development in drilling BL 4
milling machine. and threading operations.
V.Importance of the practical e.Produce stepped surface

exposure on flat and cylindrical using shaper and keyway
5 surface machining and BL 5
using milling and finishing
finishing by milling and machine.
grinding operations.
f.Practical exposure on flat
VI. An ability to plan the and cylindrical surface
6 prepare tool angles by different machining and finishing by BL 6
machines. milling and grinding
operations.
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)


Theory Classes and Daily
Lab Experiments
Lab Experiments, Midterm
An ability to design, analyze and interpret data
B H and University
(information retrieval skills) of mechanical devices
examinations
Lab Experiments , Midterm
desired needs, within realistic constraints such as
C S and University
economic, environmental, social, political, health
examinations
and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability
D N --
examinations
An ability to communicate effectively both in
G N --
writing and orally (speaking / writing skills)
H N --
Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage Lab Experiments , Midterm
I in continuing professional development and life- H and University
long learning (continuing education awareness) examinations
J N --
awareness)
principles in the construction of machinery for
L S and University
varying Midterm and complexity (software
examinations
hardware interface)
professional development by pursuing postgraduate
M studies or face competitive examinations that offer S
Lab Experiments
challenging and rewarding careers in computing
(Successful career and immediate employment).

16.7 SYLLABUS:
Introduction of general purpose machine - Lathe, Drilling machine, Milling machine,

Shaper.
Planing machine, slotting machine, Cylindrical Grinder, surface grinder and tool and
cutter grinder.
Step turning and taper turning on lathe machine.
Thread cutting and knurling on -lathe machine.
Shapping Slotting and Planning
Drilling and Taping
Milling
Surface Grinding
Cylindrical Grinding
Grinding of Tool angles.
16.8 COURSE PLAN:

Outcomes.
Lecture. Course Learning Outcomes

Levels Experiments to be covered
No.
Introduction of general purpose machine -
An Understand about the
1 L1 different machine tools used Lathe, Drilling machine, Milling machine,
in machine shop. Shaper.
Conducting the experiments Planing machine, slotting machine,

on lathe operations like step, Cylindrical Grinder, surface grinder and
2 L3
taper turning, knurling and
threading. tool and cutter grinder.
Gain the experience on lathe Step turning and taper turnin,. Thread
3 L2 machine to perform turning,
cutting and knurling on -lathe machine.
facing, threading operations
Conducting the experiments
on stepped surface using Shapping Slotting and Planning
4 L2
shaper and keyway using
milling machine
Skill development in drilling Drilling and Taping
5 L2
and threading operations.
6 L2 on stepped surface using Milling
shaper and keyway using

milling machine.
understanding of the
practical exposure on flat
7 L1 surface machining and Surface Grinding
finishing by grinding
operations.
practical exposure on Cylindrical Grinding
8 L2
cylindrical surface finishing
by grinding operations.
An ability to prepare tool Grinding of Tool angles.
9 L1
angles by different machines.

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Objectives
I S H S S H S S
II S H S S H S S
III S H S S H S S
IV S H S S H S S
V S H S S H S S

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
a S H S S H S S
b S H S S H S S
c S H S S H S S
d S H S S H S S
e S H S S H S S


6. Creating /
Synthesis :
Builds a
structure or
pattern from
diverse
elements. Put
5. Evaluating /
parts together
Evaluation:
to form a
4. Analyzing / Make judgments
Blooms whole, with
Analysis : about the value
Taxonomy  emphasis on
3. Applying / Separates material of ideas or
creating a
Application: or concepts into materials.
new meaning
Use a concept in component parts
2. Understanding / or structure.
a new situation so that its Key Words:
Comprehension :
or unprompted organizational Agree, Appraise,
1. Remembering / Comprehending the Key Words:
use of an structure may be Assess, Award,
Knowledge: meaning, translation, Adapt, Build,
abstraction. understood. Choose,
Recall or retrieve interpolation, and Change,
Applies what Distinguishes Compare,
previous learned interpretation of Choose,
was learned in between facts and Conclude,
information. instructions and Combine,
the classroom inferences. Criteria,
problems. State a Compile,
Course into novel Criticize,
Key Words: problem in one's own Compose,
Outcomes situations in the Key Words: Decide, Deduct,
Choose, Define, words. Construct,
work place. Analyze, Assume, Defend,
Find, Create,
Categorize, Determine,
How, Label, List, Key Words: Delete,
Key Words: Classify, Disprove,
Match, Name, Classify, Compare, Design,
Apply, Build, Compare, Estimate,
Omit, Recall, Contrast, Develop,
Choose, Conclusion, Evaluate,
Relate, Select, Demonstrate, Discuss,
Construct, Contrast, Explain,
Show, Spell, Tell, Explain, Extend, Elaborate,
Develop, Discover, Dissect, Importance,
What, When, Illustrate, Infer, Estimate,
Experiment, Distinguish, Influence,
Where, Which, Interpret, Outline, Formulate,
with, Identify, Divide, Examine, Interpret, Judge,
Who, Why Relate, Rephrase, Happen,
Interview, Make Function, Justify, Mark,
Show, Summarize, Imagine,
use of, Model, Inference, Inspect, Measure,
Translate Improve,
Organize, Plan, List, Motive, Opinion,
Invent, Make
Select, Solve, Relationships, Perceive,
up,
Utilize Simplify, Survey, Prioritize, Prove,
Maximize,
Take, part, in, Rate,
Minimize,
Test For, Theme Recommend,
Modify,
Rule on, Select,
Original,
Support, value
Originate,
Plan, Predict,
Propose,
Solution,
Solve,
Suppose,
Test, Theory
a.Demonstrate
knowledge of
different machine √
tools used in
machine shop.
b.Hands on
experience on
lathe machine to
√ √ √
perform turning,
facing, threading
operations.
c.Perform step,
taper turning,
√ √ √
knurling and
threading.
d. To gain and
inspect the skill
development in
√ √ √
drilling and
threading
operations.

e.Produce stepped
surface using
shaper and
√ √ √
keyway using
milling and
finishing machine.
f.Practical
exposure on flat
and cylindrical
surface machining
√ √ √
and finishing by
milling and
grinding
operations.

17. DYNAMICS LAB (A10330)
Course Title DYNAMICS LAB

Course Code A10330
Regulation MLR-15
Course Structure
3 2
Course Coordinator Mr. G. Ananda Rao
Team of Instructors Mr.M.V.Babu and Mrs. S.Navya Sree
COURSE OVERVIEW:
This course expands on the mechanical engineering student’s background in dynamic synthesis
and analysis by providing significant skills and experience in creating and modeling mechanisms.
This course is intended to deal with the forces and their effects, while acting upon the machine
parts in motion. The knowledge of this subject is very essential for an engineer in designing the
various parts of a machine. Study of applications of gyroscopes is very helpful to learn the
precession and its effect on automobiles. The study of dynamics of machinery is an applied field
of mechanical engineering that is concerned with understanding the relationship between the
geometry and the motions of the parts of a machine and the forces that produce this motion. This
course helps to learn how to analyze the motions of mechanisms, design mechanisms to have
given motions, and analyze forces in machines. Application of vibrations to the analysis and
design of machines and mechanical components.
.17.2 PREREQUISITES:

Engineering Mechanics and
UG 2 3
Kinematics of Machinery,


Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks

midterm examination consists of one paper. For 50 75


candidate.
An understanding of the basic performance

a of steady state amplitude of a forced Lab Experiments,
vibratory system
An understanding of the performance of Lab Experiments, Mid Term

b Static balancing using steel balls examinations, End Examinations

c An understanding of basic Direct Kinematic
analysis of a robot examinations, End Examinations

d An understanding of good laboratory
practice on gyroscopic couple examinations, End Examinations
An ability to prepare effective written

e reports on the performance Palletizing
operation using Robot programming.
An understanding of the magnitude and

orientation of the balancing mass in Lab Experiments, Mid Term
f dynamic balancing. examinations, End Examinations

Total 50

Blooms
S. No Course Objectives Course Outcomes
Level
I.To impart the basic concepts of a. The student will be able to
dynamics and to determine the understand the different forces BL 1, 2 &
1
forces acting on machines acting on machines. 5
considering friction.
b. The student will be able to
II. To impart the basic concepts of
understand the effect of the
gyroscopes to understand the
2 gyroscopic and centrifugal BL 1,2 & 6
stability of two wheelers and four
couples for the design of the
wheelers.
bearings.
c. The student will be able to
III. To facilitate the students to
calculate forces and analyze for
3 formulate the concept of synthesis BL 3 & 4
the design of machine
and analysis of different machines.
components.
d. The student will be able to
IV. To facilitate the students to design and analyze the machines
design the machines based on considering friction, vibrations
4 BL 4 & 6
force analysis, proper balancing & and balancing properly.
controlling vibrations.
V. To facilitate the students to the

e. The student will be able to
analyze various machine
decide and plan to create a
components such as flywheels,
5 machine that competes with the BL 4 & 6
dynamometers, brakes, clutches
other manufacturers.
and governors.
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)


Lab Experiments
Lab Experiments, Midterm
An ability to design, analyze and interpret data
B H and University
(information retrieval skills) of mechanical devices
examinations
desired needs, within realistic constraints such as
C S and University
economic, environmental, social, political, health
examinations
and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability
D N --
examinations
An ability to communicate effectively both in
G N --
writing and orally (speaking / writing skills)
H N --
Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage Lab Experiments , Midterm
I in continuing professional development and life- H and University
long learning (continuing education awareness) examinations
J N --
awareness)
principles in the construction of machinery for
L S and University
varying Midterm and complexity (software
examinations
hardware interface)
professional development by pursuing postgraduate
M studies or face competitive examinations that offer S
Lab Experiments
challenging and rewarding careers in computing
(Successful career and immediate employment).

17.7 SYLLABUS:
Course Overview
By the end of the course student will be able to perform vibration analysis, balancing system and
Trajectory planning of a robot in joint space scheme..
Course Objectives
To create awareness on various vibration systems, gyroscopic couple, natural frequency and
FFT analyzer.
Course Outcomes
At the conclusion of the course, students will have:
An understanding of the basic performance of steady state amplitude of a forced vibratory system
An understanding of the performance of Static balancing using steel balls
An understanding of basic Direct Kinematic analysis of a robot
An understanding of good laboratory practice.
An ability to prepare effective written reports on the performance Palletizing operation using
Robot programming
SYLLABUS
A Minimum of 10 experiments are to be conducted)
Experiments:
1. Determination of damped natural frequency of vibration of the vibrating system with different
viscous oils.
2. Determination of steady state amplitude of a forced vibratory system.
3. Static balancing using steel balls.
4. Determination of the magnitude and orientation of the balancing mass in dynamic balancing.
5. Field balancing of the thin rotors using vibration pickups.
6. Determination of the magnitude of gyroscopic couple, angular velocity of precession and
representation of vectors.
7. Determination of natural frequency of given structure using FFT analyzer.
8. Diagnosis of a machine using FFT analyzer.
9. Direct Kinematic analysis of a robot.
10. Inverse Kinematic analysis of a robot.
11. Palletizing operation using Robot programming.
17.8 COURSE PLAN:

Outcomes.
Lecture. Course Learning Outcomes

Levels Experiments to be covered
No.
Forced Vibration Of Equivalent Spring
Mass System
An Understand about the
1 L1 different vibration in the Lateral Vibration Of The Beam For
sysytem Different Damping

2 L3 Damped Torsional Oscillations And The
on damped torsional

vibration ysytem. Damping Coefficient.

Static Balancing Using Steel Static Balancing Using Steel Balls
3 L2 Balls
.
Study And Experiments On Static And

Conducting the experiments Dynamic Balancing Of Rotating Masses
4 L2
on balancing machine
Skill development Field Field Balancing Of The Thin Rotors Using

Balancing Of The Thin Vibration Pickups.
5 L2 Rotors Using Vibration
Pickups.
.
Understanding of the
practical exposure on Motorised Gyroscope
6 L2 Gyroscope couple
understanding of the Determination Of Natural Frequency Of

practical exposure FFT Given Structure Using Fft Analyzer.
Analyzer. Diagnosis Of A Diagnosis Of A Machine Using Fft
7 L1 Analyzer.
Machine Using Fft Analyzer.
Inverse Kinematic Analysis Of A Robot.

practical exposure on Palletizing Operation Using Robot
8 L2 Programming.
Kinematic Analysis Of A
Robot.

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Objectives
I S H S S H S S
II S H S S H S S
III S H S S H S S
IV S H S S H S S

V S H S S H S S

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
a S H S S H S S
b S H S S H S S
c S H S S H S S
d S H S S H S S
e S H S S H S S

6. Creating /
Synthesis :
5. Evaluating /
Builds a
Evaluation:
structure or
4. Analyzing / Make judgments
pattern from
Analysis : about the value
diverse
3. Applying / Separates material of ideas or
elements. Put
Application: or concepts into materials.
parts together
Use a concept in component parts
2. Understanding / to form a
a new situation so that its Key Words:
Blooms Comprehension : whole, with
or unprompted organizational Agree, Appraise,
Taxonomy  1. Remembering / Comprehending the emphasis on
use of an structure may be Assess, Award,
Knowledge: meaning, translation, creating a
abstraction. understood. Choose,
Recall or retrieve interpolation, and new meaning
Applies what Distinguishes Compare,
previous learned interpretation of or structure.
was learned in between facts and Conclude,
information. instructions and
the classroom inferences. Criteria,
problems. State a Key Words:
into novel Criticize,
Key Words: problem in one's own Adapt, Build,
situations in the Key Words: Decide, Deduct,
Choose, Define, words. Change,
work place. Analyze, Assume, Defend,
Find, Choose,
Categorize, Determine,
How, Label, List, Key Words: Combine,
Key Words: Classify, Disprove,
Match, Name, Classify, Compare, Compile,
Course Apply, Build, Compare, Estimate,
Omit, Recall, Contrast, Compose,
Outcomes Choose, Conclusion, Evaluate,
Relate, Select, Demonstrate, Construct,
Construct, Contrast, Explain,
Show, Spell, Tell, Explain, Extend, Create,
Develop, Discover, Dissect, Importance,
What, When, Illustrate, Infer, Delete,
Experiment, Distinguish, Influence,
Where, Which, Interpret, Outline, Design,
with, Identify, Divide, Examine, Interpret, Judge,
Who, Why Relate, Rephrase, Develop,
Interview, Make Function, Justify, Mark,
Show, Summarize, Discuss,
use of, Model, Inference, Inspect, Measure,
Translate Elaborate,
Organize, Plan, List, Motive, Opinion,
Estimate,
Select, Solve, Relationships, Perceive,
Formulate,
Utilize Simplify, Survey, Prioritize, Prove,
Happen,
Take, part, in, Rate,
Imagine,
Test For, Theme Recommend,
Improve,
Rule on, Select,
Invent, Make
Support, value
up,
Maximize,

Minimize,
Modify,
Original,
Originate,
Plan, Predict,
Propose,
Solution,
Solve,
Suppose,
Test, Theory
a.Demonstrate
knowledge of
different machine √
tools used in
machine shop.
b.Hands on
experience on
lathe machine to
√ √ √
perform turning,
facing, threading
operations.
c.Perform step,
taper turning,
√ √ √
knurling and
threading.
d. To gain and
inspect the skill
development in
√ √ √
drilling and
threading
operations.
e.Produce stepped
surface using
shaper and
√ √ √
keyway using
milling and
finishing machine.
f.Practical
exposure on flat
and cylindrical
surface machining
√ √ √
and finishing by
milling and
grinding
operations.


Dept. of MECH
MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 1

3-1 Mechanical HandBook 17-18 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3-1 Mechanical HandBook 17-18 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dept.

of MECH Student Hand Book

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043

Goals of Engineering education at undergraduate / graduate level:

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043

MARRI RAJASEKHAR REDDY – SECRETARY

Dr. P. BHASKARA REDDY – DIRECTOR

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043

MLR Institute of Technology

MECH STUDENT HANDBOOK

Document No: MLRIT/MECH/SHB/2017-18 Date of Issue: July-2017

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043

MLR Institute of Technology

1.5 TOEFL CENTRE:

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 1

1.6 ENGLISH LANGUAGE LABORATORY:

1.7 R&D Cell:

1.9 NATIONAL PROGRAMME ON TECHNOLOGY ENHANCED

1.10 CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:

1.11 PROFESSIONAL BODIES:

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 2

(IETE), Indian Society of Technical Education (ISTE), ELIAP and

1.12 EXTRA-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:

1.13 STUDENTS COUNSELING & CAREER SERVICES DEPT

1.14 FINISHING SCHOOL:

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 3

1.15 IN HOUSE PROJECTS:

 Sun Micro system Systems

 WIPRO: Mission – 10X Programme

 Institute of Electronic Governance

 Indo – US Collaboration for Engineering Education

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 4

Faculty Development Programme sponsored by Infosys

 IIIT, Gachibowli, Hyderabad

1.17 Student Achievements:

 Ms. R. PALANIAMMAL of Aeronautical Engineering department has

 A PRAVEEN KUMAR secured 105th rank in GATE.

 Rishit D Shah became the Microsoft Student Partner and Microsoft

 M.Prashanth Reddy and M. Ramya of CSE Department have been

 The CSE department students Nikhil Bharadwaj, Shashank and

 M. Pavan Kumar of CSE Department has been selected as brand

 The Institute has achieved 100% results in Aeronautical Engineering,

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 5

 The students of MLRIT have won Volleyball Tournament and were

 G. Manikanta Gupta, ECE 1st year won “National memory

1.18 Contact Information

Dean (CS) Prof. K. L. Chugh 9866666601

Department Head CSE Dr.N.Chandasekhar 9959535832

Department Head ECE Dr. A.V.Paramkusam 9160404638

Department Head IT Dr. KVSN Rama Rao 9848292046

Department Head AERO Dr.M.S.N.Guptha 9160404640

Department Head MECH Dr.S.Madhu 9160404635

Department Head MBA Ms. Suneetha 9160404639

Department Head H&S Dr.V.Radhika Devi 9848472797

Administration Mr.G.Prabhakar 9866675818

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 6

2. PLACEMENT & HIGHER STUDIES

2.1 INDUSTRY GRADE SKILLS REQUIRED FOR EMPLOYMENT

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 7

As students are the future leaders, the Responsibility, Accountability and

2.2 IMPORTANT CRITERIA OF EMPLOYMENT

2.3 HIGHER STUDIES